Pool Events | Coaching Manual 5th Edition Page 4 of 12 Going Unde
You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch. Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touchscreen display of your vehicle. The updated ...
You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch. Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touchscreen display of your vehicle.
Owner's manual
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Levante Owner's Manual
Dear Customer, Thank you for choosing a Maserati. This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and racing vehicles. With this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and options of your Maserati in order to take advantage of its full potential. Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touchscreen display of your vehicle. The updated version of the onboard documentation can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving. Keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and protect the environment. For "Scheduled Maintenance" or any other operation, contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer: you can trust our trained technical staff, who is constantly updated and provided with the required equipment in order to ensure that all service operations are performed properly and reliably. The Quick guide and other documents contained in onboard documentation kit are integral part of the vehicle and should always be kept on board. You can purchase a printed copy of the documents visible on dashboard touchscreen display at your dealer of your Authorized Maserati Dealer.
2
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
3
4
Introduction 1 Before Starting 2 Understanding the Vehicle 3 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4
Driving 5 In an Emergency 6 Maintenance and Care 7 Features and Specifications 8
Index 9
5
6
1 Introduction
Consulting the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Warnings when Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Maserati Roadside Assistance Program
(available for USA and Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Vehicle Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7
Introduction
Consulting the Manual
· If not otherwise specified, the
1
For an easy identification of the topics,
WARNING!
instrument cluster shown in the images belongs to the 3.0 V6
this Manual is divided into sections
Failure to comply with the instructions motorization model however the
and chapters: each chapter can have
could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS
indications given are also valid for all
more paragraphs.
involving personal and vehicle safety.
the other motorization models.
Within the text, important warnings
and notes are also easily identifiable
through icons.
ENVIRONMENTAL!
This note indicates the correct
behavior when using the vehicle to
WARNING!
protect the environment.
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of
CAUTION! Aimed at preventing any damage to the vehicle and thus hazards involving the safety of persons.
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
NOTE:
Additional information regarding the subject and/or the operation described.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
· "Left" and "right" in this manual, always refer to the driving direction.
· All indications and images in this Manual refer to a vehicle with left-hand drive. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are ordered
differently than shown in the
illustrations.
8
Introduction
Abbreviations
EBD
Electronic Brake-force
PEB
Pedestrian Emergency
Some descriptions and terms with
Distribution.
Braking.
1
particular meanings are found in this
ECU
Electronic Control Unit.
RAB
Ready Alert Braking.
manual in abbreviated form.
EDR
Event Data Recorder.
RCP
Rear Cross Path.
A/C
Air-Conditioning system.
EPB
Electric Parking Brake.
RKE
Remote Keyless Entry.
ABA
Advanced Brake Assist.
ESC
Electronic Stability Control. ROM Roll-Over Mitigation.
ABS
Anti-Lock Braking System.
ETC
Electronic Throttle Control. SAB
Side Air Bag.
ABSA Active Blind Spot Assist.
FCW Forward Collision Warning. SABIC Supplemental Side Air Bag
ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control.
HAS
Highway Assist.
Inflatable Curtains.
ADAS
AFS
ALR
AQS ATC
AWD BAS BSA
Advanced Driver Assistance Systems. Advanced Frontlighting System. Automatic Locking Retractor. Air Quality Sensor. Automatic Temperature Control. All-Wheel Drive. Brake Assist System. Blind Spot Assist.
HBA HDC HSA I.C.E.
LATCH
LDW
LKA MIL
Hydraulic Brake Assistance. Hill Descent Control. Hill Start Assist. Increased Control and Efficiency. Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren. Lane Departure Warning (LaneSense). Lane Keeping Assist. Malfunction Indicator Light.
SBR SRS
TCS TFT TPMS
TSA TSM VIN
Seat Belt Reminder. Supplemental Restraint System. Traction Control System. Thin Film Transistor. Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Traffic Sign Assist. Trailer Sway Mitigation. Vehicle Identification Number.
BTO
Brake Throttle Override.
MTC+ Maserati Touch Control
CAN
Controller Area Network.
Plus.
CC
Cruise Control.
OBD On Board Diagnostics.
CRS
Child Restraint System.
DRL
Daytime Running Lights.
ORC
Occupant Restraint Controller.
9
Introduction
Updating
1
Constant improvements are being
Service and Warranty
The information provided in this
that do not comply with Maserati's specifications. An Authorized Maserati Dealer is at
performed to maintain this vehicle's
manual is limited to instructions and your complete disposal for any
high level of quality. Therefore, there indications that are strictly required
information and questions you may
may be differences between this
for vehicle use and proper
have.
manual and your vehicle.
maintenance.
Maserati reserves the right to carry out By following these instructions
design and functional changes and to carefully, the vehicle will meet the
provide updates or improvements.
owner's satisfaction and best results.
This Owner's Manual illustrates and
We advise to have all service and
describes all versions of the current
inspections completed only by an
vehicle model. Therefore, some of the Authorized Maserati Dealer, where
equipment and accessories in this
you will find a specially trained staff
publication may not appear on your
and the proper equipment to repair
vehicle; please only consider the
your vehicle.
information related to your vehicle.
Please visit the www.maserati.com to
All specifications and illustrations
find the nearest Authorized Maserati
contained in this manual are as of the Dealer.
Manual publishing date.
All features and accessories installed
NOTE:
on the vehicle have been designed by Maserati engineers and have
The updated version of the on-board documentation can be consulted by
successfully passed rigorous tests, submitted in all conditions of use.
accessing the section "Services" on the Installing aftermarket components or
website www.maserati.com.
accessories not approved by Maserati
may interfere with the vehicle
electronics and compromise driving
safety and possibly voiding the
warranty coverage.
Nor do the warranties cover the costs
of repairing damage or conditions
caused by any changes to your vehicle
10
Introduction
Suggestions for Obtaining minimal daily charge. If you need a If You Need Assistance
Service for Your Vehicle
rental vehicle, it is advisable to make these arrangements prior to the visit,
The manufacturer/Maserati and its
1
Prepare for the Appointment
for example when you call to set the appointment.
Authorized Dealers/Service Network set highest priority to the client's
If warranty work is required, be sure
satisfaction with the products and
to have the right papers with you and
services.
take your warranty folder. Not all
Warranty service must be performed
work being performed may be
by an Authorized Maserati
covered by the warranty: therefore
Dealer/Service Center.
discuss additional charges with the
Should there be any issues, please
service manager. It is advisable to keep
keep in mind that most matters can be
a maintenance log of your vehicle's
resolved with the following process.
service history, as this can often provide a clue to the current problem.
· If for some reason you are still not satisfied, please contact the general
Prepare a List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you wish to be performed. If the vehicle has had an accident or work done that is not indicated on the maintenance log, please communicate this to the service advisor.
manager or owner of the Service Center, it is their responsibility to assist you.
· If a Service Center is unable to resolve the issue, you may contact Maserati Customer Center.
Any communication to the Maserati Consumer Affairs should include the following information:
Optimize the Requests
· Owner's name and address.
If there are a number of items needing attention, it is advisable to
· Owner's telephone number (home and office).
discuss this with your service advisor to agree on the order of priorities. At many Authorized Dealers/Service Centers, it is possible to obtain a
· Maserati Service Center name. · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). · Vehicle delivery date and mileage.
loaner vehicle or a rental vehicle at a
11
Introduction
Contact:
1
MASERATI North America, Inc. One Chrysler Drive
Auburn Hills,
MI 48326
Phone:
Maserati Customer Care
1877MY-MASERATI (8776962737)
or 12015102369
12
Warranty Information
Please refer to the Warranty booklet, included in the Owner's documentation kit, for the terms and provisions of Maserati warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
Reporting Safety Defects
NHTSA's Toll-free Auto Safety Hotline
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash, injury or death, immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Maserati North America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Maserati North America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), go to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parentsand-caregivers; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.nhtsa.gov/ parents-and-caregivers.
Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
Introduction
immediately inform Transport Canada Parts Service
Aftermarket Parts &
in addition to notifying Maserati North America, Inc.
Genuine Maserati parts keep the
Accessories Statement
1
Transport Canada can be contacted at: 1-800-333-0510 Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Mailing Address: Transport Canada Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1.
In Canada
reliability, comfort and performance of your new car unchanged throughout its life. For service and scheduled maintenance Maserati suggests you to ask for genuine parts since they are the result of constant research and development, reliability test and new technologies, as well as they are
Modification of the vehicle or installation of any accessory or components attached to the vehicle which alters the original engineering and/or vehicle operating specifications, or which result in damage to the other original components, electrical interference, electrical short(s), radio static, water
If you believe that your vehicle has a
specifically designed for this vehicle.
leaks and wind noise may result in
safety defect, contact the Customer
damage to genuine components,
Service Department immediately.
compromise the safety of the vehicle
Canadian customers who wish to
and may affect the validity of the new
report a safety defect to the Canadian
car warranty on the vehicle.
government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Non-genuine Maserati Parts
Non-genuine Maserati Parts (while you may elect to use non-genuine Maserati parts for maintenance or repair services), Maserati North
America, Inc. is not obligated to pay
for repairs that include non-genuine
Maserati parts or for any damage
resulting from the use of non-genuine
parts. Maserati will not accept any
liability for any parts and accessories
not approved by Maserati, including
Dealer-installed accessories not
distributed by Maserati North
America, Inc.
13
Introduction
Symbols
1
There are specific colored plates on or
near some of the components on your
Maserati designed to attract user's
Coolant expansion reservoir Do not open cap with engine warm.
attention. Important warnings
Coil - headlights
concerning all specific devices that the
High voltage.
user must consider, are reported on
the internal hood cover central label
Belts and pulleys
(see "Vehicle Identification Data" in
Moving parts, keep body
this section).
and clothing clear.
All symbols reported on the plate and
Air-conditioning lines
inside the vehicle, as well as the
High pressure gas, do not
component for which the symbols
open.
stand, are summarized in the
following list. These symbols are divided into categories according to their meaning.
Symbols of Prohibitions and Compulsory Measures
Danger Symbols
Battery Corrosive liquid.
Battery Explosion.
Blower May start automatically even with engine off.
Battery Keep away from flames.
Battery Keep out of children's reach. Heat guards - belts pulleys - fans Do not touch. Battery Wear eye protection.
Battery - jack Refer to the owner manual.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
14
Introduction
Warning Symbols
Engine - Engine Oil Filler Cap Engine oil. We recommend using an oil with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications".
Windshield washer fluid
Warnings when Driving
reservoir
Your driving skills will improve with
1
Windshield washer. We
experience, but be especially careful at
recommend using a liquid
the beginning. Always comply with
with the characteristics
local traffic regulations wherever you
indicated in chapter
drive.
"Refillings" in section
This vehicle is also suitable for off-road
"Features and
use, using the dedicated controls and
Specifications".
functions to obtain the optimum
Brake fluid reservoir
balance to safely face the situations
Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do
that this kind of route may pose.
not exceed max. level. We recommend using a fluid with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications".
Radiator coolant expansion reservoir Use antifreeze liquid for radiators. We recommend using a liquid with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications".
WARNING!
California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
We recommend you to start gradually in order to acquire the necessary expertise and the perfect control of the vehicle. Follow the indications contained in chapter "Off-road Drive" in section "Driving" for information concerning the off-road use of the vehicle. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Operating this vehicle at excessive speed or in an altered state or while intoxicated may result in loss of control, going off the road, or overturning. In all these situations a collision with other vehicles or objects is more likely to happen with the risk to cause an accident that may lead to serious injury.
15
Introduction
In case of an accident, failure to use
while the vehicle is moving can be
severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
1
seat belts causes the driver and passengers a greater risk of injury or
very dangerous and can cause serious accidents, and in some states
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a
death.
is against the law.
major cause of severe or fatal injury.
This Owner's Manual contains warnings against operating procedures that could result in a collision or injury or damage to the environment. It also contains cautions against procedures that could damage the vehicle. If you do not read this manual in its entirety, you may miss important information. Consider carefully all warnings and cautions. Important information may be missed
· It is very dangerous to send text messages while driving, do so only when the vehicle is not moving.
· In some Countries/States the use of mobile phones when driving is forbidden: it is the driver's sole responsibility to respect local regulations.
· ROLL-OVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
for not reading this manual in its entirely. Consider carefully all warnings and cautions.
WARNING! · It is the driver's responsibility to
operate the vehicle in a safe way: if you are distracted while driving you can lose control and cause serious accidents.
rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not. Do not
CAUTION!
If battery charge is too low, proper function of some electric/electronic components may not be guaranteed. It is necessary to recharge the battery in order to allow all vehicle's components and systems to function correctly.
· Maserati strongly recommends you use particular care when operating
attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
the features and tools that may distract you.
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
· Mobile phones, PC, portable audio
vehicle safely may result in a
device or other features operated
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and
16
Introduction
Maserati Roadside
Summary of Program Benefits
days of the rental car transaction to
Assistance Program
and Services
the address listed below; the original pre-printed rental car receipt, which
1
(available for USA and
· Towing of a disabled registered
must include your name, address,
Canada only)
Maserati vehicle. In the event a registered vehicle becomes disabled
telephone number, VIN, rental dates and the corresponding warranty
Welcome to Maserati and the benefits
in connection to a warranty related
repair order.
and security of the Maserati Roadside Assistance Program. Please take a moment to review the benefits listed below and available to you through the Maserati Roadside Assistance
concern it will be transported to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealership. You may request that the vehicle be taken to a different Authorized Maserati Dealer, as long
Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. P.O. Box 8140 Ft. Washington, PA 19034
Program.
as it is no more than 50 miles further NOTE: away from the nearest authorized
Emergency Roadside Services
In the event you require Roadside
dealer (one tow per disablement). · Battery jump start.
An authorized licensed driver must be driving at the time of the disablement.
Assistance, please call 1-888-371-1802, · Flat tire change providing the
Items excluded from coverage:
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. · Parts, labor, tire repair, rental of
will be connected with a Roadside
· Fuel delivery (up to 2 gallons).
towing equipment, storage fees, or
Assistance representative who will dispatch a local towing vendor.
· Lockout Services. · Service Loaner Vehicle: For warranty
any labor performed at the service facility.
Information needed for when you call
When you call, please be prepared to provide the following information:
repairs, your dealer may provide you with a Maserati Service Loaner Vehicle (if available) or provide you with Rental Car allowance: in the event your vehicle is disabled due to
· Any form of impound towing, or towing by someone other than a licensed service station or garage.
· Assistance from a private citizen.
· Your Name.
a warranty related concern, we will
· Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
· Location of your vehicle.
· Nature of your call (for example; you require a tow, vehicle will not start, out of gas, tire service, etc.).
reimburse you up to $50 per day. A five (5) day or $250 maximum applies. In order to receive reimbursement, you must supply the following information within 20
17
Introduction
NOTE:
· NEW VEHICLES: Your membership
Address Inquiries to
1
Membership is intended to cover emergencies and is not intended to be
begins on the date the Registered
General Inquiries:
Vehicle was originally sold (in service Maserati Roadside Assistance
a substitute for proper vehicle
date) and continues until the
P.O. Box 968008
maintenance or repair. Repeated calls
expiration date of the New Car
Schaumburg, IL 60173
which are considered by Maserati North America, Inc. Signature Motor Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of
Limited Warranty or unless terminated by Maserati North America, Inc. for cause.
Rental Car Reimbursements: Within 20 days of your rental car transaction, the original pre-printed
California, Inc. to be excessive may, at · PRE OWNED VEHICLES: Your
rental car receipt, which must include
our discretion, result in cancellation of membership begins on the date the your name, address, telephone
the membership.
registered vehicle was sold (in service number, VIN, rental dates and the
Emergency road service providers are independent contractors and are not
date) and continues until the expiration date of the Maserati Certified Pre-Owned Limited
corresponding warranty repair order should be submitted to:
employees, agents or representatives
Warranty or unless terminated by
Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN:
of Maserati North America, Inc.
Maserati North America, Inc for
Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept.
Signature Motor Club, Inc. or
cause.
P.O. Box 8140
Signature Motor Club of California,
Ft. Washington, PA 19034
Inc.
Under this Agreement
· You will not be required to pay any sum for services up to the mileage limit on towing.
· Your registered Maserati vehicle is the vehicle covered. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) that appears on the vehicle represents your identification number with Signature Motor Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of California, Inc.
18
Vehicle Identification Data
Vehicle Identification Number
The vehicle's identification number (VIN) is punched on the foot platform, in front of the right passenger rear seat.
The VIN Number is also visible from the outside through the windshield on the front left corner of the dashboard.
Introduction 1
To read the number, lift the mat and rotate the guard.
NOTE:
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, always quote the vehicle identification number.
Warning and Identification Labels
Overview label with cautions and warning notes
The centrally attached label placed inside the engine hood cover displays cautions, warnings, and symbols. For further information refer to "Symbols" in this section.
Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) Label
The label is applied on the lower right side of the hood.
19
Introduction
California Preposition 65 Warning
1
Label
The label is applied on the upper left
corner of the windshield.
Danger Restart Engine with Hood Open Label
The label is applied on the upper right side of the hood.
Another label is applied on the dashboard indicate that air bag system is installed to.
Passenger Air bag Labels
The labels are applied on the external side of sun visors and behind it, on the dome.
Loading Information Label
This label is applied on the driver's side rear door pillar.
20
Tire Information Label
This paper label is applied on the driver's side rear door pillar.
Fuel Warning Label
The label is applied inside the fuel filler door.
Introduction 1
NOTE: For further informations see "Tire Safety Information" in section "Driving".
Paint Identification Label The label is applied on the lower left side of the hood.
NOTE:
To ensure optimum performance and fuel economy, please ensure to refill your vehicle using Premium Unleaded Fuel ONLY, with a minimum of 91 AKI.
21
Introduction
22
2 Before Starting
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows
(for versions/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Power Liftgate Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hood Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Occupants Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -- Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Rear Parking Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Surround View Camera System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
23
Before Starting
Keys
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is inside the vehicle.
The vehicle is equipped with a Remote
Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless
Ignition Node, to enter, start and
2
protect the vehicle.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has three operating setups indicated on the outer ring. Pressing and releasing the middle button, you can switch from one setup to the next without starting the engine, the switched on indication will turn amber. The engine will start by pushing the center button START/STOP with the brake pedal pressed and the device set in any of the three operating setups.
In case the ignition switch does not change by pushing a button, the RKE transmitter (key fob) may have a low or discharged battery. If this occurs it is necessary to replace the battery in order to operate the ignition switch (see "Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs" in this section). It is still possible to operate the ignition device using the key fob RKE transmitter with discharged battery by pressing the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob on the START/STOP button.
Keyless Ignition Device
This device allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the
24
Before Starting
You can keep the emergency key with In addition to the acoustic signal a
you when using valet parking.
dedicated message is displayed on the
To remove the emergency key:
instrument cluster.
· hold the mechanical latch on the
If the ignition device is left in the ACC
back of the key fob sideways;
or RUN position, when vehicle is
· simultaneously remove the
locked the system will turn off the
2
instrument cluster and automatically
emergency key by sliding laterally
set ignition device to OFF.
towards the end of the key fob.
With the MTC+ System, the power
window switches, radio, power
Key fob
sunroof (optional), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
This vehicle is provided with two programmed key fobs.
after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
The key fob contains a Remote Keyless
door will cancel this feature, it is
Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
possible to set the timing of this
emergency key.
feature.
The emergency key allows you to open the vehicle by inserting into the
NOTE:
lock of the opening handle on the driver's door, in case the battery of the vehicle or the key fob go dead.
NOTE:
You can insert either side of the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
Refer to "MTC+ Settings" in Section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information.
Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert
Opening the driver's door to exit the vehicle when the ignition device is set in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a beep will remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF.
WARNING! · When leaving the vehicle, always
remove the key fob and lock your vehicle.
· Do not allow children to be in a vehicle unattended or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child or
(Continued)
25
Before Starting
(Continued) others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned
Sentry Key® Immobilizer System
If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics: this
not to touch the parking brake
trigger, brake pedal or the shift
2
lever.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on
· Do not leave the key fob in or near system does not need to be armed or during normal vehicle operation
the vehicle, and do not leave the
activated. Operation is automatic,
(engine running for longer than 10
ignition switch in the ACC or RUN
regardless of whether the vehicle is
seconds), an electronic fault is
mode. A child could operate power locked or unlocked.
detected. Should this occur, contact
windows, other controls, or move
The system uses a key fob with Remote the Authorized Maserati Dealer as
the vehicle.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an
soon as possible for assistance.
· Do not leave children or animals
ignition switch and a RF (Radio
inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
· An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition switch to OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Frequency) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs expressly programmed can be used to start and operate the vehicle. After placing the ignition in the RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light (see picture) will light up for a three seconds bulb check.
CAUTION! The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some remote starting systems that can be installed in after-market.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
All key fobs provided with the new
vehicle have been updated with the
vehicle electronics and are therefore
able to guarantee correct functioning
and protection.
26
Before Starting
Radio Frequency RKE
NOTE:
Vehicle Security Alarm
Transmitter - Regulatory
· When having the Sentry Key®
Information
Immobilizer System serviced, bring
The vehicle security alarm monitors
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the
all key fobs provided with the vehicle with you to the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
the vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the START/STOP button for unauthorized operations.
2
"Services" section on the website
· When selling the vehicle, it is
The system includes a dual function
www.maserati.com.
necessary to provide the new owner anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle
Replacement Key fobs
with all key fobs.
anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion
sensor monitors the vehicle interior
NOTE:
for motion.
Only key fobs that are updated with the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors the vehicle for any lifting or tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry transport, etc). A siren with battery
backup which senses interruptions of
power and communications is also
WARNING!
included.
· Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
· Always remember to cycle the ignition switch to OFF.
While the vehicle security alarm is enabled, interior door locks switches, power liftgate and fuel filler door release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following
Duplication of key fobs may be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer only. This procedure consists of programming a key fob that has never been programmed to the vehicle's electronics.
audible and visible signals: intermittent buzzer, position lights and/or turn signals and the vehicle security light on the dashboard will flash. This light will fast flash for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is being armed,
27
Before Starting
and will then flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
2
located on the driver door trim panel with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Rearming the System
If something triggers the security alarm, and no quick action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the beeper after 29 seconds, and turn off all of the visual signals after 31 more seconds; the vehicle security alarm will then rearm itself.
Arming the System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm.
· Make sure the vehicle ignition switch is OFF.
· Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
· Press the lock button on the interior power door lock switch
28
· Press the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter.
· Press the button on the exterior "Passive Entry" door handle having a valid key fob RKE transmitter in the same exterior zone (see "Passive Entry System" in this section for further information).
· If any door is open, close it. In any of these situations, if one or more windows are open, they will remain open. When arming the alarm system in any of the described ways, the power liftgate will remain open if it was left open. In this condition, it will be necessary to first close the power liftgate as described under "Power
Before Starting
Liftgate Operation" in this section,
To disarm the System
The vehicle security alarm is designed
and repeat the arming operation, to be able to arm the alarm system. The buttons - located on the outer
Use any of the following steps to disarm the vehicle security alarm.
to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If
edge of the left trunk compartment
· Press the button on key fob RKE
one of the previously described
lining and indicated in the figure - can transmitter.
arming sequences has occurred, the
2
be used to completely close and lock · Grasp the "Passive Entry" unlock
vehicle security alarm will arm
the power liftgate and arm the alarm
door handle (see "Passive Entry
regardless of whether you are in the
system if all the doors are closed.
System" in this section for further
vehicle or not. If you remain in the
See chapter " Power Liftgate
information).
vehicle and open a door, the alarm
Operation" in this section for further · Press the START/STOP button so as
will activate. If this occurs, disarm the
information.
to release the OFF position.
NOTE: · When the vehicle security alarm is
armed, the interior power door lock switch will not allow unlocking of the doors.
vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the buzzer will
· The use of the emergency key into
activate. If this occurs, disarm the
the driver door lock and the use of vehicle security alarm.
the button on the key fob
cannot arm or disarm the security
Each time the vehicle security alarm is armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift sensors actively monitor the vehicle. When arming the security alarm, it is possible to disable these sensors by pressing the button on the key fob three times within 5 seconds from the moment the system has been armed (meanwhile the security alarm light
alarm of the vehicle.
· The vehicle security alarm remains engaged while accessing the power liftgate. Pressing the button between the license plate lights will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If anyone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens a door, the alarm will trigger.
flashes rapidly).
29
Before Starting
Using the Panic Alarm (if
Illuminated Entry/Exit
equipped)
NOTE:
Lights will turn on and off when you enter/exit the vehicle and operate the
On the key fob RKE transmitter of
buttons on the key fob RKE
2
vehicles with this feature, the remote
start button is replaced by the
transmitter and/or on the "Passive Entry" system as follows:
button.
· If the unlock command is enabled by
To turn the panic alarm feature on or
off, press and hold the
button on
the key fob RKE transmitter for at least
one second and release. When the
panic alarm is on, the headlights will
turn on, the position lights will flash,
the horn will pulse on and off, and the
courtesy & dimmable lights will turn
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you disarm the vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the "Passive Entry" system, the "illuminated entry" mode will activate. Courtesy & dimmable internal lighting, night front seats lighting, and approach lighting will stay on for 27 seconds.
on.
The panic alarm will remain activated
for three minutes unless you turn it off
by either:
· pressing the time;
button a second
· or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster.
In both situations the panic alarm will immediately turn off.
30
· If the lock command of the car is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the "Passive Entry" system, when the key fob RKE transmitter is out of range, all the lights will turn off within 3 seconds, if they were previously on.
Before Starting 2
· After activating the power liftgate opening command in the possible modes (see "Power Liftgate Operation" in this section), the inner trunk and liftgate lights will turn on and will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off. The lights will immediately turn off if you lock the power liftgate before 10 minutes.
31
Before Starting
exception of the console display and the ignition switch backlight, which will turn off after 27 seconds.
Use of Light Switch for Vehicle
2
Lighting
Vehicle lighting can be operated from
the key fob RKE transmitter, the
"Passive Entry" system and from the
light switch on the left side of the
Vehicle Lighting with Open/Closed Doors
dashboard (refer to "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further information).
· On the vehicles equipped with this
feature, if the
button is pressed
on the key fob RKE transmitter, the
headlights, position lights and the
courtesy & dimmable lights will turn
on. Refer to "Using the Panic Alarm"
in this section for further
information.
· If one or more doors are open, the central light, front/rear domelights (main and spot light), the instrument cluster, the MTC+ display, the night front seats lighting and the ignition switch backlight will turn on and will light up for 27 seconds.
· If the doors are closed, all lights will turn off (within 3 seconds) with the
32
Before Starting
buttons on the right side of the steering wheel, entering the menu "Vehicle Settings" and skip to
Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob
"Interior Lighting". If the interior
The RKE system allows you to unlock
lighting is in "0" (OFF) position, the the doors and the fuel filler door,
night lighting will turn off.
open the power liftgate and turn the
2
· If the light switch is turned to
approach and courtesy lights on from
"AUTO" position (on/off AUTO
a distance up to approximately 33 ft
mode) and the ignition is switched
(10 m). The key fob RKE transmitter
to RUN position, as in "low beam
does not need to be pointed at the
· If the light switch is in the "0" (OFF)
mode" all lights turn on either in
vehicle to activate the system. See
mode all switch backlights and the
"DAY" or "NIGHT" mode according "Illuminated Entry/Exit" in this section
front seats lighting will turn off.
to the twilight sensor. In "DAY"
for further information.
· If the light switch is in the position and the ignition switch
is in OFF or ACC position, the front low intensity LEDs of the external headlight and rear position light
mode the switches backlighting will be at 100% intensity, in "NIGHT" mode they will be as set by the buttons on the right side of the steering wheel.
guide LED will turn on.
· If the light switch is in position and the ignition switch is in RUN position, no lighting feature will be available.
NOTE:
In "DAY" mode, the switches are not backlit, except the windows and steering switches.
· If the light switch is in position (Low beam mode) the front domelight LED (if enabled), the switches backlighting, the instrument cluster's display, the night front seats lighting will turn on. The
NOTE:
Driving at speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all key fobs RKE transmitter buttons.
front domelight LED and the night
lighting of the front seats will light
up with the intensity set by the
33
Before Starting
Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler
section "Dashboard Instruments and Requiring and Setting
Door and Liftgate
Controls".
Additional Key fobs
Press and release the unlock button
Turn Headlights On with Key fob
on the key fob RKE transmitter once This feature activates the headlights
Provide your Authorized Maserati
2
to unlock the driver's door or twice
for up to 90 seconds when the doors
within five seconds to unlock all doors, are unlocked with the key fob RKE
Dealer the following when ordering additional key fob RKE transmitters:
the fuel filler door and the power
transmitter. The duration can be set as · all key fobs RKE transmitters in your
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash desired. To change the current setting, possession;
for the unlock signal recognition. The illuminated entry/exit system will also turn on. See "Passive Entry System" in this section for further information.
Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Key fob 1st Press
This feature allows you to program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors, the fuel filler door and the power liftgate, by the first press of the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights
see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
Locking Doors Sound Alarm
This feature will cause the alarm to activate when the doors are locked with the key fob RKE transmitter. This feature can be enabled or disabled. To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
Unlatch the Liftgate
Press the button on the key fob RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch and fully open the
· a personal ID;
· the identification and registration documents proving ownership of the vehicle.
Setting new key fobs or re-setting the original ones can only be performed at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
NOTE:
Codes of any key fob RKE transmitters that are not present when the new setting procedure is done will be deleted from the memory to prevent lost or stolen key fobs transmitters being used to disarm the electronic alarm system.
This feature will cause the flash of the turn signal lights when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. This feature can be
power liftgate. See chapters "Passive Entry System" and "Power Liftgate Operation" in this section for further information.
turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in
34
Key fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: A low charge level of the key fob battery will be indicated on the instrument cluster display.
The recommended replacement battery type is: CR2032. To replace the battery proceed as follows:
· Remove the emergency key as indicated in "Keys" chapter of the current section.
· Loosen the lateral screw that connects the two side covers with a torx T6 screwdriver.
Before Starting
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more
2
information go to:
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle
· Separate both parts of the key fob case.
· Separate the two lateral covers from the key fob case.
WARNING!
California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
· Remove the card with PCB (Printed Circuit Board).
35
Before Starting
· Replace the printed circuit board by
WARNING!
using the indicated pin for the sealing of the two covers.
California Proposition 65
· Assemble the key fob case and
Operating, servicing and maintaining
reassemble the two lateral covers: a
2
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle click will indicate successful sealing.
can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
· Combine the disassembled parts with
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
clamping screw and reassemble the
which are known to the State of
emergency key.
· Remove the battery from its seat and replace with a new recommended type of battery.
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to:
Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the "Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle
ENVIRONMENTAL!
Batteries contain dangerous materials that could harm the environment. Please dispose of them according to local regulations or at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
NOTE:
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean with alcohol.
· Match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
36
Before Starting
Remote Start System
How to use Remote Start
On the vehicles that are equipped with this system, the key fob RKE transmitter enables to start the engine
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
WARNING! · Do not start or run an engine in a
closed garage or confined area.
conveniently from outside the vehicle · System not disabled from previous
Exhaust gas contains Carbon
2
while still maintaining security. The
remote start event.
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless
system has a range of approximately · Vehicle theft alarm not active.
and colorless
300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these conditions:
· A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
· Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport
· Vehicle Panic mode not active. · Doors closed. · Hood closed. · Power liftgate closed. · Hazard lights switched off. · Brake pedal not pressed. · Battery at an acceptable charge
level. · The shift lever is in P (Park) position. · The vehicle transmission is in
automatic mode. · The remote start has not been
activated yet two consecutive times. If EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is not selected, at key-off in some conditions the remote start system may not allow engine to start. We suggest to set
· Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
Engine Remote Start Abort Message on Instrument Cluster
The following messages will display on the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
· "Remote Start Canceled Door Open".
· "Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open".
· "Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low".
transmitter, and some mobile or CB radio.
"Auto Apply On" function through the switch on the right-side of the
· "Remote Start Canceled Time Expired".
· Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob.
steering wheel (refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instrument and Controls").
· "Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset".
37
Before Starting
The message on the instrument cluster which are known to the State of
equipped) are disabled when the
stays active as long as the ignition
California to cause cancer and birth
vehicle is in the "Remote Start"
switch is in RUN position.
defects or other reproductive harm. To mode.
To enter Remote Start Mode
2 NOTE:
On some versions, the remote start button on the key fob RKE transmitter is replaced by the
button.
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
· The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
Press and release the button on the vehicle
To exit Remote Start Mode
key fob RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, position lights will flash and the horn will ring twice (if this function is set using the MTC+ System, refer to
without Driving the Vehicle
Press and release the button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
"MTC+ Settings" in section
NOTE:
"Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the "Remote Start" mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time press of the button for two seconds after receiving a valid "Remote Start" request.
WARNING!
California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
· In case of an engine fault or low fuel level, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
· The position lights will turn on and remain lighted up during "Remote Start" mode.
· For security reasons, power window and power sunroof operation (if
To exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm. Then, prior to the end of the
38
Before Starting
15-minute cycle, press and release the Doors Locking
START/STOP button.
NOTE:
The message "Remote Start Active
WARNING!
Push Start Button" will display in the · For personal security and safety lock
2
instrument cluster until you push the
the vehicle doors before you drive
START/STOP button.
as well as when parking and leaving
the vehicle unattended.
Auto-On Comfort with Remote · When leaving the vehicle, always
Start
remove the key fob RKE transmitter To unlock the front doors, pull the
The driver's heated and ventilated
and lock your vehicle.
inside door handle to the first detent.
seat and the heated steering wheel (if · Never leave children alone in a
equipped) can be programmed to
vehicle, or with access to an
come on during a remote start. Refer
unlocked vehicle.
to "Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start" function in chapter "MTC+ Settings", section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls", for further information.
· Do not allow children to be in a vehicle unattended. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children must not touch the
Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the "Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
parking brake trigger, brake pedal or the shift lever. · Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode.
Doors Manual Lock
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward.
To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE transmitter is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
39
Before Starting
Power Doors Locking/ Unlocking
A power door lock switch and a
power door unlock switch are
2
positioned on the front door trim panel. Use this switches to lock or
unlock the doors.
If power liftgate has been left open, it will stay open when you press lock button , and the locking feature will only occur after the closing of the power liftgate. The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the "Passive Entry" system. For further information, see
features (see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
Automatic Door Unlock on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
· The automatic unlock doors on exit
"Passive Entry System" in this section.
feature is enabled.
If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob RKE transmitter in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF
· The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h).
· The transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).
· The driver door is open.
· The doors were not previously unlocked.
position or closing the door will allow · The vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h).
the locks of the doors and fuel filler door to operate. If a door is open with the key fob RKE transmitter inside the cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or RUN position, a beep will draw the driver's attention.
Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit
To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
Automatic Locking Doors
NOTE:
The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
Use the automatic door unlock on exit feature in accordance with local regulations.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside with the above-figured switches, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by the user through MTC+ setting
40
Before Starting
Child-Protection Door Lock
outside when the child-protection
to intervene manually by opening or
System -- Rear Doors
locks are engaged (locked).
closing the door.
If you are pushing the door hard
To provide a safer environment for
NOTE:
enough to close just like a regular
small children sitting in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child-protection door lock system.
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the child-protection door lock system is engaged, manually raise the
one, the system still works, but only to check whether the door is properly closed.
2
Engage or Disengage the Child-Protection Door Lock
door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and
· Open the rear door.
open the door using the outside door
WARNING!
· Insert the tip of the emergency key handle.
The system works properly if the ajar
into the lock and rotate to the lock
door has a gap , between exterior
or unlock position.
· Repeat the first two steps on the opposite rear door.
Soft Door Close System (if equipped)
This system makes doors easier to shut without having to slam if you do not get it closed the first time. It increases the vehicle's safety and comfort, in particular for children in the back seat,
door panel surface and exterior bodyshell surface in the latch area , of max 0.23 in (6 mm). In the presence of higher gap, the system is not able to close the door with the risk of travelling with the door not completely closed.
it is not necessary to slam the door
and it also prevents the risk of
traveling with the door ajar.
The system uses a sensor to detect the
door ajar and an electric actuator to
close it. The sensor detects your
attempt to close the door and once
the latch catches the handle the
WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the
electric actuator pulls the door firmly bringing the door to the fully closed position. During the soft closing phase operated by the system, it is possible
41
Before Starting
Passive Entry System
The "Passive Entry" system is an
and immediately but with a slight delay (about 2 seconds).
enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Unlock Door from the Driver
Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This
Side
2
feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to With a valid key fob RKE transmitter
press the key fob RKE transmitter lock within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the driver's door
or unlock buttons.
handle, grip the driver's door outside
handle to unlock the door
NOTE: · "Passive Entry" may be programmed
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rise when the door is
NOTE:
to on/off; see "MTC+ Settings" in
unlocked.
If "1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks" is
section "Dashboard Instruments and
programmed on all doors will unlock
Controls" for further information.
when you grip the front driver's door
· If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining on the "Passive Entry" door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
handle. To select between "Driver Door" and "All Doors", see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
response time.
· Access to the vehicle using "Passive Entry" system may not work properly
Unlock Door from the Passenger Side
in case of interference caused by external sources such as metal objects, mobile phones, overhead power lines, antennas, etc. In these cases, use the buttons of the key fob RKE transmitter to open and close the vehicle or the emergency key, inserting it into the driver side door
With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the passenger door handle, grip the front passenger outside door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rise when the door is unlocked.
lock.
· The "Passive Entry" system does not lock and unlock the doors directly
42
Before Starting
Preventing Inadvertent Locking NOTE:
of the Key fob RKE Transmitter The vehicle unlocks the doors under
inside the Vehicle
any of the following conditions:
To minimize the possibility of
· the doors are manually locked using
unintentionally locking a key fob RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
the door lock knob positioned on the door panel;
2
"Passive Entry" system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock
feature which will function if the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and
the door panel switch is used to
lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed, the system checks
the inside and outside of the vehicle
for any valid key fobs RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when you grip the front passenger door handle regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Driver Door" or "All Doors").
If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid key fobs RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the "Passive Entry" system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn fourteen times (on the fifteenth attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob RKE transmitter will be locked in the vehicle). This will happen even when pressing the lower
button on the outer edge of the left trunk compartment lining to close and lock the power liftgate.
· there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter inside the vehicle;
· there is not a valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle.
NOTE: The vehicle will not unlock the doors under any of the following conditions: · the doors are locked using the key
fob RKE transmitter; · the doors are locked using the
button on the "Passive Entry" door handles;
(Continued)
43
Before Starting
If the key fob RKE transmitter is inside lights to open the power liftgate
the passenger compartment and one automatically.
of the doors locked only to the first detent of lock pawl (hence it is not fully closed), when the vehicle lock
Manual Door Lock from Outside
2
function with alarm system for trunk With one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE
lid and doors is being activated by
transmitters within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the
means of RH button at the bottom driver or passenger front door handles,
of the trunk lid, said function will be press the external door handle button
activated all the same.
to lock all four doors.
In this condition, any attempt to duly close the door that is partially open
NOTE:
will cancel vehicle lock and alarm
· After pressing the outside door
system arming thus leaving vehicle
handle button, you must wait two
unlocked.
seconds before you can lock or
Release the Liftgate and Enter the Trunk
unlock the doors using this door handle. By pulling the external door handle, you can check if the car
With the key fob within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the power liftgate, press the button located between the license plate
remains locked, without "Passive Entry" system reacting and unlocking the doors.
(Continued) · there is a valid key fob RKE
lights, the power liftgate will
· The "Passive Entry" system will not
automatically open until it has reached operate if the key fob RKE
transmitter outside the vehicle and its maximum height; if the same
transmitter battery is dead.
within 3.3 ft (1 m) of either "Passive Entry" door handle;
· fifteen attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and/or the lower button (on the outer edge of the left trunk compartment) and then close the doors.
button is not pressed again to stop it (for more information, see chapter "Power Liftgate Operation" in this section). If the vehicle had already been unlocked through key fob or "Passive Entry", the presence of the key fob is not required; simply use the button located between the license plate
· If power liftgate has been left open, it will stay open when you press the button on door external handle, and the locking feature will only occur after the closing of the power liftgate.
44
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle's inner door panel.
Before Starting
Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all
the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the
2
"Services" section on the website
www.maserati.com.
45
Before Starting
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver's door panel govern all the door windows.
2
NOTE:
· The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time lapse can be set. See "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information.
· Frequent activations of the power
prevent the windows being accidentally activated, posing a risk to passengers remaining onboard.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will
windows could result in a temporary go completely down automatically. lock out of the motors. In this case, To open the window part way, press
wait a moment before a new activation.
the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the
WARNING! Improper use of the power windows and the sunroof (if equipped) can however be dangerous, even with the
way down during the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature with
anti-pinch prevention system. Before Anti-Pinch Protection
There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the corresponding window. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position.
and during activation of the power window, always check that the passengers are not exposed to the risk of injury both by the moving window and by personal objects that could be dragged or hit by it. Do not leave unattended children in a vehicle with a key fob RKE transmitter inside. When getting out the vehicle, always
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go all the way up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and
remove the key fob RKE transmitter to
46
Before Starting
release it when you want the window to stop.
Reset Auto-Up/Down
Should the auto-up/down feature stop
NOTE:
working, the window probably needs
· If the window runs into any obstacle to be reset.
during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
To reset auto-up/down, pull the window switch up to close the
2
Remove the obstacle and use the
window completely and push the
window switch again to close the
window switch down to open the
window.
window completely.
· Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.
· Frequent activations of the anti-pinch function could disable the auto-down and auto-up function of the windows. In order to re-activate this function proceed with a reset cycle as described in the next paragraph.
Open the Windows with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off
When the ignition switch is in OFF position, windows can be opened by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter.
· Press the button and release it; · Press a second time the button
and keep it pressed until complete opening of the windows, if they were closed.
Rear Window and Sunshade Lockout Button
To enable the controls previously described, press the window lockout button again (setting it in the up position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the area before closing the window.
The window lockout button on the driver's door trim panel allows to disable the window and sunshade control on the rear doors by pressing the window lockout button (setting it in the down position).
open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
47
Before Starting
Power Sunshades on Rear to the second detent to move the
Door Windows (for
window all the way up or down.
versions/markets, where
provided) 2
NOTE:
· On vehicles provided with power sunshades on the rear windows, the window switches also operate the sunshades.
· The rear windows lock button operates the rear power sunshades as well.
· The window and sunshades controls will operate only if the ignition switch is in ACC or RUN position.
Operation of the rear windows and related sunshades is done by pressing or pulling the window switch and depends on the position of the windows prior to the command operation. As described for the opening and closing functions of the power windows (see chapter "Power Windows" in this section), the windows switch has two functioning modes: press and release the switch to the first detent to partially move the window; press and release the switch
48
Operations
WARNING! Rear seat passengers must be careful when operating the sunshades, since there is the risk of being pinched between the top of the sunshade and the head lining, during raising, and between the top edge of the sunshade and the door panel, during lowering.
CAUTION! Before activating the sunshade, make sure that no objects can interfere with its travel.
The following images and the subsequent text show the possible starting positions ("A", "B", "C" and "UP", "DOWN") and function of the window and the sunshade, to be independently activated by pressing or lifting the control switch to the first (1) or second (2) detent.
A. Sunshade fully unrolled ("UP" position) and Window closed ("UP" position)
· Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: no action ("NOP").
Before Starting
1.1 Pressing the control to 1 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely and the window stays closed.
1.2 Pressing the control again to 1
2
detent: the window opens
partially until the control is
released and the sunshade stays
down (pressing the control to 2
detent: the window opens
completely).
2.1 Pressing the control to 2 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely while the window stays closed.
2.2 Pressing the control again to 2 detent: the window opens completely.
B. Sunshade fully rolled down ("DOWN" position) and Window closed ("UP" position)
· Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: the sunshade unrolls completely and the window stays closed.
· Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window opens partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled.
49
Before Starting
C. Sunshade fully rolled down ("DOWN" position) and Window
limit position. During this operation a slight click of the
Power Liftgate Operation
completely open ("DOWN" position)
sunshade motor that switches to
The power liftgate can be operated
· Pulling the control to 1 or 2 detent:
mechanical lock condition can be from inside the vehicle by pressing the
the window closes partially or
heard.
button on the front dome console.
2
completely and the sunshade
remains rolled.
· Lift the control and hold it up until This command will fully open or fully
the sunshade completes its
close the power liftgate. Pressing this
· Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: no action ("NOP").
Teaching Cycle
upstroke and reaches the car body pillar, fully home. Once the upper limit stop is reached, the sunshade will move downwards for approx.
button in sequence, if the power liftgate stops in intermediate position, it resumes and reverses the stroke direction.
After battery disconnection, the following teaching cycle is required to
2-3 millimetres and the control unit NOTE: will store this height as the upper
store the limit positions the sunshades. Use the controls on the rear doors to
limit. Now the teaching of the driver side rear sunshade is
The shift lever must be in P (Park) before the button can operate.
move the sunshades.
complete.
· With glass closed, lift rear sunshade control on driver side for a few seconds. It is not necessary that the sunshade reaches its upper limit.
· Repeat the same operations for the passenger side rear sunshade to complete the teaching procedure.
· Reverse the sunshade movement by pressing the control downwards. Once the lower limit is reached, press and hold the control for at least 10 seconds. This action allows setting the control unit in initialisation status.
· Release the movement command.
· Within maximum 15 seconds:
· Press once the control downwards (first or second detent). In this way the control unit stores the lower
The power liftgate can be fully opened from outside the vehicle by pressing the button on the key fob with RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external button located on the lower side of the liftgate ledge, between the license
50
Before Starting
plate lights, when the vehicle has
"Dashboard Instruments and
Automatic Opening and
been unlocked using the key fob or
Controls").
Closing Movement of the
the "Passive Entry" system.
With the ignition switch in RUN
Power Liftgate
position, the red symbol will be
displayed on the instrument cluster. If Automatic opening and closing
the vehicle is in motion, in addition to movement of the liftgate is driven by
2
the symbol will also appear a
electric actuators and a motorized
message indicating that the power
latch ensuring lid locking upon
liftgate is open. Once the power
closing.
liftgate is closed the symbol or the
The button on key fob and button
symbol and message will disappear
on front dome console not only allow
from the display.
user to completely open the power
liftgate, but also to stop it at any
intermediate position by pressing the
button again whenever you wish to
stop and resume the opening process.
In addition to these commands, it is
possible to open and close the power
liftgate, or stop its movement, by
simply moving your foot under the
rear bumper, if the vehicle is so
equipped with the kick sensor option.
In this latter case, the power liftgate
With the ignition device in the OFF
will be opened and closed only if the
When the button on the key fob is pressed twice within five seconds, the direction indicators flash twice to indicate the opening or closing of the power liftgate, if the light flashing function at closing is activated on MTC+ (for more information, see the chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section
position, only the power liftgate open symbol will display until closure. See "Passive Entry System" in this section for more information on power liftgate operation with the "Passive Entry" feature.
"Passive Entry" system acknowledges the presence of the key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the power liftgate. Power liftgate uses the button in-between the license plate lights, indicated in figure, to activate the opening once the car has been
51
Before Starting
unlocked by the key fob or by the
, the power liftgate will be
"Passive Entry" function.
completely closed unless it is stopped;
By pressing this button when the
power liftgate is closed, you can open
it completely, or by pressing the
2
button again stop the opening
process, or by pressing the button
again invert the movement and close it
completely.
· if instead the power liftgate is in an intermediate position and you press and release the lower button during the closing or opening stroke, it will be stopped;
· if instead the power liftgate is stopped in an intermediate position
When the liftgate is completely open if you press and release the upper button , the power liftgate will be completely closed unless it is stopped;
and you press and release the lower button , it will reverse its previous movement and it will be completely opened or closed unless it is stopped again.
· if instead the power liftgate is in an In any case, when you press the lower
intermediate position and you press and release the upper button
button , the doors will not be locked and the alarm system will not
When the power liftgate is open, to move it there are two buttons positioned on the outer edge of the left trunk compartment lining as indicated in figure.
during the closing or opening stroke, it will be stopped;
· if instead the power liftgate is stopped in an intermediate position and you press and release the upper button , it will reverse its previous movement and it will be completely opened or closed unless it is stopped again.
In any case, when you press the upper button , the doors will not be locked and the alarm system will not be armed. When the liftgate is completely open if
be armed immediately, but only when the liftgate will have reached the totally closed position as effect of every movement commands received from every other available inputs.
NOTE:
· The order of the functions shown does not represent the sequence in which they can be performed.
· The buttons of the power liftgate do not work if a gear is engaged or if the vehicle speed is higher than 0 mph (0 km/h).
you press and release the lower button
52
Before Starting
· The power liftgate does not work
at the maximum speed. Do not
Power Liftgate Automatic Safe
with temperatures lower than -22°F activate recirculation.
Movement
(-30°C) or higher than 150°F (65°C).
· If the opening buttons or the handles are operated while the
Set the Position of Maximum Power Liftgate Opening
Power liftgate safe opening and closing is ensured by a protection system able to stop its movement
power liftgate is closing, the stroke The maximum opening position of the when an obstacle is detected along
2
of liftgate stops. Pressing another
liftgate can be modified using the
the path: when opening or closing, it
time the same command it reverses previously described buttons on the
stops automatically and then slightly
movement and fully open.
outer left edge of the trunk
moves back.
· If the opening buttons or the
compartment.
Along the upper outer edges, the
handles are operated while the power liftgate is opening, the motor of the liftgate is disabled to allow manual operation.
· If the power liftgate finds several obstacles during the same operating cycle, it will stop automatically and
1. Activate the liftgate and stop it in the new maximum opening position to be set, by pressing the upper button.
2. Press the upper or lower buttons and keep it pressed for 3
seconds.
vehicle is equipped with anti-pinch protection sensors. These sensors stop the automatic closing stroke and partly open the power liftgate when a pressure is carried out, also slight, within their range shown in the figure.
must be opened or closed manually. 3. Release the button (pressed in the
· If the power liftgate is closing and a
previous point). Upon the following
gear is engaged, the liftgate will
opening controls, the liftgate will
continue closing. In this condition, it
stop in the stored position.
is possible that, during the closing
If you want to reset the maximum
stroke, it may find an obstacle and
possible opening position of the
stop.
liftgate, proceed as described below
starting from the previously set
opening position.
WARNING! If, for any reason, the power liftgate must remain open while driving, close all the windows and activate the blower of the air conditioning control
1. Manually push the liftgate to the maximum possible opening position.
2. Repeat the previously performed steps 2 and 3.
After the closing command, when power liftgate starts closing, all the indicators will blink to warn anyone within range.
53
Before Starting
Apart from activating indicators
NOTE:
· Before opening power liftgate, make
blinking when power liftgate is
Frequent activations of the anti-pinch
sure that no objects or snow are set
operated, it is also possible to activate protection function may disable the
on liftgate or might jam or prevent
a sound warning by selecting the
automatic movement of the power
its opening.
relevant function within MTC+ user
liftgate. To reactivate this function,
2
settings (see "MTC+ Settings" in
perform a reset cycle by carrying out a Hands Free Power Liftgate Release
section "Dashboard Instruments and
complete opening/closing sequence,
and Closing
Controls").
after manually closing the power
This mode is controlled by the "Passive
When power liftgate edge reaches the liftgate.
Entry" system (see paragraph "Passive
car body, the motor locking the latch is
Entry System" in this section), which
activated automatically.
automatically releases and closes the
If necessary, the power liftgate can
power liftgate when you place your
also be opened or closed manually
WARNING!
foot in the area under the rear
using the handles indicated in the picture. This operation could be required when the liftgate remains open for a long period of time.
· Activate power liftgate only when vehicle is at a standstill.
· Always pay utmost attention when opening and closing the tailgate. If for any reason the protection system might fail to respond, it could cause injury to anyone within the operating area.
· After the closing command, always make sure that power liftgate is completely closed.
bumper. The system will only operate if the system acknowledges the presence of the key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the power liftgate. The range of the sensors that detect your foot movement extends along and underneath the central portion of the rear bumper. To activate the power liftgate, stand behind the vehicle, near the liftgate, and move your foot under the bumper
as if to kick something. Do not place
your foot too close to the bumper or
CAUTION!
touch the underbody.
· Under extreme weather conditions, liftgate seal could freeze and compromise power liftgate automatic opening and closing.
WARNING! · Pay careful attention to the exhaust
54
Before Starting
tailpipes as they can reach high
· after another kick, will reverse its
Controls"). A key fob RKE
temperatures and, in case of contact, movement and completely close
transmitter located in the front seat
they can cause severe burns.
unless stopped again.
passenger area is considered out of
· When it is not necessary to open the If open, with the foot movement the
range of the Hands free liftgate
power liftgate with the Hands free power liftgate will:
release sensor.
mode, make sure the key fob is
· completely close but not lock;
· If somebody or something knocks
2
outside the range of use (3.3 ft/1 m). Otherwise, the power liftgate can be opened accidentally by an unintentional movement of the foot.
· another kick before the completed closing can stop the movement;
· if the movement was stopped another kick operation will invert a complete opening.
against the power liftgate while it is moving, the safety system might stop lid opening or closing movement.
Power Liftgate Emergency
NOTE:
Release
In order for the sensors to detect your foot movement, move your foot towards the vehicle rather than sideways and immediately pull it back: from this moment, the power liftgate will activate within two seconds.
· If your foot movement fails to activate the power liftgate movement, wiggling your foot under the bumper will not help. Repeat the whole kick movement.
· In particular situations, external factors affecting the sensor area may trigger the Hands free power liftgate release feature. For example, when washing the vehicle, a water jet aimed at the sensor area may trigger the Hands free power liftgate release feature. Keep the key fob RKE transmitter away from the sensing range of the sensors (10
If the power release control operated by pressing the button on the dome console fails, the battery could be in a low condition. In this case, it is possible to temporarily power the system by using the battery remote poles located inside the engine compartment (see "Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure" in section "In an Emergency"). Then it is possible to normally open the power liftgate by using the key fob RKE transmitter. Have the vehicle serviced by an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
If closed, with the foot movement the
ft/3 m) or disable the Hands free
power liftgate will:
feature from the MTC+ menu (see
· unlock and completely open; · after another kick, will stop;
"MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and
55
Before Starting
Hood Operation
· Slightly lift the hood and push the safety catch as indicated by the
slam the hood to close it.
Opening
Two latches must be released to open
2
the hood.
· From inside the vehicle, pull the
arrow. The safety catch is located in the center of the hood.
WARNING! · Be sure the hood is fully latched
before driving your vehicle. If the lid
hood release lever located under the
is not fully latched, it could open
left lower side of the dashboard.
when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
· Move to the outside and stand in front of the vehicle front grille.
· Lift the hood completely: this operation is facilitated by two gas struts keeping the hood in the fully open position.
With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will display on the instrument cluster with the message indicating that the hood is open.
· Gear shifting is always active and may be performed even when one or more doors, the hood or the liftgate are open. Therefore, in these conditions, take great care to avoid moving the transmission shift lever and so accidentally engage gears.
Closing
Lower the hood, and then gently drop it. This should secure the inclusion of both latches.
CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not
56
Before Starting
Occupants Restraint Systems
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
accident, the lower section of the belt could press against the upper part of your stomach rather than the pelvic
The listed occupants restraint systems properly, to keep you and your
area, causing serious internal injuries.
are some of the most important safety passengers as safe as possible.
features in your vehicle:
If you are carrying children too small NOTE:
2
· Three-point seat belts (also called lap and shoulder belts) for the driver and all passengers.
· Advanced front air bags for driver and passenger.
for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to
The advanced air bags have a multi stage inflator. This allows the air bag to have different stages of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
· Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable "Lower Anchors and Tether for
Here are some simple steps you can
Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and
CHildren (LATCH)" in this section.
take to minimize the risk of harm
passengers seated next to a window.
from a deploying air bag:
· Supplemental seat-mounted side air bags.
· An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel.
· Front seat belts incorporate dual pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing the energy created during an impact.
· All seat belt systems (except the driver's) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat.
WARNING!
To help provide maximum protection, you are advised to keep the seatback in the most upright position possible and the seat belt close to your chest and pelvis. If the seat belt is loose, in the event of an accident you could move too far forward and could be injured. Travelling with the seatback too far reclined could also be dangerous: even if the seat belts are fastened, they may not work correctly. In fact, the belt itself may not be close enough to your body and, if it is in front of you, it could cause neck wounds or other injuries in an accident. Additionally, in an
· Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING! Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe or fatal injury to infants in that position. Do not use child seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger seat. Occupants in the front passenger seat must never sit on the
(Continued)
57
Before Starting
(Continued)
· All occupants should always wear
· In a collision, you and your
edge of the seat, leaning toward the
their lap and shoulder belts properly. passengers can suffer much greater
dashboard or otherwise sit out of
· The driver and front passenger seats injuries if you are not properly
position. The occupants' back must be
should be moved back as far as
buckled up. You can strike the
as upright as comfort allows, and
possible to allow the Advanced
interior of your vehicle or other
2
must rest against the seatback with
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
passengers, or you can be thrown
the seat belt properly fastened. Feet must be on the floor (i.e. not on the dashboard, seat or out of the window).
· Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) and Supplemental
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
Children that are not big enough to
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB),
a seat and using a seat belt properly.
wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see and if deployment occurs, the SABIC
Occupants, including the driver,
"Child Restraints System" in this
and SAB air bags will inflate
should always wear their seat belts
section) should be secured in the rear
forcefully into the space between
whether or not an air bag is also
seat in child restraints seats or
you and the door.
provided at their seating position to
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child
· If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
restraints seats or belt-positioning
accommodate a disabled person,
· Buckle up even though you are an
booster seats should ride properly
contact an Authorized Maserati
excellent driver, even on short trips.
buckled up in the rear seat. Never
Dealer.
Someone on the road may be a poor
allow children to slide the shoulder
driver and cause an accident that
belt behind them or under their arm.
includes you. This can happen far
The safest place for a child that has outgrown the child safety seat is in the rear seat using the standard seat belt in combination with a suitable booster seat if needed so the seat belt is properly located on the child. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint system to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
away from home or on your own street.
Statistics report that seat belts save lives and help reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
58
Before Starting
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be those of adults, while their bones and
severely. Never use a lap/shoulder
belted at all times.
muscles are relatively undeveloped. To belt for more than one person.
Three-Point Seat Belts
help protect them in case of a collision, they must use special
· Remember that, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers
All seating positions in your vehicle
restraint or safety systems, even in the
not wearing the seat belts are not
are equipped with combination lap
rear seat area.
only subject to personal injuries but
2
and shoulder belts. The belt retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions, conforming to the body of the occupants. However, in an accident, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the
WARNING! · It is forbidden and dangerous to ride
in a cargo area. In an accident, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow any person to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure all passengers are in a seat
also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants.
Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions
· Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
· The seat belt latch plate is on the rear door pillar, above the seat on the external side.
· Hold the latch plate and pull the belt across you, make the belt go around your body and when the belt is long
other occupants of the car also observe the local regulations concerning the use of seat belts.
and using a seat belt properly.
· Wearing your belt improperly could make your injuries in an accident
enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
Always fasten the seat belts before
much worse. You might suffer
starting the vehicle.
internal injuries, or you could even
Seat belts are designed to be used by
slide out of part of the belt. Follow
persons whose physical characteristics
these instructions to wear your seat
(age, height, weight) are provided for
belt properly and to keep your
by established legislation in each
passengers safe, too.
country. Anyone who does comply with these provisions may not travel in the front passenger seat. This also applies to children. Their heads are proportionally heavier and larger than
· Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another
59
Before Starting
neck injury. A belt worn under the
· Never carry children on a passenger's
WARNING!
arm can also cause internal injuries.
lap.
· The seat belts height must be
· Position the lap belt so that it is snug · Position the shoulder belt on your
adjusted only with the vehicle
and lies low across your hips, below
chest so that it is comfortable and
2
stationary.
your abdomen. To fasten the lap belt not resting on your neck. The
· Do not bring sharp edges in contact
pull slightly up the diagonal portion
retractor will withdraw any slack in
with a seat belt. This could reduce
of the shoulder belt. To loosen the
the belt.
their initial strength and cause them lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch
· To release the belt, push the red
to tear in the event of a crash.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug button on the buckle. The belt will
· If a seat belt has been brought in contact with a sharp edge, or has
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, guide the seat
been used to pin something to it,
belt with your hand while it is
have it immediately replaced by our
rewinding, to prevent it from
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
WARNING!
twisting.
· A belt that is latched into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion of the belt could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always latch your belt into the corresponding buckle.
· A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
· A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, increasing head and
· A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident. The belt forces won't impact on the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it comfortable.
· A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to a Service Center immediately.
· Do not use devices (clips, fastenings etc.) that prevent the seat belts from laying close to the occupants bodies.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could break in an accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies must be replaced by an Authorized Maserati Dealer after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn belt, etc.).
60
Before Starting
Three-Point Seat Belt Height
should be close to, but not contacting, to make sure that it is locked in
Adjustment
the neck.
position.
WARNING!
Push downward the upper part of the indicated slider above the shoulder belt guide to release the anchorage,
Three-Point Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure
· Wearing your seat belt incorrectly
then move the belt slider up or down Use the following procedure to
2
could make your injuries in a
to the fixed position that fits you best. untwist a twisted three point belt.
collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
· Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
· Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
WARNING!
After the adjustment, always check that the slider to which the oscillating ring is fixed, is locked into one of the positions provided. With the handgrip released, push again downward to allow the anchoring device to click into place, in the event that it has not been released in one of the positions provided.
· Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
· At about 0.5 to 1 ft (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
· Slide the latch plate upward over the folded belt. The folded belt must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
· Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded belt.
Passengers Seat Belts
· Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front passenger seating positions. Adjust the guide so that the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt
When you release the anchorage try to move the belt slider up and down
All passengers seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) and can be used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, see "Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR" under "Child Restraint Systems" in this section.
61
Before Starting
If the passenger seat position should
the vehicle's occupants being thrown
not be used to accommodate a child
against the structures of the
restraint system, only pull the belt out passenger compartment or out of
far enough to comfortably wrap
the vehicle.
around the occupant so as to not
· The air bags are designed to work
2
activate the ALR. If the ALR is
together with the seat belts, not to
activated, you will hear a ratcheting
substitute them. The front air bags
sound as the belt retracts. In this case,
only deploy in the event of certain
allow the belt to retract completely
head-on collisions of sufficient
and then carefully pull out only the
intensity. They may not be activated
amount of belt necessary to
if the vehicle rolls over, or in the
· Allow the belt to retract completely
comfortably wrap around the seat
event of rear bumps or minor frontal into the retractor seat behind the
occupant.
collisions, or non-frontal collisions.
seatback.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle
To buckle the seat belt proceed as
until you hear a "click".
Seat Belt for Rear Central Seat
follows:
WARNING!
· Remember that, in the event of a violent impact, the passengers in the rear seats who are not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injury but also represent a danger for passengers sitting in the front seats.
Unlike all other seat belts, this one has two buckles and two metal latch plates; in this way it is possible to release it from the seat.
· Press the red button located on the front of the buckle using the free latch plate (step 1) and unlatch the plate from the left-side buckle (step 2).
· Take place in the central seat and pull out the belt (A) from the upper retractor in a normal manner, without twisting it;
· Insert the first latch plate located at the end of the shoulder portion of the belt (A) inside the left buckle (B);
· Always fasten the seat belts.
· Traveling without the seat belts fastened significantly increases the risk of serious injury in the event of a collision, even with the air bags.
· In the event of a collision, the seat belts help reduce the possibility of
62
Before Starting
part with the left and right buckle
· Pull out completely the tape part with the right buckle (C);
extracted from the seat cushion.
WARNING!
To unlatch the seat belt, release the
· The belt and retractor assembly
right plate of the lap portion by
must be checked by an Authorized
clicking on the red button.
Maserati Dealer and must be
2
Using Seat Belt in Automatic
replaced if the Automatic Locking
Locking Retractor Mode (ALR)
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other
seat belt function is not working
Use the seat belt automatic locking
properly.
mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
· Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
should be properly buckled up in a child restraint system.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Automatic Locking Mode Setting
· Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. · Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is extracted.
The car is equipped with front seat belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in the belts in the event of a severe frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts to the occupants bodies before the
· Allow the belt to retract. As the belt restraining action begins.
· Insert the latch plate located at the end of the lap portion of the belt (A) inside the right buckle (C).
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode.
This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner in the kick plate area. Its activation is signalled by the shortening of the metal cable and
Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting
curling of its protective sheath.
WARNING! The restraining action of the central belt is only possible with the tape
Unbuckle the three point seat belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking
mode and activate the vehicle
emergency locking mode.
63
Before Starting
passenger is unbelted, the seat belt
WARNING!
reminder light and the related message will turn on in the instrument
It is strictly forbidden to remove or
cluster. Message remains on for 5
tamper with the pretensioner
seconds.
2
components. Any service intervention
must be carried out only by qualified
and authorized personnel. Always
contact an Authorized Maserati
Dealer.
Pretensioners work for all size occupant restraint systems, including the child restraint systems.
NOTE:
To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis.
Pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A pretensioner may be used only once because it is a pyrotechnic device. Pretensioners do not require any maintenance or lubrication: any changes to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced.
CAUTION! Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localized heating (over 212°F/100°C for a maximum of 6 hours max.) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or deploy them erroneously. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer for any intervention that may be required.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. The feature activates with engine running. If the driver or front seat
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) for more than 19 seconds, by blinking the seat belt reminder light and message and by sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration. After the sequence completes, the seat belt reminder light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened and the message remains on for 5 seconds. If the opened front door on the driver or passenger side is closed and the occupant presence sensor detects a status change from occupant not
64
Before Starting
present to occupant present the system will repeat the warning sequence.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -- Air Bags
The driver should instruct all other
This vehicle has front air bags and
occupants to fasten their seat belts.
lap/shoulder belts for both the driver
If a front seat belt is unbuckled while
and front passenger. The front air
2
traveling at speeds greater than
bags are a supplement to the seat belt
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will
restraints systems.
provide both audio and visual
The driver's advanced front air bag is
notification on the instrument cluster.
mounted in the center of the steering
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is When a safety belt is worn properly, it is wheel in the area shown in the
not active when the front passenger
more likely that the baby will not be
picture. On this area is embossed the
seat is not occupied. BeltAlert® may
hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as word "SRS AIRBAG" for easier
be triggered when an animal or heavy for anyone, the key to making safety
recognition.
object is on the front passenger seat. belts effective is wearing them properly. The passenger's advanced front air
It is recommended to restrain pets in
bag is mounted in the dashboard,
the rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet
above the glove compartment in the
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and properly stow cargo.
WARNING! Pregnant women must carefully
area shown in the picture. On this area is embossed the word "AIRBAG"
Seat Belts and Pregnant
observe the above indications, as well for easier recognition.
Women
as local regulation concerning the use NOTE:
Seat belts should be worn by pregnant of seat belts.
These air bags are designed to the
women: the risk of injury in the event
advanced air bag regulatory
of an accident is greatly reduced for
requirements.
them and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt. The best way to
protect the fetus is to protect the
mother.
Pregnant women must position the
lower part of the belt below the belly
so that it passes over the pelvis and
under the abdomen (see figure).
65
Before Starting
side windows and their covers are also · Front and side impact sensors;
labeled "AIR bag".
· Front seat belt pretensioners;
This vehicle is also equipped with
· Seat belt buckle switch;
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger
· Seat track position sensors;
2
pelvis-chest-shoulder protection during · Pyrotechnical charge to cut power
a side impact. The Supplemental
from the battery; it is located on the
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are
positive battery terminal.
mounted on front seats and are
located in the outboard side of the
The advanced front air bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle is equipped with driver and front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation level of the advanced front air bags
front seats. NOTE: After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to the Authorized Maserati Dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
WARNING! The air bag is not a substitute for the seat belts. Correct use of the seat belts, in combination with the air bag, will offer protection for the driver and passenger in the front seat in the event of a head-on collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags
based upon seat position.
following air bag system components: Properties
This vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger seat belt buckle sensor that detects whether the front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the inflation rate of the advanced front air bag. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads of front and rear outer occupants. The SABIC air bags are located above the
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC); · Air bag warning light on the
instrument cluster; · Steering wheel and column; · Instrument cluster; · Driver advanced front air bag; · Passenger advanced front air bag; · Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SAB); · Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABIC);
The advanced front air bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides air bag inflation rates which are appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This
66
Before Starting
inflation rate is used in less severe
located on the positive battery
be injured because the air bags may
collisions. A higher energy output,
terminal
no longer be functional. The
inflation rate, is used for more severe collisions.
· The electronic control unit provides for the activation of the pretensioners, front air bags or side
protective covers for the air bag are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
CAUTION!
air bags (front and rear) based on
· Always drive with your hands on
2
different criteria, according to the
the steering wheel rim, so that the
· The airbag system must be ready to
type of impact. Failure of one or
air bag can inflate freely if required.
protect you in a collision. The
more systems to activate is not
During the drive your back must be
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
indicative of a system malfunction.
as upright as comfort allows and be
monitors the internal circuits and
· The front and/or lateral air bags may against the seat back with the seat
interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent impact involving the underbody area, for example in case of violent
belt properly fastened.
· Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
impacts against steps, sidewalks, speed bumps, or when the vehicle
the dashboard in the passenger's side air bag area, on roof side trims
Airbag Warning light on the
falls into potholes, or similar.
or on the seats.
instrument cluster Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Cluster Driver advanced front air bag Passenger advanced front air bag Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bags (SAB) Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Front and side Impact Sensors Front seat belt pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch Seat Track Position Sensors Pyrotechnical charge to cut the
WARNING! · No objects should be placed over or
near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
· Do not place anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
· Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or especially with a pipe, pencil or other objects in your mouth. In the event of a collision, the intervention of the air bag could result in serious injury.
· EXTREME HAZARD! Do not place a rearward-facing infant seat onto the front seat (see warning plate on the dashboard and above and behind the sun visors). Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause
power from the battery: it is
damage the air bags and you could
67
Before Starting
(Continued) fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision.
2
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Supplemental Air bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest and shoulder area of the occupants in the event of a side impact of medium/high severity. The SAB is marked with "AIRBAG" label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
SABIC air bags are designed to protect the head of front and rear occupants in the event of a side impact, thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABICs deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover (because equipped with rollover sensing) or side impact events.
WARNING! · Side air bags also need room to
inflate. Do not rest your head, arms
68
Before Starting
or elbows on the door, windows or required, depending on the severity
front air bags may deploy in crashes
the area in which the window bag is and type of impact.
with little vehicle front-end damage
located to avoid possible injury
On top of what previously described, but that produce a severe initial
during air bag inflation. Sit upright the characteristics of the collision
deceleration.
in the center of the seating area.
registered by the sensors and sent to The side air bags will not deploy in all
· Do not cover the front seatbacks
the control unit of the ORC can also
side collisions. Side air bag
2
with clothes or covers. Do not use
cause a sudden cut of the power from deployment will depend on the
accessory seat covers or place
the battery, "blowing" the
severity and type of collision. Because
objects between you and the side
pyrotechnical charge located on the
air bag sensors measure vehicle
air bags; the performance could be positive battery terminal.
deceleration over time, vehicle speed
adversely affected and/or objects
and damage merely are not good
could cause serious injury.
· Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
CAUTION! After a collision that has caused the ignition of the pyrotechnical charge, this must be replaced at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Advanced front air bags are designed
indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. The ORC monitors the readiness
Air Bag Deployment Sensors and Controls
to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on
of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN position. If the ignition
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
the severity and type of collision.
switch is in the OFF position, in the
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if deployment of the front air bags and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision or rollover event is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the advanced front air bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
Advanced front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The advanced front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including those that may produce substantial vehicle damage, for example, some pole collisions, truck under rides, and corner impacts. On the other hand, depending on the
ACC position, or not active, the air bag system is not activated and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery has low power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. When starting the vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag warning light on the instrument
type and location of impact, advanced
69
Before Starting
cluster for approximately 4 to 8
vehicle is in complete stop, the air
quantity of nontoxic gas is generated
seconds for a test.
bags can be deployed in case of
to inflate the advanced front air bags.
After the test, the air bag warning
collision. For this reason, children
The steering wheel hub trim cover and
light will turn off. If the ORC, during
must never occupy the front seat in the upper right side of the dashboard
the diagnosis phase detects a
a rearward facing seat even if the car separate and fold out of the way as
2
malfunction that could affect the air
bag system, it turns on the air bag
is not moving. Deployment of the air the air bags inflate to their full size. bag following an impact could cause The air bags then quickly deflate while
warning light and the "Service Airbag fatal injuries to the child. Please note helping to restrain the driver and front
System" message either momentarily
that when the ignition switch is in passenger. The advanced front air bag
or continuously. The diagnostics also
the OFF or ACC position or is turned gas is vented through the vent holes in
record the nature of the malfunction.
off, the air bag will not deploy in
the sides of the air bag. In this way,
A beep will sound if the light
case of collision. Therefore, in these the air bags do not interfere with your
illuminates again after initial startup.
cases, lack of air bag deployment is control of the vehicle.
not an indication of a system malfunction.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units
The air bag warning light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system
· Ignoring the air bag warning light and message in your instrument cluster could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in the event of a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the engine, or if it comes on as you drive, have an Authorized Maserati Dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC unit determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision. Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The side air
electrical components.
Front Air Bag Inflator Units
bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could
When the ORC detects a collision
injure you if you are not seated
WARNING! · If the ignition switch is in RUN
requiring the advanced front air bags, properly, or if items are positioned in
it signals the inflator units. A large
the area where the side air bag
position, the engine is off and the
70
Before Starting
inflates. This especially applies to
Front and Side Impact Sensors
· The nylon air bag material may
children.
In front and side impacts, impact
sometimes cause abrasions and/or
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable sensors can aid the ORC in
skin reddening to the driver and
Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units
determining appropriate response to
front passenger as the air bags
During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the
impact events. Enhanced Accident Response System
deploy and unfold. · As the air bags deflate, you may see
2
side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the accident, the ORC will determine whether the enhanced accident response system will have to perform the following functions:
some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for
pushes the head/s of the occupant/s
· cut off fuel to the engine;
cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle
seating in the outside seats from the edge of the headliner out of the way
· turn hazard lights and interior lights on as long as the battery has power
after an air bag has deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
and covers the window. The air bag inflates with enough force to possibly
or until the ignition switch is turned off;
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
injure you if you are not belted and
· unlock the doors automatically;
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The SABICs may also help reduce the
· disconnect the battery with a pyrotechnic charge.
Air Bag Deployment Result The advanced front air bags are
ENVIRONMENTAL! Air bag inflation releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful to the environment.
risk of partial or complete ejection of designed to deflate immediately after
vehicle occupants through side
deployment.
windows in certain rollover events (because equipped with rollover sensing).
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining
(Continued)
71
Before Starting
(Continued)
Maserati Dealer.
approved seat accessories may be
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including Air Bag System Maintenance
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
disabilities, contact an Authorized
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
Maserati Dealer.
2
which are known to the State of
WARNING!
· If the speedometer, Rev Counter, or
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail;
any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
thus you could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
you. Do not modify the components ready to inflate for your protection.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wiring. Do not modify the front
Promptly check the fuse block for
or wash your hands frequently when
bumper, vehicle body structure, or
blown fuses. To identify the air bag
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to:
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
fuse see "Fuse Replacement" in section "Maintenance and Care". See
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system without
an Authorized Maserati Dealer if the fuse does not fix the problem.
WARNING!
the necessary know-how.
· Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag
Transport of persons with disability
· Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an Authorized Maserati
may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and
If it is necessary to modify the advanced air bag system of your vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Dealer. Also, have the Occupant
cushion needs to be serviced in any
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
· Have the air bag checked, serviced and replaced only by an Authorized
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
· Only Maserati manufacturer
WARNING! · The advanced air bag system of your
vehicle is not designed to protect adults with disabilities that require
72
Before Starting
deactivation of the passenger or
· how various systems in your vehicle special equipment, can read the
driver air bag.
were operating;
information if they have access to
· If you or another occupant is an
· whether or not the driver and
vehicle or the EDR.
adult with a medical condition that
passenger safety belts were
requires air bag deactivation, please
buckled/fastened;
contact an Authorized Maserati
· how far (if at all) the driver was
2
Dealer. For further information on
depressing the accelerator and/or
disabled driver or passengers see
brake pedal; and
http://www.safercar.gov.
· how fast the vehicle was traveling.
· Persons with disabilities are advised These data can help provide a better
not to travel in the front seat in
understanding of the circumstances in
order to avoid the risk of serious
which crashes and injuries occur.
injuries or death, even in minor crashes.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
if a crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal
This vehicle is equipped with an event driving conditions and no personal data recorder (EDR). The main purpose data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
of an EDR is to record, in certain crash crash location) are recorded. However,
or near crash-like situations, such as an other parties, such as law air bag deployment or hitting a road enforcement, could combine the EDR
obstacle, data that will assist in
data with the type of personally
understanding how a vehicle's systems identifying data routinely acquired
have performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
73
Before Starting
Child Restraint Systems
not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or
NOTE:
could be badly injured or killed. Any forward-facing in the rear seat of the
A child restraint system can help
child riding in your vehicle should
vehicle. Convertible child seats often
protect a child in a vehicle so ensure
always be in a proper restraint system have a higher weight limit in the
2
that the child restraint selected has a
suitable for the child's size.
rearward-facing direction than infant
certification label applicable to FMVSS 213 in the U.S., or CMVSS 213 in Canada.
Everyone in your vehicle must be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. Please
There are different sizes and types of restraint systems for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always refer to the manual provided with child seat to ensure it is the proper type according the travelling child. Use the restraint system that is correct for your child.
carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still younger than at least two years old. Children should remain rearwardfacing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their child seat. Both types of child restraint systems are fixed to the car in the rear
be reminded that you can be
Infants and Child Restraints
seat area by the lap/shoulder belt or
prosecuted for ignoring this law. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or
the LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)" in this section.
statistics, children are safer when
weight limit of their rear facing child
properly restrained in the rear seats
seat.
rather than in the front.
Two types of child restraint systems
WARNING!
can be used rearward-facing: infant
· Never place a rear facing infant seat
carriers and convertible child seats.
in front of an air bag. A deploying
WARNING!
The infant carrier is only used
air bag can cause death or serious
In a collision, an unrestrained child,
rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
even a baby, can become a projectile recommended for children from birth
including a child in a rearward facing
inside the vehicle. The force required until they reach the weight or height
infant seat.
to hold even an infant on your lap
limit of the infant carrier.
· Only use a rearward-facing child
could become so great that you could
74
Before Starting
restraint in a vehicle with a rear
child cannot sit with knees bent over NOTE:
seat.
the vehicle's seat cushion while the
For additional information, refer to
back is against the seatback, they
"http://www.safercar.gov/parents/
Older Children and Child
should use a belt-positioning booster index.htm"
Restraints
seat.
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm
Children who are two years old or
The child and belt-positioning booster or call 1-888-327-4236. seat are fixed to the car by the
2
who have outgrown their rear-facing lap/shoulder belt.
Canadian residents should refer to
child seat can ride forward facing in
Transport Canada's website for
the rear seat of the vehicle in a proper Children Too Large for Booster additional information:
child restraint. Forward-facing child
Seats
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle
seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index53.htm
WARNING! · Improper installation can lead to
failure of an infant or child restraint.
harness for as long as possible, up to
· Make sure that the child is upright in It could come loose in a collision.
the highest weight or height allowed
the seat.
The child could be badly injured or
by the child seat. These child seats are · The lap portion should be low on
killed. Follow the restraint
also fixed to the car by the
the hips and as snug as possible.
manufacturer's directions exactly
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system located in
· Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the
when installing an infant or child restraint.
the rear seat area. Refer to "Lower
belt out of position.
· A rearward-facing child restraint
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)" in this section. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a beltpositioning booster seat until the
· If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the
75
Before Starting
Here are some tips on getting could strike the occupants or
latch into the buckle until it clicks,
the most out of your child
seatbacks and cause serious personal then remove the entire safety belt
restraint
injury.
from the retractor in order to
rewound. While rewinding a click will
2
· Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Maserati also
Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR
indicate the safety belt is now in Automatic Locking mode. Exert then a traction on the exceeded lap section of the belt in order to
recommends that you make sure that Child restraint systems are designed to tighten it around the child restraint
you can install the child restraint in be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts seat. All seat belts will loosen over
the vehicle where you will use it
or the lap belt portion of a
time, it is therefore necessary to check
before you buy it.
lap/shoulder belt.
them periodically and set them
· The restraint system must be
All the passenger seat belts are
properly.
appropriate for your child's weight and height.
· Check the label on the restraint system for weight and height limits.
· Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint system.
· If installed improperly, it may not work when needed.
· Fit the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions.
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure child protection through a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint seat avoiding to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if the entire belt is pulled out of the retractor in order to enable the belt to retract subsequently. For additional information on ALR, see "Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor
Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle's rear outboard seats are all equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system allows the child restraint systems to be fixed without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead fixing the child restraint system to the vehicle structure, using lower anchorages A and upper tether strap B.
WARNING!
(ALR) Mode" in "Occupants Restraint
When your child restraint system is
Systems" in this section.
not in use, secure it in the vehicle with To install a Child Restraint System with
the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
ALR, pull enough of the belt out of the retractor leading it through the belt path of the protection device. Slide the
76
Before Starting
2
LATCH-Compatible child restraint systems are now available. You should never install LATCH child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If your child restraints are not LATCH-Compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle's seat belts.
Installing a LATCH- Compatible Child Restraint System
The lower LATCH anchorages are "U-shaped" metal rings located on the rear seat where the cushion meets the seatback just below the symbol shown in the picture, but are not visible. You will find them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seat.
NOTE: · To correctly install a child restraint
system on the rear seats, position the seat back in the less tilted position (see chapter "Rear seats" in section "Understanding the Vehicle").
· The top tether strap anchorage behind the central rear seat should be used to secure a child restraint system with the vehicle's seat belts.
Such anchorages can be reached pushing down or lifting the foldable end of the trunk compartment cover.
To install a LATCH-Compatible child restraint seat proceed as follows. · Secure the child seat to the
"U-shaped" lower metal rings positioned on the rear seat. · Fix the top tether strap (provided with the child seat), to the anchor
77
Before Starting
located in the rear part of the
anchorages can lead to failure of an
backrest.
infant or child restraint. The child
2
· Lift the headrest. · Route the top tether to provide the
most direct path between the anchorage behind the backrest and the child restraint system passing it between the slide rods of the headrest.
WARNING!
· A child seat should be fitted only when the car is stationary. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system.
could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint system.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
· An incorrectly anchored tether strap
loads imposed by correctly fitted
could lead to increased head motion
child restraints. Under no
and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly
circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
· Tighten upper strap until you reach the tension level recommended by the restraint system manufacturer.
· Fully lower the headrest.
NOTE:
For any further details on installation and/or use of child restraint system, refer to the instructions provided with the child seat.
NOTE: · Ensure that the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. · When using a LATCH-Compatible child restraint system, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children.
WARNING! · Improper installation of a child
restraint system to the LATCH
Important Safety Notice for Transporting Children
· Install the child seat on the rear seat as this is the safest position in case of collisions.
· Keep the instructions in the vehicle together with the documents and this owner's manual. Do not use a child restraint system which does not contain instructions for use.
· Every child has to use one child restraint system; never carry two children using only one child seat.
78
Before Starting
· If using the vehicle seat belt, always Transporting Pets
check that the belt does not restrain
Park Assist
the child's throat.
Air bags deploying in the front seat
The Park Assist (also called
· Firmly pull the seat belt to check
could harm your pet. An unrestrained "ParkSense") system provides visual
that it is correctly buckled.
pet will be thrown about and possibly and audible indications of the distance
· Never allow a child to seat
injured, or injure a passenger during
between the rear and/or front bumper
2
improperly or to unbuckle the seat
panic braking or in an accident.
and a detected obstacle when backing
belt while driving.
Pets should be restrained in the rear
up or moving forward, e.g. during a
seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
parking maneuver.
· Never allow a child to wear the
that are secured by vehicle seat belts. Besides the use of the sensors
shoulder portion of the belt under
available on the bumpers and of the
the arms or behind the back.
rear parking camera, the vehicle may
· Never carry children on your lap, not
be equipped with surround view
even newborns. No one can restrain a child in the event of an accident.
cameras (optional) to assist the driver during maneuvers on dead-ends/roads
· In case of accident, replace the child
and on intersections. For more details
seat with a new one.
on this option, see chapter "Surround
View Camera System (optional)" in
this section.
Refer to "Park Assist System Usage
Precautions" for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
Park Assist system will retain the last
system state (enabled or disabled)
from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the RUN
position.
Park Assist system can be active only
when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or
D (Drive).
If Park Assist is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system
will remain active until the vehicle
79
Before Starting
speed is increased to approximately 7.5 mph (12 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6.2 mph
2 (10 km/h).
Park Assist Sensors
The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to approximately 78 in (200 cm) from the rear bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
GTS and TROFEO Versions
The six Park Assist sensors, located in the front bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to a distance of approximately 50 in (120 cm) from the front bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
GTS and TROFEO Versions
Park Assist Warning Messages Display
The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if "Sound + Display" is selected from the MTC+ System. Refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. The Park Assist Warning screen is located on the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear bumper and/or front bumper and the detected obstacle. The warning display will turn on indicating the system status (ready or off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has been detected.
80
The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two parts with four arcs while the two detection areas behind the car into five arcs. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by displaying arcs with fixed or flashing light and a characteristic sound according to the obstacle distance. The color indicates the distance and the arc indicates the position of the detected obstacle. The green color of the outer arc indicates the maximum distance, the amber color of the middle arcs indicates the medium distance, while the red color of the nearest arc indicates the minimum distance.
Before Starting
The vehicle is close to the obstacle
when the instrument cluster displays
one flashing red arc only, combined
with a continuous sound.
The following charts show the
warning alert visualization when the
2
system is detecting an obstacle.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the instrument cluster will display the arc moving towards the vehicle and the sound tone will change from single to slow, to fast and to continuous.
81
Before Starting
Front distance
More than 50 in (120 cm)
Audible Alert
2
Arc in left and
right areas
None None
Light type
None
Arc color
-
Radio sound
Active
Front Sensors - Warning Alerts
50-40 in (120-101 cm)
40-24 in (100-61 cm)
None
Slow
4th
3rd
Solid Green Active
Solid Amber Mute
23.6-12.2 in (60-31 cm)
Fast
2nd
Flash Amber Mute
Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
1st (inner most)
Flash Red Mute
Rear distance
Audible Alert
Arc in left and right areas
Light type
Arc color
Radio sound
More than 78 in (200 cm) None
None
None
Active
Rear Sensors - Warning Alerts
78-59.4 in (200-151 cm)
60-40 in (150-101 cm)
40-24 in (100-61 cm)
Single
Slow
Slow
5th
Solid Green Mute
4th
Solid Amber Mute
3rd
Solid Amber Mute
23.6-12.2 in (60-31 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flash Amber Mute
1st (inner most)
Flash Red Mute
NOTE:
· Maserati reserves the right to change specifications without prior notification. · Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has
been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
82
Before Starting
Enabling and Disabling Park
the system requires service, the LED
(11 km/h). Under this condition Park
Assist
will blink momentarily, and then the Assist will not operate. See
LED will be on.
"Instrument Cluster" in section
By accessing the submenu "Safety &
When the shift lever is moved to R
"Dashboard Instruments and
Driving Assistant" from MTC+ System, (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of Controls" for further information.
the "Park Assist" can be disabled (option "Off"). The available options
7 mph (11 km/h) or below and the system is disabled, the instrument
If the instrument cluster displays a message prompting you to clean the
2
regarding the warning alerts are:
cluster will display the "PARK ASSIST sensors, make sure the outer surface
"Sound" or "Sound + Display". Refer Off" message for 5 seconds until the
and the underside of the rear bumper
to "MTC+ Settings" in section
shift lever remains in R (Reverse) or
and/or front bumper is clean and clear
"Dashboard Instruments and
when the shift lever is moved in D
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
Controls" for further information.
(Drive).
obstruction and then cycle the ignition
The front sensors can be enabled or disabled at any time by pressing the
Service the Park Assist System
switch. If the message continues to appear contact the Authorized
button on the front dome console.
In case of malfunction of the Park
Maserati Dealer.
Assist system, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single sound, once per
ignition cycle. The instrument cluster
will display a message when any of
the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked
by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
The instrument cluster will display a
message when any of the rear or front
sensors are damaged and require
After pressing the button the instrument cluster will display the state of front parking sensors for approximately five seconds. The button LED will be on when the front sensors are disabled. The button LED will be off when the front sensors are enabled. If the button is pressed and
service. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will display the corresponding message for the time lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive) at speeds less than 7 mph
If a failure message is displayed on the instrument cluster, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
83
Before Starting
Cleaning the Park Assist
surroundings. Failure to do so can
Sensors
CAUTION!
result in serious injury or death.
When cleaning the sensors, take special care not to scratch or damage
· Park Assist is only a parking aid and
Park Assist Volume
2
them; therefore, do not use dry, rough or hard cloths.
it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
The volume of the acoustic signal emitted by the front and rear parking
The sensors must be washed with clean Parking curbs might only be
sensors is set to the medium level.
water, possibly adding car shampoo.
temporarily detected or not detected Three different levels of volume can be
Should you need to repaint the
at all. Obstacles located above or
selected via the submenu "Safety &
bumper or in case of paint touch-ups
below the sensors will not be
Driving Assistant" from the MTC+
in the sensor area, please contact
detected when they are in close
System.
exclusively the Authorized Maserati
proximity.
Low level is useful in certain conditions
Dealer. Incorrect paint application could affect the parking sensors
· The vehicle must be driven slowly
when the parking sensor acoustic
when using Park Assist in order to be signal keeps coming on although there
operation.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
is no actual collision hazard. This may typically occur when driving in a queue or when the vehicle is overtaken by motorcycles or other vehicles on one
NOTE:
· Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Park Assist.
· Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
using Park Assist.
WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
or both sides in a queue of traffic. When you set the volume, only the parking sensor acoustic signal will be affected. The radio or any other devices connected to the vehicle sound system will not be affected. Refer to chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information.
Operation with a Trailer
as a sensor problem, causing the service Park Assist message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your
The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted in the
84
Before Starting
vehicle's tow hook socket, while the front sensors stay active and can
Rear Parking Camera
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
provide acoustic and visual warnings. Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
The rear parking camera is located on
The rear sensors are automatically
parking camera that allows you to see the rear of the vehicle above the rear
reactivated when the trailer's cable
an image on the MTC+ screen of the license plate.
plug is removed.
rear surroundings of your vehicle
2
whenever the shift lever is put into R
(Reverse).
When "Parkview Camera Off Delay"
mode is enabled, the rear view image
shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of R (Reverse).
When "Rearwiew Camera Delay"
mode is enabled, the rear view image
shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of R (Reverse). To assist the driver during maneuvers on dead-ends/roads and on intersections, the vehicle may be equipped with an optional surround view camera system. In this case, the rear parking camera is integrated into the surround view camera system. In both configurations (rear parking camera only or surround view camera system), you can monitor the rear view. For more details on this option, see chapter "Surround View Camera
When the shift lever is shifted out of R (Reverse), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When displayed, dynamic grid lines (if the function is set to "MTC+ Settings") will illustrate the width of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The dynamic grid lines will show separate zones in different color that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
System (optional)" in this section.
The image will be displayed along
with a caution note to "Check Entire
Surroundings" across the top of the
85
Before Starting
The following table shows the
reversing. Failure to do so can result in NOTE:
approximate distances for each zone and color:
serious injury or death.
If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera
Zone
2
Red
Distance to the rear of the vehicle 11 - 12 in (28 - 30 cm)
lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Yellow
12 - 78 in (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
78-157 in (24 m) or greater
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when reversing even when using the rear view camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before reversing. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to be careful while
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, the rear camera should only be used as a parking aid, as the rear camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
· To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the rear camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using the rear camera.
86
Before Starting
Surround View Camera System (optional)
Once the "Surround Camera" screen is displayed, it is possible to choose which images to display according to 4
System components
The system uses four cameras to monitor the area around the vehicle,
possible settings. Rear view and top view
2
placed on the front grid, under the side rearview mirrors and on the
Rear cross path view
liftgate, between the number plate
lights.
When the shift lever is shifted to R
Front cross path view
(Reverse) position, the top view and
the rear view of the surrounding area
will be automatically displayed on
Front view and top view
MTC+ display.
Instead, when the shift lever is shifted
to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position, it is possible to activate/ deactivate the system by pressing "Surround Camera" softkey in "Controls" screen of MTC+ display.
In any shift lever condition, when "Surround Camera" screen is displayed, a pop-up message will appear in the upper part for 5 seconds to advise the driver to check the
surrounding area before any
manoeuvre.
With transmission in P (Park), N
(Neutral) or D (Drive), the upper right
corner of the screen will show the "X"
key: touch it to go back to the
previous screen of MTC+ display,
before entering in "Controls".
The deactivation of the rear
visualization via "X" soft-key is not
87
Before Starting
possible when the transmission is in R possible to set the function that delays · Be sure to always check for any
(Reverse) position.
the exit from this screen in special
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
Choose the most suitable setting for
situations when the transmission lever
obstructions, or blind spots.
the situation and the maneuver you
is in D (Drive), N (Neutral) and P (Park) · The driver must use the utmost
are performing or going to perform, position by using the surround view
caution while using the system to
2
by touching the relevant button
camera delay menu. For further
avoid damage to property or
present under the images: the edges information, see "MTC+ Settings" in
personal injury.
of the pressed button will highlight.
section "Dashboard Instruments and
The button will highlight and the type Controls".
· The camera system with surround
of setting will appear on each image.
view is designed for use during the
day or under good lighting
conditions. Do not use and rely on
the system under poor lighting
conditions.
In the top view, the vehicle is represented as it is during the maneuver (see example in the figure), therefore any open doors will be visible in the image. To display also the dynamic lines of the area you are setting, it is necessary to set this function by accessing the "Settings" menu on MTC+, at "Safety & Driving Assistant" item, by using the dynamic gridlines action menu. Once this menu is displayed, it is also
WARNING! Failure to follow the precautions below might result in serious injury or even death.
· Drivers must be careful during maneuvers also when using the camera system with surround view.
· Always check carefully the areas around your vehicle, before proceeding forward or backward.
· Distance lines and directional lines must be used only as a reference and only when vehicle is on a flat ground. The distance shown on MTC+ display must be interpreted as a reference and might be different from the distance actually present between the vehicle and any displayed objects.
· Any obstacles present above the cameras cannot be detected.
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, the camera system with surround view should only be used as a parking aid, as the
88
Before Starting
cameras are unable to view every
as necessary, service your vehicle in a Safety Tips
obstacle or object in your drive path. well-ventilated area and wear gloves
· To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the camera system with surround
or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to:
Transporting Passengers
view, to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
WARNING! · Do not leave children or animals
2
recommended that the driver looks
inside parked vehicles in hot
frequently over his/her shoulder
weather. Interior heat build-up may
when using this system.
cause serious injury.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
· Never ride in a cargo area, inside of a vehicle.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
89
Before Starting
Exhaust Gas
Whenever detecting a change in the Vehicle Safety Checks
sound of the exhaust system or eventual exhaust fumes inside the
Seat Belts
2
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid
vehicle have the Authorized Maserati Dealer inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could
· Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
· Do not disassemble or modify the system.
breathing (CO), follow these safety
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the · If the belt has been sharply pulled,
tips:
passenger compartment.
for example as the result of an
accident, the safety belt, together
· Do not run the engine in a closed
with the anchoring devices, the
garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining
anchoring device mounting screws and the pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even if the belt
· If it is necessary to sit in a parked
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle does not present any exterior signs
vehicle with the engine running,
can expose you to chemicals including
of wear or damage, it may have lost
adjust your heating or cooling
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
its restraining properties.
controls to force outside air into the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
Air Bag Warning Light
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
· If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blowers switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves
The light should illuminate and remain lit for a few seconds bulb checking when the ignition switch is pushed in RUN position (see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -- Air Bags" chapter in this section).
mode.
or wash your hands frequently when · If the light does not illuminate
servicing your vehicle. For more
while starting, contact the
The best protection against carbon
information go to:
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
monoxide entry into the passenger
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- · If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
compartment is a properly maintained vehicle
on while driving, have the system
engine exhaust system.
90
Before Starting
checked by the Authorized Maserati secured so that they cannot slip out of size of the pedal area and interfere
Dealer.
position and interfere with the pedals
with the pedals.
or impair safe operation of your vehicle.
· Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly
WARNING! Certain components of this vehicle
NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.
2
such as air bag modules, seat belt
provide you with any information
· Always make sure that objects
pretensioners, adaptive steering
about the available Maserati floor
cannot fall into the driver footwell
columns, and button cell batteries
mats included in the "Genuine
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
may contain Perchlorate material.
Accessories" range.
can become trapped under the
Special handling may apply for service
brake pedal and accelerator pedal
or vehicle end of life disposal. See
causing a loss of vehicle control.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
WARNING!
· Mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the
Defroster Check operation by selecting the
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal
factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the
defrost mode and place the fan system on high speed (see "Air Conditioning Controls" chapter in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield and front side windows. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly
injury.
· Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the proper fasteners.
· Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals.
· Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the
brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Tires
· Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns.
· Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
· Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. · Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and
bulges. · Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
91
Before Starting
· Check the tires (see "Tire Inflation
Pressure" chapter in section "Features and Specifications") for
WARNING!
proper cold inflation pressure.
California Proposition 65
2
Lights and Indicator Lights
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
· Have someone observe the operation can expose you to chemicals including
of exterior lights while you operate such as, engine exhaust, carbon
the controls (see "Lights" chapter in monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
section "Understanding the Vehicle").
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
· Check turn signal and high beam
defects or other reproductive harm. To
indicator lights on the instrument
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
cluster (see "Instrument Cluster"
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
chapter in section "Dashboard
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
Instruments and Controls").
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
Door Latches
· Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of doors and liftgate (see "Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob" chapter in this section).
or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
Fluid Leaks
· Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for recent fluid leaks (oil, fuel, etc.).
· If gasoline fumes are detected or fluid leaks are suspected, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
92
3 Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Front Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Adjustable Pedals (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Front to Back Roof Rails (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power Sunroof with Sunshade (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 HomeLink (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Air Conditioning Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
93
Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Components
Dashboard Components 3
94
1 Adjustable side air outlets. 2 Engine START/STOP button. 3 Light switch. 4 Anti-theft system indicator. 5 Steering wheel controls. 6 Instrument cluster. 7 Right shift paddle +. 8 Left shift paddle . 9 Multifunction lever (windshield
wipers, headlight washer and headlight selection, turn signals). 10 Adjustable central air outlets. 11 Analog clock. 12 MTC+ display. 13 Climate controls. 14 Dashboard glove box handle. 15 Dashboard glove box with two USB ports for charging of connected source. 16 Steering wheel adjustment control.
Central Console Components
1 Automatic transmission shift lever.
2 Drive mode switches. 3 Electric Parking Brake lever. 4 Cover for compartment with
AUX, USB and SD memory card port.
Understanding the Vehicle
5 Cover for cupholder and cigarette lighter/power socket compartment.
6 Rotary selectors and buttons for the multimedia navigation.
7 Hazard flashers switch. 8 Drive height selector.
3
95
Understanding the Vehicle
9 Unlock button for central
5 HomeLink controls.
console compartment with cupholder and power outlet.
6 Button to switch off passenger compartment lights.
10 Central console covers with armrest function.
7 Button to open fully/partially the power liftgate.
11 Adjustable air outlets.
8 Button to enable/disable front
12 Cover for power outlet and USB
sensors of the Park Assist system.
3
slots compartment.
9 Sunroof controls (optional).
13 Four-zone climate controls for
rear passengers (optional).
Front Doors Components
Passenger door
1 Inside door handle.
Front Dome Console Components
2 Driver's seat, steering wheel, adjustable pedals and rear
mirrors memory switch (if
equipped).
3 External rearview mirrors switches.
4 Power window switches.
5 Power door unlocks/locks.
Driver door
6 Rear windows and sunshade lockout button.
7 Loudspeakers.
8 Storage compartment.
1 Reading lights control button. 2 Central light control button. 3 Reading lights. 4 Central light.
9 Internal door lock/unlock knob. 10 Door panel grip. 11 Reflex reflector. 12 Outside door handle.
96
13 Door lock button with "Passive Entry" function.
14 Door outboard opening lock.
Rear Doors Components
1 Inside rear door handle. 2 Grip. 3 Loudspeaker. 4 Door storage pockets. 5 Power window and sunshade
(optional) button. 6 Power doors lock/unlock
buttons. 7 "Child protection" door lock
system. 8 Inside door lock/unlock knob. 9 Reflex reflector.
Understanding the Vehicle
10 Outside door handle.
Front Power Seats
11 Heated switch for right rear
Seats, head restraints and seat belts
seat (optional). The heated
are part of the Occupant Restraint
switch for the left rear seat is
System of the vehicle.
on the left rear door.
For further information, see chapter
12 Door lock button with "Passive "Occupant Restraint System" in
Entry" function (optional).
section "Before Starting" and "Head
Restraints" in this section.
3
WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Depending on the different markets and versions, the front seats may have different controls for adjustment and optional features. The configurations shown below may differ from the ones in your vehicle.
Front Power Seat Controls
The power seats switches are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Use the front switch 1 to move the seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat cushion. Use the switch 2 to recline the seatback. Use the rear switch 3 to adjust the lumbar support.
97
Understanding the Vehicle
Grip switch 1 from the back side and Power Lumbar
push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached.
Push the switch 3 forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support.
Push the switch 3 upward or
CAUTION!
downward to raise or lower the
If the seat's movement does not work, lumbar support.
make sure that the corresponding fuse
3
is not tripped (see chapter "Fuse
Replacement" in section "Maintenance
WARNING!
and Care").
· Never adjust the seat while driving.
You could lose control of the vehicle.
Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down)
Moving the seat could distract you
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions.
or make you press a pedal unintentionally.
Pull upward or push the front of the · Seats should be adjusted before
switch 1, to move the front cushion
fastening the seat belts and while
seat in the direction of the switch.
the vehicle is parked.
Release the switch 1 when the desired · Do not ride with the seatback
position is reached.
reclined so that the shoulder belt is
Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Seat Back Tilt Control
no longer resting against your chest.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch 1 forward or
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch 2 forward or
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
rearward, the seat will move in the
rearward, the upper seatback will
direction of the switch.
move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch 1 when the desired Release the switch 2 when the desired
CAUTION!
position is reached.
position is reached.
Do not place any object under a power
Seat Up/Down Adjustment The height of the seat can be adjusted
seat or obstruct its movement as it may cause damage to the seat controls.
up- or downward.
98
Understanding the Vehicle
Seat movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the way.
Front Heated Seats
· Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
The front seats are equipped with heaters in both seat cushions and seatbacks.
Front Seats Heat Function NOTE:
The seats comfort commands are in
The engine must be running for the
the "Climate" screen of the MTC+.
heated seats to operate.
3
They are present in the "Climate"
screen even when the A/C is off. See
· Touch the "Climate" softkey on the · Within 15 seconds, touch the same
"Air Conditioning Controls" in section
lower part of the MTC+ display.
"Dashboard Instruments and
· Starting from the state "OFF",
soft-key a third time to shut off the seat heating.
Controls" for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" (Radio", "Media", "Controls", etc.) the icons of
indicated below the respective icon, within 15 seconds touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key once to select HI-level heating.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within 2 to 5 minutes.
the active front seats comfort
When the HI-level setting is selected,
functions will be indicated on the
the heater will provide a boosted heat
upper part of the display.
level during the first 4 minutes of
operation.
Then, the heat output will drop to the
WARNING!
· Persons with low skin sensitivity because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause irritation even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
· Within 15 seconds, touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key a second
time to select LO-level heating.
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will indicate the change from HI to LO. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes.
99
Understanding the Vehicle
Front Ventilated Seats
· Touch the "Climate" softkey on the · Within 15 seconds, touch the same
(optional)
To enhance occupants comfort by high external temperatures, both the driver and passenger seats, on request, can be ventilated. Small fans are located in the seat
lower part of the MTC+ display.
· Starting from the state "OFF" , indicated below the respective icon, within 15 seconds touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key once to select HI-level ventilation.
soft-key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
cushion and seatback, they draw air
3
from the seat surface through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger
cooler when the temperature is high.
The seats comfort commands are in
the "Climate" screen of the MTC+.
They are present in the "Climate"
screen even when the A/C is off. See
"Air Conditioning Controls" in section
"Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" (Radio",
· Within 15 seconds, touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation.
"Media", "Controls", etc.) the icons of
the active front seats comfort
functions will be indicated on the
upper part of the display.
Front Ventilated Seats Function
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
100
Understanding the Vehicle
Driver Memory Seat
· The "1" and "2" buttons which are used to recall either of two
· Check on the instrument cluster for the positive response of the actions
This feature allows the driver to store
programmed memory profiles.
"Memory 1 (or 2) profile set".
up to two different memory profiles
After these steps, the profile set will
for easy recall through a memory
be memorized in the selected position.
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver
NOTE:
seat, external side mirrors, adjustable
Memory profiles can be set without
pedals (optional), and power tilt and telescopic steering column and a set of
the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle
must be in P (Park) to recall a memory
3
programmed radio stations.
profile.
Your key fob RKE transmitter can also
be set to recall the same positions by
Pairing Remote Keyless Entry
pressing the button.
NOTE:
· Only one key fob RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions.
· "Passive Entry" door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the key fob RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
· The "S" (SET) button, which is used to activate the memory save function.
Memory Profiles Setting
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
· Cycle the ignition device to the ACC or RUN position.
· Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), power tilt and telescopic steering column, and radio station presets).
· Press and release the "S" button on the memory switch.
· Within 5 seconds, press and release
Transmitter to Seats Memory
Your key fob with RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two programmed memory profiles by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
This feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+ System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information.
To program your key fobs RKE transmitter, perform the following actions:
· Cycle the ignition device to the RUN position.
the memory button "1" or "2".
101
Understanding the Vehicle
· Move the seat and/or the other
Memory Position Recall
Easy Entry/Exit Driver Seat
adjustable devices in the position that you wish to memorize, or recall a previously memorized profile, pressing the corresponding memory button "1" or "2".
· Cycle the ignition device to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in P (Park), a message will display in the instrument cluster.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
3
· Press and release the "S" button.
To recall the memory settings for
ignition device to the OFF position.
· Within 5 seconds, press and release
driver, press memory button number
· When you cycle the ignition device
the memory button "1" or "2".
"1" or "2" on the driver's door trim
to the OFF position the driver seat:
· Press and release the button on key fob RKE transmitter.
· Within 3 seconds, press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter.
To check if the system has memorized the correct profile, you can move the seat and press the button: the seat will move to the memorized position.
NOTE:
Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be
panel or the button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position "1" or "2" with ignition device in the RUN position. A recall can be canceled by pressing any of the buttons ("S", "1", or "2") during a recall. When a recall is canceled, the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), and power tilt and telescopic steering column stop moving. A delay of at least one second will
· will move about 2.36 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to ca. 5.51 in (140 mm) forward of the rear stop;
· will move to a position of ca. 3.15 in (80 mm) rearward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 5.51 in (140 mm) and 3.15 in (80 mm) forward of the rear stop.
unlinked to your memory settings by occur before selecting a new recall.
· The seat will return to its previously
pressing the "S" button followed by
set position when you place the
the button on the key fob RKE
ignition device into the ACC or RUN
transmitter.
position.
· The Easy Entry/Exit feature is
disabled when the driver seat
position is less than 3.15 in (80 mm)
forward of the rear stop. In this
position, there would be no benefit
102
Understanding the Vehicle
to the driver by moving the seat for Rear Seats
Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
reaching the required position. When releasing the lever, the fixed positions
Each stored memory setting will have Rear seats can fit three passengers.
will be acknowledged by lever control
an associated easy entry/exit position. Seats, head restraints and seat belts
cable clicking in place to lock.
NOTE:
are parts of the occupant restraint system of the vehicle.
Ensure that seatback is fastened to the position by trying to move it back and
The Easy Entry/Exit feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+
For further information, see chapter "Occupants Restraint Systems" in
forth. Lever control cable locks also when fully folding the seatback down
System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in
section "Before Starting" and "Head on the seat.
section "Dashboard Instruments and
Restraints" in this section.
To move the seatback in another
3
Controls" for further information.
position, lift lever in position 1 and
hold it up until bringing seatback to
WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
the new fixed position, which is acknowledged by the cable locking in place when releasing the lever.
Rear Seat Folding Seatback
The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the rear seat provides for a recliner feature with three available fixed positions that can be set using the lever on seat external side. The LH lever tilts the long part (60), while the RH lever tilts the shorter one (40). The less tilted position (90°) is the one most suitable when a child seat must be installed; the other positions tilt the seatback toward the liftgate up to 23°. To tilt the seatback, lift the lever from its rest position 0 to position 1 while pushing the seatback to the back until
WARNING! · Ensure the seatback is always locked
in one of the fixed positions before fastening the rear seat belts. An
(Continued)
103
Understanding the Vehicle
(Continued) unlocked seatback cannot ensure the necessary stability for passengers and/or for child seats. An unlocked seatback could cause severe injuries in case of accident.
· When fastening a child seat on
external rear seats, ensure that the
corresponding seatback is in the full
3
upright position.
Rear Side Heated Seats (optional)
The side rear seats can be equipped with heaters both in seat cushion and seatback. Rear seats heating can be adjusted by operating control devices on the trim panel of each rear door.
· Always check that the head restraint of the rear seats that must be occupied by a passenger is correctly adjusted (see chapter "Head Restraints" in this section).
NOTE: Rear seat backrest can be fully folded to increase luggage space. See "Cargo Area" in this section for further details.
Rear Armrest
The rear armrest is mobile and can be folded up into the seatback.
· To lower it, pull the stripe as indicated.
· To close it, pull it upwards then push it back into its seat.
On the front part of the armrest there are two cupholders (see "Interior Features" in this section).
CAUTION! The armrest is not designed to support the weight of an adult or a child: please use it only to store beverages or small objects.
NOTE: Seatback panel behind armrest features an opening allowing you to carry long objects or ski bags with no need to fold the seatback. See "Cargo Area" in this section for further details.
WARNING! · Persons with low skin sensitivity
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause irritation even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
· Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause irritation due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
The switch on the trim panel with the resistance icon activates the heating on the corresponding seat.
104
Understanding the Vehicle
· Push the switch once to select the
By setting the HI-level, the system will Head Restraints
highest heating level. The two upper automatically switch to LO-level after
LEDs on the switch will illuminate.
a maximum of 60 minutes of
Front Head Restraints (for
· Push the same switch a second time continuous operation. The LO-level
Comfort Seat only)
to select the lowest level. Only one LED will illuminate.
· Push the same switch a third time to
setting will turn off automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
shut the heating elements off. The
impact. Head restraints should be
LED will turn off.
adjusted so that the top of the head
3
restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
NOTE:
The front head restraints can not be removed.
NOTE:
· Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
· The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
By selecting the HI-level setting, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level.
WARNING! · A loose head restraint thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. · Do not place items over the top of the head restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the head restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
105
Understanding the Vehicle
Front Head Restraints
risk of neck injury in the event of a
Adjustment (for Comfort Seat
crash.
only)
· Head restraints should never be
WARNING!
The front head restraints my be height-adjustable. To adjust them, operate as follows:
· Upward adjustment: raise the head
adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
Be certain that the seat back is locked securely into position. Otherwise the seat will back is not will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat back could
restraint until it clicks into place.
cause serious injury.
3
· Downward adjustment: push the
NOTE:
adjustment button and push
Rear Head Restraints
To allow for maximum visibility for the
downward on the head restraint to lower.
driver, if a seat is not occupied by a passenger, the head restraint can be
All the rear seats head restraints can be adjusted in two positions, up or
lowered to the fully lowered position. down.
WARNING!
· All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the
Front Head Restraints (for Sport Seat only)
The Sport seat is equipped with non-adjustable head restraint on the seat back. The non-adjustable head restraints consist of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seat backs and are intended to help protect occupants from neck injury. Adjust the seat backs to their upright, on-road positions so that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of the occupant's head.
WARNING! · All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
· Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
106
Understanding the Vehicle
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
· To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint.
corresponding seat back partially (see "Cargo Area" in this section). To remove the head restraint (in the picture is represented that of a side seat), proceed as follows:
· Raise the restraint to its upper
position.
· Push at the same time the left
NOTE:
adjustment button and the right
3
release button at the side of the two
supports.
To allow for maximum visibility for the
driver, if a seat is not occupied by a
· To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located at the foot of the head restraint on the left side, and push downward on the
passenger, the head restraint can be lowered to the fully lowered position. See label on the fixed side windows, shown in the picture.
head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint from one of the rear seats is necessary to tilt the
· Remove the head restraint by pulling them upwards.
To reinstall the head restraint, proceed as follows:
· With the corresponding seat back partially tilted, hold down both the adjustment button and release button while placing the head restraint post into the holes.
107
Understanding the Vehicle
· Tilt the seat back to the upright position (see "CArgo Area" in this section).
· Reposition the head restraint to the
Steering Wheel Adjustment
This feature allows you to tilt the
NOTE:
You can use your key fob with RKE transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return
appropriate height for the passenger. steering column upward or downward the tilt/telescopic steering
or to lengthen or shorten it in order to column/wheel to programmed
adjust the steering wheel to an
positions. See "Driver Memory Seat" in
WARNING!
optimized position.
this section.
3
· A loose head restraint thrown
Power Adjustment
forward in a collision or hard stop
could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head
The power tilt/telescoping steering column/wheel switch is located on the lower left side of the steering column.
WARNING! Do not adjust the steering
restraints in a location outside the
To adjust the tilt of the steering
column/wheel while driving.
occupant compartment.
column/wheel, move the switch up or Adjusting the steering column/wheel
· ALL the head restraints MUST be
down as desired.
while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly
steering column/wheel is adjusted
protect the occupants. Follow the
before driving your vehicle. Failure to
re-installation instructions above
follow this warning may result in
prior to operating the vehicle or
serious injury or death.
occupying a seat.
Heated Steering Wheel (optional)
To lengthen or shorten the steering column/wheel, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired.
The steering wheel contains a heating element inside the rim that helps warm driver's hands by cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once turned on, this function will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off.
108
Understanding the Vehicle
The heated steering wheel can shut
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
off early or may not turn on when the
or other physical conditions must be
steering wheel is already warm.
careful when using the seat heater.
The heating steering wheel command
It may cause irritation even at low
is in the "Climate" screen of MTC+. It
temperatures, especially if used for
is present in the "Climate" screen even
long periods of time.
when the A/C is off. See "Air
· Do not place anything on the
Conditioning Controls" in section
steering wheel that insulates
"Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further details.
against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
3
When the MTC+ System is in any mode · Within 15 seconds, touch the heated and material. This may cause the
other than " Climate" ("Radio",
steering wheel soft-key to turn on
steering wheel heater to overheat.
"Media", "Controls", etc.) the icon of
the function.
the heated steering wheel will be
indicated on the upper part of the
display.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
· Touch the "Climate" softkey located on the lower part of the MTC+ display.
· When the heating function is in the off state, soft-key is not highlighted.
· Within 15 seconds, touch the heated steering wheel soft-key a second time to turn it off.
WARNING! · Persons with low skin sensitivity
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
109
Understanding the Vehicle
Adjustable Pedals (if equipped)
The adjustable pedals system is
designed to allow greater range of
pedals positions enabling driver
comfort with regard to the steering
wheel tilt and the seat position.
3
This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or
away from the driver's feet.
The switch is located on the front side
of the driver's seat cushion shield.
Press the switch downward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle). Lift the switch upward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver).
WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals position 110
while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is parked.
The following messages will be displayed if the driver is attempting to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out:
· "Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While Reversing";
· or "Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While Cruise Engaged".
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with driver memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to programmed positions. See "Driver Memory Seat (for versions/markets, where provided)" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION! Do not place any object under the adjustable pedals or obstruct their movements as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's.
Rearview Mirrors
External Mirrors
External mirrors can be adjusted electrically and are equipped with anti-mist resistors operated by the air conditioning system (see "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). The mirrors can be closed electrically and will yield in both directions in case of a collision. The external mirrors are electrochromic, which means, they automatically operate an anti-glare function by gradually shading as the light hitting the mirrors increases. The external rear-view electrochromic mirrors work in conjunction with the internal rear-view electrochromic mirror.
NOTE:
· The mirrors can be adjusted electrically only with the ignition device in ACC and RUN position.
· When the vehicle is started, the indicator light shown in the picture will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear-view mirrors to let the driver know that the optional Blind
Understanding the Vehicle
Spot Assist (BSA) system is operational. For more details see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" in section "Driving".
the adjacent lane and get a partial overlap with the visible image on the inside rearview mirror. Power mirror preselected positions can be reset by operating the Memory Driver Seat device (if equipped). Check "Driver Memory Seat" in this section for further information.
3
The external of the rear-view mirror support is equipped with LEDs, lighting up when the turn signals and vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. When the surround view camera system is installed, at the external bottom side of the rear-view mirror is the side view camera (refer to "Surround View Camera System (optional)" in section "Before Starting").
Mirrors Positioning
The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the external side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Use the inside mirror to judge the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the external side convex mirror.
To adjust a rearview mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. The spin button will illuminate indicating the rearview mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Press the mirror control switch corresponding to the arrow indicating the direction of the desired movement. For optimal vision orientate the outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This feature provides automatic external rearview mirrors positioning, allowing the driver to view the ground area behind the front doors. The external mirrors will move slightly downward from the current position when the shift lever is shifted into reverse. The external mirrors will then return to the original position when the lever is shifted out of the reverse position. Each memory set of the driver's seat (see "Driver Memory
111
Understanding the Vehicle
Seat" chapter in section "Understanding the Vehicle") corresponds to a mirror tilt position in reverse.
NOTE:
The mirrors tilt in reverse can be
turned on and off using the MTC+
System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in
3
section "Dashboard Instruments and
Controls".
· If the mirrors are automatically folded after the last lock action, then they will automatically unfold when the ignition device is set on ACC or RUN position.
· If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfolded to reactivate the automatic function.
Folding Mirrors
By selecting this feature on MTC+ the rear-view mirrors automatically fold when the vehicle is locked by the key fob and when the power liftgate (if equipped) is closed and locked by pressing the button on the outer ledge of the left boot compartment lining. When the vehicle and the liftgate will be unlocked and the ignition device is set in RUN position, the rear-view mirrors will automatically open in the position they had before the lock. The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches.
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in; press the switch a second time to reset the mirrors to the standard position. There is a way to make external mirrors automatically fold/unfold.
· If the function is available, it needs to be activated by MTC+ (refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
CAUTION! Never retract or open the mirrors manually: it could damage the power mechanism.
Internal Rearview Mirror
The position of internal rearview mirror can be manually adjusted, and is endowed with an accidentprevention release system operating in the event of a collision. Internal rearview mirror is electrochromic: this glare function is automatically deactivated in reverse to ensure maximum visibility of obstacles.
CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning
112
Understanding the Vehicle
solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Lights
Light Switch
NOTE:
If the headlights or position/DRL lights are on after the ignition switch is
"Mirror Dimmer" Feature The auto-dimming feature can be
The headlight switch located on the left side of the dashboard is used for the position/DRL lights, headlights,
placed in OFF position, a buzzer will alert the driver while opening the driver's door to exit the car.
disabled or re-enabled by pressing the on/off button on the mirror base.
side marker, license plate lights, front and rear fog lights operation.
Disabling this feature will increase the reflectance of the internal mirror,
3
increasing visibility at night.
Rotate the light switch to the or to the position: the instrument cluster will display the related telltale.
113
Understanding the Vehicle
Lighting Up External Lights according to the Position of the Lights Switch, and Ignition Device and according to the Engine Status and Twilight Sensor Mode
Ignition Engine Twilight
Device Status Sensor
Position
Mode
AUTO
Lights Switch Position 0
All lights off.
OFF
3
All lights off.
Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on.
Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on.
ACC
Off
All lights off.
All lights off.
Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2).
Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2).
RUN
Off
All lights off.
All lights off.
Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2).
Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2).
DRL (1) on (if enable DRL (1) on (if enable DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position
RUN
On
DAY by MTC+).
by MTC+).
lights, side marker and license plate
(1), side marker and license plate lights on.
lights on.
RUN
Low beams, position DRL (1) on (if enable DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position
On
NIGHT
(1), side marker and license plate lights
by MTC+).
lights, side marker and license plate
(1), side marker and license plate lights on.
on.
lights on.
(1) The lighting system uses the same LED for DRL and front position lights with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position lights. (2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery.
114
Understanding the Vehicle
Automatic Headlights
and off the external lights is to be
turn off the headlights within 45
This system automatically turns the
considered as an aid for the driver. If necessary, switch the lights including
seconds. The delay interval begins when the
headlights on or off according to ambient light intensity detected by
the front and rear fog lights on and off manually.
lights switch is turned off (position "0"). If you turn the headlights or
the twilight sensor positioned on the
position lights on, or place the
inner surface of the windshield, over the rear view mirror. To turn the
Headlights On with Wipers
ignition switch in RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
system on, rotate the lights switch
When this feature is active, the
If you turn the headlights off ("0"
clockwise to "AUTO" position.
headlights will turn on approximately position) before the ignition, they will
3
When the automatic system is activated, the headlight time delay
10 seconds after activation of the wipers, if the lights switch is placed in
turn off in the normal mode.
feature is activated as well. This means the "AUTO" position. The headlights NOTE:
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition device into OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the lights switch out of "AUTO" position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running and the twilight sensor in "NIGHT" mode before the headlights turn on in automatic mode.
will additionally turn off by deactivation of the wipers if previously activated with this function.
NOTE: The headlights with wipers feature may be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
Headlights Time Delay
· To activate this feature the lights must be turned off ("0" position) within 45 seconds of placing the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position.
· The headlight delay time is programmable using the MTC+ System, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".
· If the low beam bulbs/LEDs are active due to "Headlights with
This safety feature provides headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds
Wipers", then the headlamps delay feature will not be activated when
WARNING! The responsibility for turning on the lights, depending on the daylight and regulations in force in the country of use, always lies with the driver. The
(programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the delay feature, place the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position while the headlights are still on. Then
the ignition switch is set in OFF position.
automatic system for switching on
115
Understanding the Vehicle
SmartBeamTM System (for
dynamically modify the light shape
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
versions/markets, where provided)
The SmartBeamTM system provides increased forward lighting for a more comfortable and secure driving experience without resulting in glare
produced by the dipped beam and by the full beam as well, to make the driver visibility as much comfortable as possible in every condition without glaring other traffic participants.
System Limitations
The lighting system uses the same high or low intensity headlamps LED, respectively, for the DRL lights and front position lights. DRL lights will turn on when the twilight sensor is in "DAY" mode, the
to other vehicles in certain traffic
There are some cases in which the
engine is running and the light switch
3
situations. The SmartBeamTM system
SmartBeamTM system may not function is in
or "AUTO" position.
uses a forward facing digital camera, properly temporarily, and cause
If a turn signal is activated, the DRL
located on the windshield behind the glaring for other vehicles especially
LED on the same side of the vehicle
internal rear-view mirror, and an
with "Auto High Beam Assist" feature will turn off for the duration of the
electronical headlights controller in
activated on MTC+ "Controls" page
turn signal activation. Once the turn
order to dynamically adapt the front (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in
signal is deactivated, the DRL LED will
light distribution according to the
section "Dashboard Instruments and
light up again.
traffic scenario. The digital camera works like a human eye, it is able to see which is the traffic context while the headlight electronic controller works like a human brain, using information from the camera to command an headlight reaction that gives to the driver the "best" light distribution (best is always in reference
Controls"). These cases could be related to:
· Vehicles headlight and/or rear light (one or both of them) not visible in the field of view of the camera.
· Heavy rainy weather. · Heavy foggy weather. · Snowing weather.
NOTE:
On Canadian vehicles DRL are always on. On USA vehicles the DRL lights can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information.
to the specific traffic environment).
· Windshield dirt or impurities in
The camera gives information to the
camera lens zone.
electronical headlight controller about environmental brightness, traffic participants vehicle and obstacles lights, distances and velocities. Using a proper combination of all these data the smart beam system is able to
· Camera lens obstruction or logging. In all these cases, it will be the driver's responsibility to avoid this glaring by acting manually on the system, switching off the high beam by means of steering wheel multifunction lever.
116
Understanding the Vehicle
Bi-Xenon Headlight (for headlights without AFS)
· "country beam"; · "town beam";
The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights · "adverse weather beam";
operate with an electric arc saturated · "tourist beam" (for example in
with Xenon gas under pressure,
countries with circulation on the
instead of the incandescent filament.
opposite side). In this case this
The light produced is assuredly higher
function must be activated via the
compared to traditional light bulbs, in menu of MTC+ (refer to "MTC+
terms of quality (brighter light) as well Settings" in section "Dashboard
3
as of the span and positioning of the
Instruments and Controls").
illuminated area.
WARNING! If xenon headlamp replacement is necessary, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer only: DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
Headlight with AFS (for versions/markets, where provided)
These headlights combines the "xeno" technology to the AFS (Advanced Frontlighting System) adaptive features.
The advantages offered by the AFS system are perceived especially in case of bad weather, fog and/or insufficient road indications providing broader illumination of the side zones, which are normally left in the dark, and for motorway driving (see comparison rendered below). This surely increases driving safety as it offers less eye stress and increased orientation for the driver and better detection of other persons on the road sides (pedestrians, bicycle riders and motorcycle drivers). The table shows the light values (lux) and the light flux (lumen) of AFS headlights.
Combining a bending mode and a vertical adjustment, the system assures better visibility of the road surface when driving on a curve, steering, or in the event of road deviations, optimizing vertical and horizontal light distribution according to the current drive path. The increased lateral illumination is gained through a fixed bending light or a cornering light (depending on the market) elaborating information about the steering angle, the vehicle speed and the turn indicator. The improved vertical illumination, in case of fast acceleration and/or fast deceleration, will assure the deeper
The system is able to process signals of
illuminated distance from the vehicle,
onboard systems and subsequently
through a dynamical adaptation of
start up five strategic steps in the
headlight vertical attitude.
following situations:
· "motorway beam";
117
Understanding the Vehicle
(A) Low beam High beam (B) Motorway
Lighting 75 lux 130 lux
120 lux (Driver Side) 140 lux (Passenger Side)
Light flux 1200 lm 1600 lm
1200 lm
These features positively affect some vehicle management economy aspects by eliminating/reducing the light bulb replacements and the fuel consumption.
AFS Features
NOTE:
3
· Each time the adaptive headlight
"Full-LED" Headlight with AFS (optional)
The system is able to process signals of onboard systems and subsequently start up five strategic steps in the
system is turned on, the headlights
These headlights combines the
following situations:
will perform a self-regulation cycle.
· All AFS features are available only if the vehicle is moving forward.
"Full-LED" technology to the AFS (Advanced Frontlighting System) adaptive features, using a
· "motorway beam"; · "country beam";
· "Adaptive Front Light" function can forward-facing camera located on the · "town beam";
be turned on or off using the MTC+ windshield behind the internal
· "adverse weather beam";
System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in rear-view mirror.
· "tourist beam" (for example in
section "Dashboard Instrument and Controls" for further information.
"Full-LED" Technology
This technology allows having headlights with a simpler construction and a more compact size compared to those equipped with traditional or Xenon light bulbs. Other advantages are:
countries with circulation on the opposite side). In this case this function must be activated via the menu of MTC+ (refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). The advantages offered by the AFS system are perceived especially in case
· a clearer light beam, with a cool
of bad weather, fog and/or insufficient
white tone that allows a better
road indications providing broader
perception of the contrasts thus
illumination of the side zones, which
making the night vision more
are normally left in the dark, and for
efficient and less tiring;
motorway driving.
· a longer duration equivalent at least This surely increases driving safety as it
to that of the vehicle;
offers less eye stress and increased
· a reduced current consumption.
orientation for the driver and better
118
Understanding the Vehicle
detection of other persons on the
The system assures better visibility of NOTE:
road sides (pedestrians, bicycle riders the road surface when driving in a
· Each time the adaptive headlight
and motorcycle drivers). Furthermore, curve, steering, or in the event of road system is turned on, the headlights
the headlamps are suitable to prevent deviations, optimizing vertical light
adjustment will perform a
glare, providing optimal lighting
distribution according to the current
self-regulation cycle.
when driving the car in a country with circulation on the opposite side. The table shows the light values (lux)
drive path. The increased lateral illumination is gained through a fixed bending light
· All AFS features are available only if the vehicle is moving forward.
and the light flux (lumen) of AFS
or a cornering light (depending on the · "Adaptive Front Light" function can
headlights.
market) elaborating information
be turned on or off using the MTC+
3
NOTE:
about the steering angle, the vehicle speed and the turn indicator.
System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instrument and
The values reported in the table may The improved vertical illumination, in
Controls" for further information.
change depending on the destination market of the car.
case of fast acceleration and/or fast deceleration, will assure the deeper
AFS System Failure
In the event of AFS system unvailable,
the related warning light and message
Lighting (at 27 yd/25 m)
Light flux
will light up on the TFT display. Take
Low beam
55 lux
765 lm
your vehicle to the nearest Center of
Low beam (low speed) Low beam (high speed)
43 lux 58 lux
600 lm 800 lm
the Authorized Maserati Delaer as soon as possible to check the system.
Low beam (wet road)
42 lux
790 lm
High beam
150 lux
1440 lm
illuminated distance from the vehicle, through a dynamical adaptation of headlight vertical attitude.
119
Understanding the Vehicle
Automatic High Beam (for versions/markets, where provided)
Activation Mode
To activate Automatic High Beam feature:
The Automatic High Beam headlight
· Shift the multifunction lever onward
control system provides increased
.
forward lighting at night by
· Put the light switch in "AUTO"
automating high beam control
position.
through the use of the forward-facing · Touch the "Controls" soft-key in the
3
digital camera located behind the
lower part of the MTC+ display.
rear-view mirror, which is the same one used for example by the Lane Keeping Assist - LKA system on vehicles with ADAS systems.
· Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key to turn on the feature.
With ADAS · Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto
High Beam Assist" soft-key a second
This camera detects the environmental
time to turn it off.
luminosity, the headlamps of
After these steps, the green indicator
oncoming vehicles and the tail lamps
on the upper right side of the TFT
of proceding vehicles in the front area.
display comes on.
In these cases, the system
automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
Futhermore, the digital camera is able
to detect the urban areas and the
inhabited centers and to turn off the high beams when driving near of one
Without ADAS
of them.
The properly working for this feature
(if all the other conditions are met) is
ensured between 21.7 mph (35 km/h)
and 155 mph (250 km/h).
120
Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: · The function is enabled only if the
High Beam with "Glare Free" Feature (for "Full-LED"
1. two vehicles ahead in the same direction;
brightness sensor detects the right lighting conditions and them switch to low beam on.
· Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles
headlight with AFS)
The "Glare Free" feature associated with "Full-LED" headlamps assists the driver during traveling on an off-city road with not sufficient environmental
2. another vehicle that is overtaking;
3. another vehicle proceeding in the opposite direction.
in the field of view will cause
illumination allowing the high beam
headlights to remain on longer
use also with other traffic participants
3
(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,
without glaring disturbance.
film, and other obstructions on the The no glaring effect is obtained
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
through matrixes of LED that are dynamically switched on and off in
Automatic High Beam Failure
order to create a shadow zone in correspondence of each other traffic
In the event of an automatic high
participants lights (motor vehicles and
beam system failure, the related
bicycles, as well), according to the
amber warning light will light up on information about other vehicles'
the TFT display.
lights coming from the forward-facing The system is able to detect and react
Take your vehicle to the nearest
digital camera located on the
to an oncoming vehicle starting from
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as windshield , behind the internal
a distance of about 400 yd (400 m), in
possible avoiding to use this system.
rear-view mirror.
a couple of seconds. Instead, in case of
The no glaring system is a
the preceding vehicles, the system is
multi-shadow system, since it's able to able to detect and react in few
create up to four light tunnels
seconds starting from a distance of
simultaneously , each tunnel zone is as about 100 yd (100 m).
large as the obstacle that should not be glared. The figure represents an example of the car that is travelling in the following scenarios:
Activation Mode
The digital camera is the same used for the automatic high beam, and like automatic high beam also for "Glare Free" feature it needs to be activated
by MTC+ "Controls" screen, touching
121
Understanding the Vehicle
the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key, When instead there is the needing to
disturbance for other vehicles, to
as shown in the previous paragraph
switch off the whole high beam
avoid this the driver has to switch off
"Automatic High Beams".
module to obtain the no glaring
the high beam manually.
The "Glare Free" feature will be engaged after the following actions:
effect, on the instrument cluster there · In phase of disengagement of the will be just one indicator on: the green feature, the minimum operating
· Engine run.
· Feature enabled by MTC+.
· Low beam on.
3
· Interior light switch in position
"Auto".
one. When the scenario allows the partial or full use of high beam with no glaring disturbance, the blue indicator will appear again.
speed is 15.5 mph (25 km/h).
· "Glare Free" feature proper operation is guaranteed if vehicle speed is less than, or at least equal to 155 mph (250 km/h).
· Multifunction lever in "High beam" activated position.
The "Glare Free" feature will work if:
· The vehicle speed is equal or greater than 21.7 mph (35 km/h) in the engagement phase of the feature.
· Environmental brightness is not sufficient for a safe and comfortable drive.
· Traffic scenario out of urban context. Once the system will be active, there will be two indicators on the instrument cluster, showed in the same time: one blue and one green. The green indicator indicates that the "Auto High Beam Assist" feature is activated on MYC+; the blue indicator indicates that all or only some high beam LEDs are physically on in that moment.
NOTE:
· Some unpredictable conditions, such as dirt, dust, film or any other obstruction on camera lens zone events could affect "Glare Free" feature making it working improperly.
· Heavy rainy and foggy weather could affect system performance, leaving the full beam switched on for longer time than the nominal working condition. This could cause a glaring
Automatic High Beams/Glare Free High Beams Failure
In the event of a failure on high beam system (Automatic or Glare Free equipped, as well), the related amber warning light will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Center of the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible avoiding to use this system.
122
Understanding the Vehicle
Fog Lights
NOTE:
The front fog lights can only be
switched on if the position lights
are switched on. It is possible to
turn on the rear fog lights only if the
low beam lights or the front fog
lights are on.
3
The front and rear fog lights switch is built into the light switch. The front and rear fog lights turn on and off in the following order:
· press the lights switch once to turn on the front fog lights;
· press the lights switch a second time to turn on the rear fog lights (front fog lights will stay on);
Turning the lights switch off (position "0") will also deactivate the front and rear fog lights.
NOTE:
You can also activate the front fog lights by pressing the lights switch once when in position and ignition device in RUN position.
The amber indicator light inside the tachometer of the instrument cluster illuminates when the rear fog lights are turned on.
· from this condition, press the lights switch again to turn off the rear fog lights (front fog lights will stay on);
· press the lights switch again to turn off the front fog lights.
The green indicator light in the instrument cluster display illuminates when the front fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
After a key-off/key-on cycle, the front fog lights will activate automatically when turning on the position lights
. The rear fog lights will only turn on by operating as previously described.
123
Understanding the Vehicle
Multifunction Lever
NOTE:
The multifunction lever controls the
operation of the turn signals,
headlight beam selection and
overtaking lights, wipers and washers
acting on the windshield and on the
liftgate (for this content see the
chapter "Wipers and Washers" of this
3
section).
The multifunction lever is fitted on the
left side of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever all the
· If either light remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside light. If an indicator on the instrument cluster fails while moving the lever, then the turn indicator is probably defective.
· The message that a turn signal is on will appear in the instrument cluster and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
way up or down until the stop triggers.
High Beams and Flashing
To switch on the high beams with the light switch in headlamp or
"AUTO" position, shift the multifunction lever onward.
To activate lane change function, tap
The blue telltale the tachometer.
will illuminate on
the lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent. The turn
signals (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
The left or right arrow on the speedometer and tachometer
This function is useful when overtaking or changing lanes.
instrument cluster respectively, flashes
to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
124
Understanding the Vehicle
By pulling the lever backward (toward
shares the same characteristics
the steering wheel) you switch off the high beams and switch on the low
CAUTION!
excepting the trunk and liftgate lights. The brightness of the interior lights
beams.
The high beams can only be switched on manually by pushing the multifunction lever forward.
(ambient lighting and backlighting of controls and instruments) can be adjusted by means of the buttons on
steering wheel right-hand side, enter
"Vehicle settings" menu and select
"Interior Lighting" sub-menu. To
WARNING!
adjust the backlighting, the vehicle
3
If the high beams are activated, they must be running and the light switch
will turn on automatically every time must be in position.
the low beams are switched on either Press and release the switch ( ) to
manually or automatically. We
visualize the available parameters:
recommend therefore that you switch
You can signal another vehicle with
them off when they are no longer
· "Backlighting" (example shown in
your headlights by lightly pulling the necessary and every time the twilight
figure).
multifunction lever toward you. This
sensor deactivates the external lights. · "Ambient Lighting".
will turn on the high beams headlights
until the lever is released.
Interior Lights
Flashing occurs also with lights off (lights switch in position "0") if the ignition switch is RUN position.
The interior and external approach lights turn on and off when entering/exiting the vehicle (see "Illuminated Entry/Exit" in section "Before Starting" for further information). To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the interior lights were turned on manually or by opening a door. The glove box light, on the dashboard,
Use arrow or to scroll the list of parameters that can be adjusted and confirm selection by pressing and releasing switch ( ): available options will be shown on the display.
125
Understanding the Vehicle
A check mark will remain next to the · LED in correspondence of the
Dome Lights
previously-selected item until a new selection is made.
internal door handle; · doors and steering wheel backlight
controls LED; · front footrest light;
The dome lights integrated into the front dome console, include a central and two reading lights. The central light automatically turns
· front seats night lighting.
on when one of the doors is opened
and turns off when the door is closed
Automatic Headlights Leveling (timed switching off). The light may be
3
A correct headlights leveling is crucial switched on manually by pressing the
for the safety of the vehicle's
central button.
occupants and of people in the street. The reading lights are controlled by
Moreover it is included in the road
the respective side buttons.
regulation law.
If they are turned on by pressing the
Press and release the switch ( ) to select the option. A selection notice
In order to obtain the best visibility conditions while driving with
button, both central and reading lights will stay on for about 10 minutes after
pops up for 2 seconds and then the
headlights on, the headlight beam
turning the engine off, and will then
display reverts to the last modified
must be properly leveled, under any
turn off gradually.
parameter.
vehicle load condition.
When the exterior lights are switched
The vehicle is equipped with a system on, the two night LEDs fitted on the
that automatically adjusts headlight
side of the power buttons on the
leveling according to ground clearance overhead console will light up to
and vehicle load conditions.
The dimmable lights are the following: · instrument cluster dials and display; · dome light (front/rear);
126
Understanding the Vehicle
facilitate the use of the transmission lever and the central console.
NOTE:
The controls of the sunroof and the HomeLink and the button to switch off Park Assist system can be found on the front dome console.
A light is available on the roof, under
the sun visors; it turns on when user
moves the courtesy mirror cover,
which is built in the back of sun visor.
3
If one or more doors are opened, the front and rear dome lights will turn on for 27 seconds. If the door is closed before this time, the lights will dim and subsequently switch off after about 3 seconds.
Button to Switch off Passenger Compartment Lights In addition to specific switches to turn on and off the front and rear side dome lights as previously described, on the front console there is a button that allows to turn off and on all these lights.
NOTE:
The dome lights will also turn on by pressing the or button for centralized doors unlock and lock on the key fob RKE transmitter. See "Illuminated Entry/Exit" section "Before Starting" for further information.
Apart the lights on the front dome console, there is a light with relevant on/off switch located next to the passenger handholds for the external rear seats. These lights will operate only when the ignition device is in the ACC or RUN position.
In the event of a collision causing automatic interruption of fuel supply, the dome lights switch on automatically and remain lit for approx. 15 minutes.
Cargo Lights
To illuminate the cargo area there are two lights on liftgate and two more
127
Understanding the Vehicle
inside the trunk compartment. These lights turn on when liftgate is opened and turn off when it is closed.
operation is independent of the ignition device position. Press the button again to turn them off. When these lights are on, the direction indicators, the related arrow indicator on the instrument cluster and the button itself will flash.
warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
3
The external mirrors can be equipped also with approach and courtesy LEDs, lighting up when the vehicle entry/exit lights are activated.
NOTE:
When the hazard warning lights are activated, the direction indicator controls are disabled.
If liftgate is left open for a long time, lights will turn off after 30 minutes to save battery charge.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the indicated button on the center of the central console to turn on the hazard warning flashers. The
Integrated External Rearview Mirror Lights
External mirrors are supplied with LED turn signals integrated on the support. The LED turn signal indicators flash simultaneously with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard
128
Understanding the Vehicle
Wipers and Washers
setting (see "Rain Sensing Wipers"
paragraph in this chapter).
The multifunction lever operates the
CAUTION!
· For low speed wiper operation
wipers and washers acting on the
· Turn the washer acting on the
(stable position "LO"): rotate the
windshield and on the window of the
windshield and on the window of
end of the multifunction control
liftgate when the ignition switch is
the liftgate wipers off when driving
lever forward to the first trigger
placed in RUN or ACC position. The
through an automatic car wash. The
after the intermittent setting.
multifunction lever is located on the
windshield wipers may be damaged · Rotate to the second trigger after
left side of the steering column. The windshield washer and headlight
if the wiper control is left in any position other than "OFF".
the intermittent setting for
3
high-speed (stable position HI) wiper
washer (if equipped) share the same fluid reservoir, and a low fluid level is indicated by the same indicator light
and by the message on the instrument cluster.
· In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
operation.
· Rotate the end of the lever backward to the "MIST" position to activate a single wipe cycle. The wipers will continue to operate until
freeze to the windshield and/or to
you release the multifunction lever.
the window of the liftgate, the wiper motor may be damaged when the vehicle is restarted.
· To turn the wipers off rotate the lever to "OFF".
· Always remove any buildup of snow
that prevents the wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the
wiper control is turned off and the
blades cannot return to the off
position, the wiper motor may be
To refill the fluid, see "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance
damaged.
and Care".
Windshield Wipers
· Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four settings to activate the automatic intermittent
129
Understanding the Vehicle
Rain Sensing Windshield
multifunction lever to the automatic
Wipers
function or move the shift lever out
CAUTION!
of N (Neutral).
This feature detects moisture on the
windshield through an internal
· The rain sensing feature may not
Headlights On with Windshield
rearview mirror integrated sensor, which automatically activates the
function properly by ice or dried salt water on the windshield.
Wipers
relative wipers.
· Use on the windshield of RainX® or When activating this function, the
Rotate forward the end of the
products containing wax or silicone headlights will light up approximately
3
multifunction lever to one of four settings to adjust the detection system. First wiper delay position is the least sensitive, and fourth wiper delay position is the most sensitive. Third position should be used for normal
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:
10 seconds after the wipers acting on the windshield are turned on if the light switch is placed in "AUTO" position. In addition, the headlights switch off when the wipers are turned off (position "OFF") if they were
rain conditions.
· Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit: the previously turned by using this
The rain sense wipers will
rain sensing feature will not operate function. Powering on Headlights with
automatically change between an
when the ignition is in RUN position, wipers can be activated and
intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a
the vehicle is stationary and the
deactivated with the MTC+ System, see
fast wipe depending on the amount of outside temperature is below 32°F
"MTC+ Settings" in section
detected moisture sensed by a
(0°C). To resume, set the automatic "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"
particular area of the windshield.
feature on the multifunction lever,
for further information.
Place the wiper switch in the "OFF" position when you do not want to use
start the engine and drive or wait until the outside temperature rises
Wiper Blade Maintenance
the automatic intermittent system.
above freezing.
When the wiper arms acting on the
The rain sensing feature can be turned · Wipe Inhibit with Transmission in
windshield are in the rest position it is
on and off using the MTC+ System, see Neutral Position: the rain sensing
not possible to check or replace the
"MTC+ Settings" in section
feature will not operate when the
blades (Service position) as they are
"Dashboard Instruments and Controls" ignition is placed in the RUN
folded under the hood. To service the
for further information.
position, the transmission shift lever blades (see paragraph "Wiper
is in the N (Neutral) position and the Maintenance and Blades
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
Replacement" in chapter
(8 km/h). To resume, set the
"Maintenance Procedures" of section
"Maintenance and Care") it is
130
Understanding the Vehicle
necessary to shift the multifunction
(see paragraph "Wiper Maintenance If you activate the washer while the
lever to "OFF" and the ignition switch and Blades Replacement" in chapter windshield wiper is turned off ("OFF"
to OFF position.
"Maintenance Procedures" of section position) the wipers will operate for
Shift the control lever within 15
"Maintenance and Care").
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
seconds to the "MIST" position
(forward rotation of the end of the
multifunction control lever) and
WARNING!
release. The blades are brought in a
Operate or service the windshield
position enabling to open the wiper arms and change the blades.
wiper blades without deactivating the wipers ("OFF" position), leaving the
3
ignition switch in RUN can be
dangerous for the operator since the
rain sensor may suddenly activate the
wipers. Always use "Service" position
for any intervention on the
windshield wiper blades.
It is possible to use the "MIST" position for a maximum of 3 times within two minutes, corresponding to different three blades positions on the windshield. When completed, bring the ignition switch in RUN: the arms will reposition. If necessary move the multifunction lever to other required operating positions. To change the wiper blade on rear window of liftgate, simply lift the wiper arm to detach it from window
Windshield Washers and Headlight Washers
To use the washer on the windshield, push the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the automatic intermittent range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the previously-selected intermittent interval.
WARNING! · Do not start the windshield washer
during the cold months until the windshield has warmed up. If it has not warmed up, the liquid could freeze on the glass and block your view.
· Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield
131
Understanding the Vehicle
(Continued) washer use.
fluid onto each headlight lens every 11 windshield wipers cycles.
Once released, control will go back to "OFF" position.
Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles (optional)
WARNING!
To avoid fluid freezing inside at low
California Proposition 65
external temperatures, a fluid supply
Operating, servicing and maintaining nozzles can be heated by internal a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle resistors.
3
can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that Use the switch on multifunction lever
which are known to the State of
as follows to turn on the rear window
California to cause cancer and birth
wiper and/or washer:
As a precaution, rear window washer
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
· From the "OFF" position, turn control forward to the first detent to activate wiper intermittently;
· Turn control forward to the second detent to activate wiper continuous action;
· A further rotation forward (unstable position) will trigger the rear window washer until control is released. After control release, the
pump stops if control is held in active position for over 20 seconds. When control is released, pump will resume normal operation. If rear window wiper is still on, the wiper arm will automatically go back to rest position when the ignition device is turned OFF.
Headlight Washers (if provided)
The multifunction lever also operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in RUN position and the headlights are turned on. The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray of washer
rear window wiper will resume continuous operation;
· From the "OFF" position, turn control backward (unstable position) to trigger rear window washer until control is released: the rear window wiper will perform several cycles.
132
Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Features
Electric Power Outlets
The vehicle is equipped with four 12 Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, two available for the front seat passengers, one for rear seat passengers and one fitted in the trunk
any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Damages caused by improper use of the power outlet are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
High power consumption items plugged into this outlet for long periods may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.
compartment.
WARNING!
3
In vehicles equipped with "Smoking
To avoid serious injury or death:
Kit" the electric power outlet inside the cupholder is replaced with a cigarette lighter. All power outlets are supplied only
· Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
when the engine is started or the
· Replacing the fuses that protect
ignition device set to ACC or RUN.
power outlets with others of higher
Power outlets are protected by a fuse.
amperage, there is the risk of fire.
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug · Do not touch with wet hands.
into the power outlets to ensure proper operation. Otherwise, check the matching fuse integrity, see "Fuse Replacement" in section "Maintenance and Care" for further
· Close the lids when the plug is not used and while driving the vehicle.
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.
information.
Power Outlet inside the Cupholder
Compartment
CAUTION!
· Do not plug in accessories that exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
· Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
To access the power outlet inside the cupholder beside the shift lever, press the cover as indicated to open it completely. Remove the cigarette lighter and use its socket as power outlet.
133
Understanding the Vehicle
Power Outlets inside the Central Console To access the power outlet located inside the glove box of the central console you need to open the half-lids as indicated in the following paragraph.
3
Cupholders
The vehicle is equipped with several cupholders.
Rear Power Outlets
A 12 V power outlet in the compartment at the rear end of the central console, is available upon request for rear seat passengers. To access the power outlet, push the lid as indicated: it will open completely.
Power Outlet inside the Trunk
The power outlet is positioned on the right side of the trunk compartment.
CAUTION!
· Use light and shatterproof containers.
· Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cupholders to prevent damage to the containers.
· Do not store hot drinks.
Cuholders for Front Passengers
The front cupholders are located beside the transmission lever and within the central console. To access the cupholder, push the cover as shown in the picture and it will open completely.
134
Understanding the Vehicle
Cupholders for Rear Passengers Two cupholders are available in the front side of the rear seats central armrest.
The storage and passenger compartment share the same air conditioning even though you may exclude the air conditioning of the cupholder compartment by moving the indicated button.
By pressing the indicated button on the central console, the half-lids will rise completely enabling access to the inner compartment where the two cupholders are located.
3
AUX, USB and SD Memory Card Ports
The inputs are located inside the compartment at the front end of the central console. To access the inputs, push the lid as indicated: it will open completely.
To close one or both of the half-lids, push them down to the locking position.
135
Understanding the Vehicle
This USB ports allow charging (CHARGE ONLY label) the connected source. Following conditions can create USB inputs damage or malfunction:
· Usage of non-original lightning cables.
· Usage of defective rechargeable
3
devices (smartphone, tablet, mass
storage devices or other generic USB
The AUX auxiliary port features:
In the compartment of the central
devices).
· typical input impedance between AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm;
· max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at 1 kHz;
· input compatible only with 3.5 mm
console there is also a SD memory card input. Once inserted into the slot, to extract it, press lightly on the card. For rear seat passengers, there are two USB ports inside the compartment located on the rear end of the central
· ONLY insert media (eg., USB or SD card), into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
· Usage of damaged or defective cables.
jack connectors (not included). Any player with these characteristics and analogue audio output (headset output type) can be served by the
console, above the air vents. To access the USB ports open the outside cover.
iPod® Connection
An iPod® can be connected to the system via USB and AUX ports by
MTC+ System. The system can
means of a special cable (optional).
recognize the connection to a player
The MTC+ will then control the
outlet autonomously, by enabling
following functions: play, pause, fast
access to the audio functions
forward, rewind, next track, previous
connected to this source.
track, random or repeat mode,
This USB input can be used for
selection and navigation of
data exchange (refer to the MTC+
playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast.
guide for further details).
Two other USB ports for charging of connected source (CHARGE ONLY label) are present inside the glove box compartment of the dashboard.
CAUTION! Do not leave your USB device, iPod® or an external audio source in the vehicle
136
Understanding the Vehicle
for extended periods of time: extreme
Smoking Kit (optional)
temperatures and humidity can occur in the vehicle.
The kit includes a lighter and a removable ashtray with cover.
Sun Visors
The Smoking kit for front seats passengers is located inside the box
Sun visors can be folded to the front
beside the transmission shift lever and
and to the side of the vehicle. To move
can be accessed by pressing the cover
the visor laterally, lower and release it
as indicated.
from its catch as indicated.
3
In this condition, the visor can be
extended by sliding the visor end
By lowering the visor you can access
backward.
the courtesy mirror and, by sliding the
mirror protective cover, the light on
the dome will automatically light up
(with the ignition switch in RUN).
Before raising the visor, close the
mirror cover: the light will turn off.
A business card holder is fitted inside
each sun visor.
The rear seat passengers can use the removable ashtray by inserting it into the rear doors pocket, while the
137
Understanding the Vehicle
lighter can be inserted into the power outlet at the end of the central console. Press the central button to activate the cigarette lighter. After about 20 seconds the button returns automatically to the initial position and stops the heating: from this time the cigarette lighter is ready for use.
3
CAUTION! After use, always make sure that the cigarette lighter is switched off.
WARNING! · The cigarette lighter reaches high
temperatures. Handle it carefully and do not allow children to use it so as to avoid risk of fire and injury! · The cigarette lighter may not be used as a power outlet.
Behind the rear handholds there is a light with relevant on/off switch (refer to chapter "Lights" in this section). Cloth hooks are present on rear handholds and on pillars between doors.
Mesh Pockets
Front seats are fitted with mesh pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, and accessible by rear passengers.
Handholds and Cloth Hooks
Handholds are fitted above the passenger doors. Once grabbed, they will lower until the block position. When released, a return spring will bring them back to the original position.
On the side walls of the trunk compartment there is a shopping hook that can withhold a maximum load of 22 lb (10 kg).
CAUTION! Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the mesh pockets.
138
Understanding the Vehicle
iPad Holder (Genuine Accessories)
Cargo Area
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR),
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
both front and rear.
provide you with all information
WARNING!
The GVWR is the total allowable
about the "Maserati iPad Holder" to
To help protect against personal
weight of your vehicle. This includes
be fixed to the slide rods of the front injury, passengers must not be seated driver, passengers, and cargo.
head restraints, available in the
in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo The total load must be limited so that
"Genuine Accessories" range.
space is intended for load carrying
you do not exceed the GVWR
purposes only, not for passengers,
indicated on the label.
3
who should sit in seats and use seat
belts.
Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle emission control label positioned on the rear driver door's ledge.
WARNING! · Improper weight distribution can
have an adverse effect on the way the vehicle steers, handles and the way the brakes operate.
· Never drive with the liftgate open. Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment.
· Do not arrange any luggage on cargo area cover. In said position luggage could not only impair driver's view but also, in case of collision or unexpected stop, it could cause injury to all occupants.
The information indicated on the label concerns passengers and luggage loading operations.
The trunk is the most suitable place to load bulky and heavy objects onboard the vehicle. The maximum allowable load on the floor of the trunk is 440 lb (200 kg).
139
Understanding the Vehicle
To load your vehicle properly, store
manner. Using a special and approved
heavier items below and be sure you net with hooks available in the
distribute their weight as evenly as
"Genuine Accessories" range, also
possible.
large and heavy objects can be
Stow all loose items securely before
fastened to trunk floor.
start driving as they could move during Eyelets to secure the luggage net are
the trip.
provided on the four corners of trunk
To separate trunk from passenger
floor.
compartment, the vehicle is equipped For retaining luggage placed in
3
with a rigid horizontal panel, fitted
compartments on the trunk side walls
behind the rear seat backrest. When
there are special elastic bands.
vehicle is at a standstill, cargo area
cover can withstand a maximum static
load of 260 lb (120 kg).
Apart from cargo area cover, the
vehicle can be also equipped with a
vertical rolling Cargo Net, to be used
to separate the cargo area from the
passenger area.
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
provide you with any information
about the items dedicated to the usage of the trunk (luggage compartment mat, net, foldable box,...), available in the "Genuine Accessories" range.
Luggage Fasteners and
Longitudinal rails on trunk floor provide safe anchorage for luggage of different size, thanks to the special hooks with locking button. To position the hook, slide it along the rails until reaching the required position,
By using the Railing Fastening Bar, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range, fastened by means of sliding blocks along the floor rails, you can fasten heavy luggage in the innermost area of the trunk.
Retainers
holding down the central button.
Vehicle can be equipped with fixed and mobile anchorages on trunk floor allowing to fasten and retain any
Release the button and slightly move the hook to secure its position in the notches of the guide.
luggage in a convenient and safe
140
Understanding the Vehicle
the load floor able to accommodate
improperly latched seat could cause
bulky luggage, large-sized equipment
serious injury.
and objects that may not fit with the normal dimensions of the trunk.
· Always check that the head restraint of the rear seats that must be
NOTE:
Both seat backs can be folded down independently.
occupied by a passenger is correctly adjusted (see chapter "Head Restraints" in this section).
· The cargo area in the rear of the
vehicle with the rear seatbacks in
3
the folded down position should not
WARNING!
be used as a play area by children
CAUTION!
To avoid luggage inadvertent movement, in case of sudden braking or collision, always check correct fastening of the retainers onto floor rails before anchoring any luggage.
To prevent the other luggage in the trunk from getting into the passenger compartment and create a potential danger for the passengers, keep trunk cover installed when folding down one of the two seatbacks.
When the seatbacks are unfolded to
when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and use proper restraint systems.
Ski and Snowboard Bag Compartment
NOTE:
the upright position, make sure they To stow and safely fasten a ski and
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
are latched in one of the fixed
snowboard bag, with no need to fold
provide you with information about the available "Genuine Accessories"
positions (see "Rear Seats" in this section).
down the seatback, use the opening available at the back of the longer
for the trunk compartment.
seatback (60), at the level of the armrest between the rear seats.
Loading with Rear Seatbacks Folded Down
The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatback folded down provides a continuous nearly-flat extension of
WARNING!
· Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or rear passengers. An
To reach this compartment and properly arrange the bag, proceed as follows.
· From inside the passenger compartment, lower the armrest between the rear seats.
141
Understanding the Vehicle
· From the trunk compartment, open If you follow these instructions, the
the flap at the back of the long
bag will be securely fastened to vehicle
seatback.
structure and will thus remain in place
also in case of collision or unexpected
braking.
The Maserati approved Ski and
Snowboard Bag available in the
"Genuine Accessories" range, can be
fastened also by folding down the
3
seatback.
Accessories Compartment
Trunk Compartment Cover
· Insert the bag end without anchor hook into seatback opening.
· Fasten the hook to one of the eyelets available on trunk floor.
· From the passenger compartment, route bag strap under armrest and fasten it.
In order to hold any accessories to be kept on the vehicle, the car is equipped with a storage box with carrying handles, at the rear end of the trunk compartment. To reach this box, lift or remove the trunk floor panel.
NOTE:
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the available "Genuine Accessories" for the trunk compartment.
Trunk compartment cover is made of two parts, the most outward one lifts when liftgate is opened. The cover can be removed to obtain a larger cargo area, as follows:
· slide the top end of side linkages out of the shafts on rear pillars;
· lift the cover rear end and slide it towards the liftgate: this will result in sliding the four lower ends of the
142
Understanding the Vehicle
cover inner part out of their guides
on trunk panel;
WARNING!
After refitting the trunk cover, make
sure that the lower ends of the inner
part have properly engaged in their
guides. If cover is not properly
positioned and fastened, in case of
unexpected stop or collision it could
move and seriously injure the
3
passengers in the rear seats.
· Release the lever when seatback is
· remove trunk cover from the vehicle. The two parts of trunk cover can be folded one onto the other for a more compact unit.
Cargo Area Extension
The following procedure is aimed at obtaining the maximum possible extension of the cargo area, and it can be only a partial extension if you carry
against the seat: the control cable will click into place and lock.
· In this position, push down on the seatback of the long part (60): the control cable will click into place and lock.
out only a few of the listed
WARNING! Driving with no trunk cover could be dangerous. Any unfastened luggage or objects could move into the
operations.
· Remove the trunk cover as indicated under "Trunk Compartment Cover" in this chapter.
passenger compartment in case of
· Completely lower the headrests of
sudden stop or collision and seriously
rear seats.
injure the occupants. You can try to prevent this by using the Cargo Net in the trunk compartment.
· Completely fold down the rear seats backrests by lifting the lever to position 1 and hold it up.
When refitting the trunk cover, perform the same operations in reverse order.
Now that seatbacks are folded down, trunk floor and the back panels of seatbacks will form a larger flat floor.
143
Understanding the Vehicle
installed in a more forward position
CAUTION!
behind the front seats (position B).
Seatback rear panel is not suitable to
support heavy loads and metal objects
with protruding elements that might
scratch its surface. If necessary, protect
the seatback rear panel surface using
rigid panels.
3
Installing the Cargo Net for
Cargo Area
objects that might move to trunk floor, using the devices provided by Maserati for this purpose.
· When using the Cargo Net, do not load any heavy object on top of the other objects which are laid on the trunk floor (see example in the figures).
The Cargo Net can be installed to two positions depending on the current extension of the cargo area. When only the trunk cover is removed (see previous paragraph), while backrests are still vertical, the Cargo Net must be installed immediately behind them (position A).
WARNING! · Before install the Cargo Net in the
more forward position make sure that the backrests are locked in the lowest position.
· The Cargo Net must be properly installed following the instructions in this paragraph.
While, in case also backrests were folded down, the Cargo Net must be
· The Cargo Net will not properly hold objects in case of sudden vehicle braking or collision depending on cargo weight. Heavy loads not sufficiently fastened could exceed net capacity and hit the vehicle occupants, with the ensuing risk of injury.
· Before leaving for a trip, fasten all
144
Understanding the Vehicle
The Cargo Net is housed in the
and release tether from retainer
accessories compartment under the
position , lift the tether free end as
trunk floor.
indicated in the figure.
The Cargo Net is supplied folded, inside a bag that is part of the net
itself.
To install it, open the bag zip, unfold
the two parts until hearing the
jointing elements clicking in place.
To close it, press the button indicated
3
in the figure, at the two jointing elements.
· Insert the net top ends in the slot on roof brackets (position )
· Pull net down to ensure it is properly
engaged (position ).
· Freeing the net lower part from the
Cargo Net structure.
To install the Cargo Net in position A, proceed as follows.
· Turn downwards the upper part of the protection cover on roof brackets.
· Fully unfold Cargo Net down and engage the ends of side tethers, with hook, in the fixed or mobile retainers available on trunk floor.
· Pull down the free ends of the tethers to tension the Cargo Net: once released, the tether will remain in taut position . To disengage
· Attach the lower side ends of the Cargo Net to the tethers, using the Velcro appendices indicated in the figure.
145
Understanding the Vehicle
from the fastening tethers, rewind it on itself and fasten it to the Cargo Net structure. Remove the Cargo Net from its fastening points, fold it and close the bag zip. Store bag under trunk floor, then restore vehicle original conditions by repositioning all moved or removed parts.
3
Should it be necessary to position the Cargo Net in position B - more forward, i.e., behind the front seats use the top retainers next to external rear passenger handholds.
· Fasten the lower tethers of Cargo Net to external retainers, also used to fasten the top safety belt for children seat, available on rear seat backrests (see chapter "Child Restraint Systems" in section "Before Starting").
· Attach the Velcro appendices indicated in the figure, as described for the rear retainers.
· Lower the handhold and engage the net top ends in the slot on roof, as already described for the rear retainers.
When Cargo Net is no longer necessary, release the net lower part
146
Understanding the Vehicle
Front to Back Roof Rails (optional)
Securely fasten load to rails using the suitable retainers that can hold the original anchorage points throughout
Indeed, a bulky and/or heavy load carried on the roof will affect driving behavior and steering
The front to back roof rails that can be the trip.
response since it shifts the vehicle
installed to this vehicle have been
When installing to rails any bicycle,
center of gravity to a higher
designed to carry luggage or
surfboard or other types of carriers
position compared to normal
equipment suitable for transport
requiring cross bars, please comply
conditions.
outside of the vehicle.
with the equipment manufacturer's
· All objects/equipment carried on the
instructions to ensure proper installation.
roof and protruding beyond the windshield, e.g. surfboard, must be
3
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
fastened to both sides of the
provide you with any information
vehicle. Any wind blow might
about the Maserati approved Carrying
suddenly increase load lift possibly
Items, available in the "Genuine
resulting in breakage and loss of
Accessories" range.
part of the carried equipment.
Weight of luggage/equipment carried on the rails must not exceed 176 lb (80 kg) and must be evenly distributed. This weight must be added to the load carried inside of the vehicle as well as the passengers' weight, and total must not exceed the maximum allowed weight (see "Features and Specifications" in section "Features and Specifications"). When arranging load on rails, make sure that it will not interfere with power liftgate and sunroof opening (if equipped).
WARNING! · During the trip, it is recommended
to periodically check the proper fastening of luggage or equipment carried on the roof rails. This is to avoid that any parts that may have accidentally unfastened could damage vehicle bodywork and fall out, thereby becoming a danger for all vehicles behind yours.
· When driving with a bulky load on roof rails, take additional precautions and drive at lower speed, keeping a wider safety distance from vehicles ahead.
147
Understanding the Vehicle
Power Sunroof with Sunshade (optional)
· Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never insert fingers, other body parts, or any
The sunroof and the sunshade are
object through the roof opening.
power-controlled and can only be
operated with the ignition switch in
RUN position.
CAUTION!
The sunroof is made of two glass
3
panels: the front one can be moved whereas the rear one is fixed. The
right switch controls the sunroof
movement, whereas the left one
· In the event of rain, always close the sunroof to prevent water infiltrations from staining the fabric/leather upholstery.
controls the sunshade.
WARNING!
· Do not open the sunroof if there is
Lifting of the sunroof front panel for · Improper use of the sunroof can be
ice on it: risk of damage.
venting is controlled by the button,
dangerous, even if it features a
· Do not open the sunroof in case of
behind the two switches. By opening the sunroof a front flap rises automatically in order to deviate
finger-trap prevention system. Before and during the sunroof operation, always make sure that
presence of any object (bicycle, surfboard or other type of carriers fixed to cross bars) that might
the air flow.
passengers are not exposed to the
interfere with sunroof.
risk of injuries caused by the moving
sunroof or by personal objects
Slide Opening Sunroof
dragged or hit by the moving sunroof.
· Never leave children in a vehicle with the key fob RKE transmitter in the passenger compartment.
Press backward and release the right switch: the front panel will open completely. From the completely open position, press onward and release the right
· In a collision, there is a greater risk switch: the front panel will close
of being thrown from the vehicle if completely.
the sunroof is open. Always fasten The automatic movement can be
your seat belt properly and make
interrupted in any position by pressing
sure all passengers are properly
backward and onward the right switch
secured too.
again.
148
Understanding the Vehicle
Venting Sunroof
obstruction of the sunroof front
· push the ignition switch to RUN
Press and release the rear button; the sunroof front panel will open to the vent position. Where this function is available, this type of opening can be activated regardless of the sunroof position. During this opening operation, any movement of the button will stop the sunroof.
panel. If an obstruction is detected by the safety system during the closing movement, the sunroof front panel will automatically retract. If this occurs, remove the obstruction then press onwards and release the right switch to reactivate the sunroof automatic closure.
position;
· press the right switch onwards and keep it pressed for at least 10 seconds after which you should hear the sunroof electric motor mechanic stop;
· within 5 seconds, press the right switch onwards again and keep it
3
By pressing the rear button when the NOTE:
pressed: the sunroof performs an
sunroof is completely closed, the latter · If three consecutive attempts to
automatic complete opening and
will open to the venting position.
close the sunroof result in pinch
closing cycle. Should this not
Sunshade
protect reversals, the fourth attempt will be manual, with pinch protect
happen, repeat the procedure from the beginning;
Press backward and release the left
feature disabled.
· press the right switch onwards and
switch: the sunshade will move to the vehicle rear side until completely open.
· Pinch protection is disabled while pressing the switch/es.
keep it pressed until the sunroof is completely closed: the initialization procedure is then completed.
From this position, press onward and release the left switch to move the sunshade to the vehicle front side until completely closed. During the opening and closing
Initialization Procedure
In case of a fault in the automatic opening/closing movements or in case of battery removal, it is necessary to
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle
operations, work on backward and onward the left switch to interrupt
initialize the automatic operation of the sunroof.
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in
the sunshade movement in any
Proceed as follows:
certain open or partially open
position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the roof opening during the automatic closure or a constant
· bring the sunroof in the completely closed position;
· push the ignition switch to OFF position and keep this condition for 10 seconds;
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
149
Understanding the Vehicle
open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Ignition Off Operation
HomeLink® (optional)
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters operating the
WARNING! · Your motorized door or gate will
The power sunroof controls will
automatic devices that open garage
open and close while you are
remain active for up to approximately doors and gates, enable/disable the
programming the universal
ten minutes after the ignition switch is lighting or security systems. The
transceiver. Do not program the
in OFF position. Opening either front HomeLink® unit is powered by your
transceiver if people, pets or other
door will cancel this feature. The
vehicle's 12 Volt battery. The
objects are in the path of the door or
3
ignition system timing can be set using HomeLink® buttons that are located in gate. Only use this transceiver with a
the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ Settings" the overhead console designate the
garage door opener that has a "stop
in section "Dashboard Instruments and three different HomeLink® channels.
and reverse" feature as required by
Controls").
The HomeLink® indicator light is
Federal safety standards. This
Sunroof Maintenance
located in front of the buttons.
includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see "Vehicle security alarm" in section "Before Starting").
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Before You Start Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
150
Understanding the Vehicle
For more efficient programming and
· Simultaneously press the Homelink®
accurate transmission of the
button you want to program and
radio-frequency signal it is
the hand-held transmitter button.
recommended that a new battery be
· Release immediately the Homelink®
placed in the hand-held transmitter of
button you want to program.
the device that is being programmed
· Continue holding the hand-held
to the HomeLink® system.
transmitter button until the
Before starting programming it is
indicator light starts flashing quickly;
necessary to erase the standard codes memorized on the HomeLink® device
then release the button.
3
The quick flashing light indicates that
during the production phase. To erase System with Devices Provided the channel with the new frequency
such codes:
with Rolling Codes
has been acquired and programmed
· place the ignition device in the RUN position without starting the engine;
· press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the indicator light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds);
· release the buttons.
Programming the Hand-held Transmitters Manufactured after 1995
These devices can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" setting button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door/gate opener. It is NOT the button that is
correctly by the HomeLink® system.
NOTE:
The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try
NOTE:
normally used to open and close the
several times. Upon every attempt,
· Erasing the standard codes should
door.
keep the setting position for at least
only be performed when
The name and color of the button may 15 seconds before trying again.
programming HomeLink® for the
vary by manufacturer.
first time. Do not perform this
· Place the ignition device to the RUN Synchronizing the Rolling Codes
operation to program additional
position without starting the engine. At the end of the previously-described
buttons.
· If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
· Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (5 - 30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
programming, if the HomeLink® has been programmed for a rolling code system, it will be necessary to synchronize it to ensure its correct operation.
information or assistance.
151
Understanding the Vehicle
· Locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® has been acquired and programmed
setting button of the opening motor. Button
correctly by the HomeLink® system.
Firmly press it and then release it. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
NOTE: The distance necessary between the
when the garage door opener/device · Place the ignition device to the RUN portable hand-held transmitter and
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
position without starting the engine. the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends
· Press and hold the desired
on the system you wish to program.
NOTE:
HomeLink® button.
Probably it will be necessary to try
3
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
· Without releasing the button
several times. Upon every attempt,
next step after the setting button has
proceed with "Programming the
keep the setting position for at least
been pressed.
hand-held transmitters" from second 15 seconds before trying again.
· Return to the vehicle and press the
step and follow all remaining steps. · Press and hold the programmed
programmed HomeLink® button for System with Devices Without
HomeLink® button.
two seconds and then release it.
Rolling Code
If the garage door opener/device
· Repeat this operation a second time. If the garage door opening device activates, the programming/ synchronization phase is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opening device does not activate, press the button a third time for two seconds and then release it to complete the
Programming the Hand-held Transmitters Manufactured before 1995
· Turn the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine.
· Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (5 to 30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
activates, programming is complete. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for the same remaining button. Do not erase the channels.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
programming/synchronization phase.
· To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat the same step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
· Simultaneously press and hold both buttons until the indicator light starts flashing quickly; then release both buttons.
The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency
· Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine.
· Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
· Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming the
152
hand-held transmitters" from second step and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advisable to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the indicator light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds). The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see "Vehicle security alarm" in section "Before Starting").
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble while programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:
· Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
· Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and forgot to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Radio Frequency Device Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the "Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
Understanding the Vehicle 3
153
Understanding the Vehicle
Air Conditioning Distribution 3
A/C Dual-zone 154
Understanding the Vehicle 3
A/C Four-zone 155
Understanding the Vehicle
Adjustable and fixed air vents allow passengers to achieve the optimal comfort conditions.
Fixed Air Vents
· on each side of the rear end of the central console, for the vehicles equipped with the four-zone A/C system.
· The fixed vents, positioned on the
upper part of the dashboard,
beneath the windshield and on the
3
windshield side pillars are meant to guarantee the defogging and
defrosting of the windshield and the · The fixed vents under the dashboard
side windows.
are aimed at ventilating the lower
part of the front passenger
compartment.
A/C Dual-zone
· The ventilation of the lower part of the rear passengers compartment is made by means of fixed vents positioned as follows:
· under the front seats, for the dual-zone A/C system;
A/C Four-zone
Adjustable Air Vents
The adjustable vents are located at the center of the dashboard, on both sides of the MTC+ display and on the upper
156
surface, and at the side ends of the dashboard. They have the purpose of ventilating the upper part of the passenger compartment. There are also adjustable vents placed at the rear end of the central console. The rotor 1, located near each vent, allows to control the quantity of the air flow from fully closed to fully open, and vice versa. Excluding the adjustable vents on the upper surface of the dashboard, the grill of these vents can be oriented by operating on the central handle 2.
Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: In order not to obstruct the air conditioning inlet, the defrosting or the defogging function of the glass surfaces, avoid covering vents with clothing or other items.
3
157
Understanding the Vehicle
158
4 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 MTC+ "Controls" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 MTC+ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Dashboard Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
159
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
ensure that the odometer is properly reset.
Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions" in this chapter).
The instrument cluster is divided into three main areas displaying information, signs and text and/or icon messages.
Speedometer and Rev Counter display the main warning lights (see "Warning and Indicator Lights on Analogue Instruments" in this chapter).
NOTE:
The image shows the instrument cluster before starting the engine.
A Analogue speedometer. It indicates the vehicle speed.
B Rev Counter.
The other warning and indicator lights are displayed on the TFT display together with mode and drive function indicators (see "TFT Display:
C TFT display. In this area the
odometer display shows the
total distance covered by the
4
vehicle.
U.S. Federal Regulations requires that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. This repair should be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The odometer setting should be maintained following the repair or service. Keep a record of the odometer mileage before any repair or service to
V8 Engine (in example GTS version)
V6 Engine 160
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Warning and Indicator Lights
and switch off soon after the engine is · Prolonged driving with the MIL on
on Analog Instruments
started (the MIL does not shut off
could cause damage to the engine
Telltales on Speedometer
immediately). This is a sign of the indicator light
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the
The following telltales are displayed
working properly. If the indicator
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
on the speedometer, and related
remains illuminated or switches on
converter damage and power loss
messages are visible for 5 seconds on while driving, there is a failure in the
will soon occur. Immediate service is
the central sector of the display, unless fuel supply/ignition and emission
required. In addition, the OBDII
otherwise indicated (see "TFT Display: control systems.
system incorporates a diagnostic
Warning/Indicator Lights of Set
The failure could cause high exhaust
connector that can be interfaced
Modes/Functions" paragraph in this
emissions, loss of performance, poor
using diagnostic equipment. This
chapter).
vehicle handling and high
makes it possible to read the error
consumption levels. Should this occur, proceed with
codes stored in the control unit, together with a set of specific
4
caution to your Authorized Maserati
parameters for the engine operation
Dealer without heavy throttle
diagnostic cycle, for compliance with
application or driving at high speeds.
CARB & EPA OBDII regulations.
Obey all applicable local traffic
regulations.
Left Turn Signal Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The indicator light will go out if the problem is no longer present. The error will be registered by the system in any case.
The indicator lights up when the left turn signals or the hazard flashers are turned on. The indicator light will flash at the same frequency of the turn signals
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system
CAUTION! · When the ignition switch is in the
and is controlled by the multifunction lever behind the steering wheel. If the vehicle electronics sense that the
that monitors engine and automatic transmission control
RUN position and if the indicator light does not switch on or if it
vehicle drives for more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
systems. Under normal conditions, this
switches on while driving, contact an continuous sound will alert the driver Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon to turn the signal off.
indicator light should switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position
as possible.
161
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate, Please refer to "Tire Pressure
It should switch off by starting the
check for a defective exterior light
Monitoring System (TPMS)" in section engine.
bulb.
"Driving" for further information.
If the light stays on with the engine
Tire Pressure Monitoring Light
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
running, there is a malfunction in the
This warning light is connected Malfunction Warning Light
ESC system. If the light still stays on after several
to the Tire Pressure
This light, and its related
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
Monitoring System (TPMS).
message, indicate possible
been driven for several miles at more
Under normal conditions, the warning light should illuminate when
malfunctions of the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
than 30 mph (48 km/h) speed, visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
the ignition switch is in RUN and should go off once the engine is
The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in RUN position and
possible to have the problem diagnosed and serviced.
started.
may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS
4
If the warning light remains lit or
light remains lit or turns on while
NOTE:
illuminates while driving, the pressure of one or more tires is too low and a message will be displayed. The TPMS malfunction warning light is connected to the low tire pressure monitoring light. When the system detects a malfunction, the monitoring light and the related message will flash for approximately one minute and then remain lit. This sequence will continue upon
driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and requires service. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the
warning light is switched off. If the ABS light turns on while driving, or if it does not switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position, please visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible to restore the Anti-Lock brake function.
Each time the ignition switch is in RUN:
· The ESC OFF indicator light and the ESC activation/malfunction indicator light illuminates temporarily.
· When the ESC is functioning, the system will make buzzing or clicking sounds. This is normal. The sounds will stop once ESC becomes inactive and the road conditions that caused the ESC activation no longer persist.
subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction lasts. When the malfunction warning lights up, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure correctly.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The ESC activation/malfunction indicator light on the instrument cluster will display when the ignition switch is in RUN position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This indicator notifies that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is disabled (OFF); the linked message will be displayed.
162
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Telltales on Tachometer
See chapter "Automatic Start&Stop
malfunction or a problem with the
Following telltales are displayed on the tachometer and related messages are visible for 5 seconds on the central sector of the display, unless otherwise indicated (see "TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions" in this chapter).
System" in section "Driving" for further information.
Rear Fog Light Indicator This indicator lights up when the rear fog lights are switched on.
High Beam Indicator
brake booster detected by the ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light will remain lit until the problem has been solved. If the problem concerns the brake booster, the ABS master cylinder will run when engaging the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt
This indicator lights up when during each stop of the vehicle.
the high beams are switched
Inefficiency of one of the dual brake
on or when blinking.
system cycles is indicated by the brake
Brake Indicator Light
indicator light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the
4
This light monitors various
master cylinder has dropped below a
brake functions, including
certain level.
brake fluid level, brake pads
The light will remain lit until the
wear and parking brake
problem has been solved.
engagement.
If a brake failure occurs, visit an
Start&Stop Active Indicator
If the brake light illuminates the
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
This telltale indicates that the engine has been switched off automatically by the Start&Stop system. When the engine starts again, the telltale will switch off. If the telltale during an automatic engine shutdown (AutoStop) phase starts flashing, it will be necessary to restart the engine normally with the ignition device while holding down the brake pedal.
parking brake may be engaged, the brake pads have reached wear limit, the brake fluid level may be low or a problem with the anti-lock brake system (ABS) reservoir may have occurred. In all the above situations, a related message will be displayed. If the light still illuminates when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, there could be a brake hydraulic system
possible in order to check up the brake system. In the event of an Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both the brake indicator light and the ABS light illuminate. Immediate repair of the ABS system is required. Functioning of the brake indicator light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from OFF to RUN position.
163
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The light should illuminate for
stays lit, or switches on while driving, Right Turn Signal Indicator
approximately 2 seconds.
have the system checked at an
This indicator lights up when
The light should switch off unless the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
the right turn signals or the
parking brake is engaged or a brake
possible.
hazard flashers are switched
fault is detected. If the light does not In the latter case, the message will
on.
illuminate, have the light system
remain displayed: to hide it, press the The indicator will flash at the same
repaired by an Authorized Maserati
button on the steering wheel right frequency of the turn signals and is
Dealer.
side.
controlled by the turn signal lever.
The light will also switch on when the
If the vehicle electronics sense that the
parking brake is engaged with the
vehicle drives for more than 1 mile (1.6
ignition switch in RUN position.
km) with either turn signal on, a
This light only indicates the brake is
continuous sound will advise the driver
4
engaged but not the clamping force of the parking brake to the wheels.
to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a fast rate,
check for a defective outside indicator
light bulb.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on can be very dangerous and is not recommended. Part of the brake system may have failed, resulting in increased braking distances and the risk of an accident. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
See "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air bags" in section "Before Starting" for further information.
WARNING! If the warning light remains ON or if it
Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is in RUN, the seat belt reminder light will light up for a few seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, you will hear an acoustic signal if one or both front seat belts are unbuckled. After the bulb check or while driving,
Air Bag Indicator Light
This light will illuminate for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is in RUN. If the light does not
does not illuminate or illuminates while driving, contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
if a seat belt is unbuckled, together with the acoustic signal the seat belt reminder light will light up and a message will indicate which belt is not fastened.
illuminate while starting the engine,
164
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
5 Position within the submenus
WARNING!
Maserati urges you to use the seat belts correctly fastened and adjusted at all times. Correct use of the seat belts can help reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. Do not pass seat belts over
and scroll arrows (example: 1 of 5). There can be maximum 9 displayable submenu positions. When the number of submenu points exceeds 9, the points are replaced by a numerical value within the scroll arrows.
sharp edges: they could tear. Do not
6 Menu Instruction (hideable).
pin anything to the seat belts. This
7 Shift lever positions (P, R, N, D,
could reduce their initial strength and 1 Main area.
M, 1, 2, 3...).
cause them to tear in the event of a crash.
2 Selectable information (data, time, outside temperature,
8 Gear shift indicator light and paddles (if equipped).
4
Refer to "Occupants Restraint Systems" in section "Before Starting" for further information.
compass, etc.). When setting the "Auto High Beam Assist" feature (if equipped), in the right portion of this area is displayed
9 Hard/Soft suspension indicator light.
10 Complete Odometer.
TFT Display: Menus and
the respective green indicator.
11 Fuel Gauge.
Settings
3 Main menu titles with scroll
12 Engine Temperature Gauge.
When operating, the TFT Display is divided into sectors including menus and sub-menus, running data, warning/indicator lights and messages. The different sectors of the display layout are rendered in the following
arrows (the number and the main menu title is always visible while scrolling the menu, and for the next five seconds).
4 Submenu Titles.
13* Reconfigurable quadrant for red telltales.
14* Reconfigurable quadrant for amber telltales.
15 Front fog indicator light.
picture.
16 Low beam headlights/position
lights.
17 OFF ROAD, I.C.E., NORMAL, SPORT, and CORSA (TROFEO version only) modes indicator light.
165
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
18* Combined telltale of ACC, LKA and HAS status. They are displayed in the cluster when one (or more) of these systems is enabled and a different menu from "Drive Assist" is displayed in the main area.
19* CC, ACC, HDC status function.
20 Ride height indicator.
21 Electric Parking Brake failure
warning light.
4
22 Speed Warning indicator
(dynamic text).
23* Traffic Sign Assist icons: conditioned and unconditioned speed limit and/or supplementary signs (time restriction, etc..). See "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in section "Driving" for further details.
(*) See "TFT Display: Warning/ Indicator Lights of Set Modes/ Functions" in this chapter.
The display background may change according to the type of message displayed.
166
· Blue color: normal conditions. · Yellow color: low-critical warning. · Red color: high-critical warning.
Main and Submenu
Operate the controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll, modify and program the Main and Submenu.
The screen area in sector 1 (Main Area) will be updated and the selected title will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu Title). Press and release the multifunction switch ( ) to enter the information screens or a submenu. Keep the switch ( ) depressed for 2 seconds to restore the selected/visualized functions. The selected sub-menu title selected will be displayed in sector 4 (Submenu Title).
Press and release the multifunction switch in the and arrow directions to scroll upwards and downwards the main menu titles.
When the driver selects a main menu page and the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) feature on "Controls" page of MTC+ is set off (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section), main menu title, its number and the scroll arrows will disappear after two seconds. When driver selects a main menu, if the TSA feature is set on and a sign and/or a speed limit icon is displayed in
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
sector 23, only the main menu number 3. DRIVE MODE
· Speed Warning: enables, disables or
and the scroll arrows remain displayed · Drive Mode - Ride Height - Torque
sets the speed limit represented in
in the sector 3, left side.
Distribution - Powertrain status - ESC the dynamic icon on the TFT display
status - Suspension stiffness status
· Auto apply Off/On of the Electric
4. Driver Assist (if equipped)
Parking Brake
· Shows the status of any active driver · Interior Lighting
assist systems: CC, ACC, LKA and
Backlighting
HAS. Graphics in the main area of TFT display only refer to ACC, LKA and HAS systems
· LKA (LaneSense) status
Ambient Lighting
· SCREEN SETUP Upper Left Upper Right
5. FUEL ECONOMY · Average, Range, Current gage
Main Menu: Line 1 Main Menu: Line 2
4
Within a submenu, press and release the switch in the and arrow directions to scroll the menu. Press the button to return to the main menu from an item of interest or from an information screen.
6. TRIP · Trip A: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed
time, Distance
· Trip B: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed time, Distance
Main Menu: Line 3 MPH km/h Display On/Off Main Menu Navigation Outline Coloring Key-On Display Key-Off Display
Main Menu & Submenu Content
7. START&STOP
Defaults
Overview
1. MAIN MENU · View speed in mph or km/h
· Messages relating to the Start&Stop function
8. AUDIO
Messages on Main Display Area
The main display area also displays "pop up" messages. These pop up
2. VEHICLE INFO
· Information concerning audio status messages fall into several categories:
· Tire Pressure · Transmission Temperature · Oil Temperature · Oil Pressure
according to current media source, track and station. · Information on phone incoming call.
9. STORED MESSAGES
· Five-Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five
· Battery Voltage
10. VEHICLE SETTINGS
seconds and then returns to the
· Maintenance
previous screen. Most of the
messages of this type are then
167
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
stored (as long as the condition that activated them remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Stored Messages" main menu item. Example of this message type is the one shown in the picture.
· Unstored Messages with Ignition Switch in RUN
This message type is displayed until the ignition switch is in RUN position. An example of this message type is the one shown in picture.
On highway, the first pop up will be displayed at 2 miles (3.2 km) from the turn, on roadway, at 1 mile (1.6 km). While approaching the turn, further pop ups will be displayed starting at 437 yd (400 m) from the turning point and the countdown to 0 miles/meters.
4
· Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed until the condition that activated the message is cleared (see example in picture).
· Five-Second Unstored Messages
When appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds then returns to the previous screen.
· Navigation Messages
When the navigation menu is enabled on the MTC+, information pop-ups will be displayed while changing direction or approaching a turning point until the navigation system requires its displaying, or until a command is given via the buttons on the steering wheel.
While getting closer to a turn, the sections referred to the distance already traveled will switch off while the ones referred to the distance yet to be traveled will remain on.
NOTE:
· Popup boxes might take up the space normally used to display main menu items and relevant submenus.
168
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
· The distance indicated under the
2. VEHICLE INFO
· Oil Temperature
road name is expressed in the unit of Press and release the switch in the
measure set by the user.
or arrow directions until this
Displays the current engine oil temperature level.
1. MAIN MENU
Press and release the multifunction switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Pressing and releasing the switch ( ) will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the submenus. Press and release the switch in the
or arrow directions to scroll through the following information displays pressing and releasing the switch ( ) to display the selected
information.
· Tire Pressure
4
Indicates the pressure of each single
The gauge fill and telltale (if
tire (see example below). Please refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring
applicable) are highlighted in red to emphasize that the parameter is at
System (TPMS)" in section "Driving"
a critical level.
for further information.
Further to speed, the main area can indicate three lines that can be set to the same options and in the top right or top left area. When these three lines are present and turn-by-turn navigation is on, main menu area will automatically show navigation information. For further details, please refer to MTC+ guide.
· Transmission Temperature
Displays the current transmission temperature level.
169
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
graphically shows the Drive Mode: OFF
This strategy is also applicable in the Transmission Temperature and Oil Pressure information screen.
ROAD, I.C.E., NORMAL, SPORT, CORSA (TROFEO version only) and
(Suspension) set by the user through the relevant controls.
· Oil Pressure
The display main area will show
Displays the current engine oil
vehicle image with parameters and
pressure level.
color-coded components affected by
· Battery Voltage
the selected drive mode. The image will show the following
Displays the current battery voltage. parameters:
· Maintenance (service)
· current ground clearance indicated
For every drive mode, function (ESC, PowerTrain and Suspension) and color
4
Displays mileage and days remaining in front of vehicle and on a specific of the components shown are matched
to the execution of scheduled
indicator on top right corner;
as follows:
maintenance service.
· torque distribution percentage
indicated under the arrow in front of
the wheels;
· selected drive mode (in the example shown: I.C.E.).
For any color-coded components, color
depends on settings of:
· ESC: identified by wheel color.
Press and release the button to return to the main menu.
3. DRIVE MODE
Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this
menu item is displayed. The screen
· PowerTrain: identified by engine + transmission unit color.
· Suspension : identified by the color of the four shock absorbers.
NOTE:
To set drive parameters according to own needs and path, refer to chapter "Drive Mode" and "Off-road Drive" in section "Driving".
Press and release the button to return to the main menu.
170
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
4. DRIVER ASSIST (if equipped)
· Range in miles or km
Press and release the switch in the
Shows the range since the last fuel
or arrow directions until this
average reset.
menu item is displayed.
When the fuel economy is reset, the
· Active Driver Assist System
The screen graphically shows current status of driver assist systems: the figure shows an example with ACC engaged and HAS set.
NOTE:
display will read "Reset" or show dashes for two seconds.
Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
· Fuel Economy Average in MPG (US),
To set these systems, see chapters "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC", "Highway Assist - HAS" and "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" in section "Driving".
MPG (UK) or L/100km
Shows the average fuel economy
4
since the last reset.
Press the multifunction switch ( )
for 1 second and release it to reset
Press and release the button to
the fuel economy average.
return to the main menu.
When the fuel economy is reset, the
· LKA (LaneSense) Status
Vehicle is delivered with LKA in off state set on MTC+ system, page "Controls".
You can enable LKA in the "Visual" only or "Visual & Haptic" mode by turning on the function via MTC+ system soft-key and by changing your selection in the dedicated submenu. The setting chosen will latch over key cycles.
5. FUEL ECONOMY
Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this
menu item is displayed. The screen will display the following:
· Current Fuel Economy in MPG (US), MPG (UK) or L/100km
Shows the current fuel economy. During AutoStop stage performed by the Start&Stop system (see "Normal Starting of the Engine" in section "Driving"), a dash will be displayed instead of the value.
display will read "Reset" or show dashes for two seconds.
Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
171
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
· "Distance" traveled in miles or km.
Shows the total covered distance since the last reset.
· "Average" consumption in MPG (US), MPG (UK) or L/100km.
Shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset.
function, please see chapter "Automatic Start&Stop System" of section "Driving".
· "Average" speed in MPH or km/h.
Shows the average speed since the
Press and release the button to
last reset.
return to the main menu.
· "Elapsed Time"
4
6. TRIP
Shows the total time of travel since
Press and release the switch in the
the last reset in "hours:minutes: seconds." Elapsed Time will
8. AUDIO
or arrow directions until this
increment when the ignition switch Press and release the switch in the
menu item is displayed.
is in the RUN or START position.
or arrow directions until this
For each of the "Trip A" and "Trip B" Press the multifunction switch ( ) for menu item is displayed.
sub-menus the screen will display the 1 second and release to reset "Trip A"
following:
or "Trip B".
"Trip B" is reset after each key on/key
off cycle.
Press and release the button to
return to the main menu.
7. START & STOP
Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this
menu item is displayed. With the ignition device in RUN position, the screen will display the status of the function (see example in picture). To change the status of the
The display will show the audio status (source and current audio track) as set on the MTC+. It is possible to display 5
172
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
lines of 15 alphanumeric characters. Displays Audio Statuses are:
display above the info lines. The chart indicates their meaning.
· AM: Station Number, provided with one line of info (frequency);
BTSA
· FM: Frequency, provided with 2 info
lines;
AM
App
· SXM (SiriusXM Satellite radio):
number and station name, artist,
song;
· BTSA Bluetooth: folder, album,
FM
artist, song;
Audio mute
· USB (Audio): USB, album, artist, current track or, if available, previous track, current track and next track;
· USB: folder, previous track, current track and next track;
· SD Card (Audio): album, artist, previous track, current track and next track;
· SD Card: folder, previous track, current track and next track;
AUX SD SXM Satellite Radio
· Phone Call Details
4
The display will show the
information on incoming call if this
feature is checkmarked on MTC+
(see "MTC+ Settings" in this
section). On display, said details
shall temporarily replace the ones
on media source in use.
Press and release the button to
return to the main menu.
· AUX: name of source, "Device Connected" text;
· No Signal: "No Signal Available" text;
· Mute: symbol "Mute", the lines remain those displayed before the command "Mute".
The different reception modes are identified by symbols, shown on the
USB
· Many signals · Signal not available
9. STORED MESSAGES
Press and release the central switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The system will either display the number of the stored messages (if any available) or "No Stored Messages" as shown in picture.
173
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
10. VEHICLE SETTINGS
· Maximum set speed: 175 mph
With ignition switch in RUN position and vehicle stopped, press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed.
(280 km/h).
· When the vehicle is in motion (above 5 mph 8 km/h) this function is available and displayed in the list of "Vehicle Settings" menu.
Press and release the switch ( ) to
access the submenus.
Scroll with the switch in the or
arrow directions to view the
Press and release the switch in the
selectable items:
or arrow directions to scroll the · Speed Warning
4
stored messages.
When the number of messages
· Electric Parking Brake
exceeds 9, the submenu points will be · Interior Lighting
replaced by a numerical value
· Screen Setup
Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the
selectable items. Press and release the switch ( ) to select "Speed Warning".
indicating the message number. Press and release the switch ( ) to view the selected message (see example in the picture).
NOTE:
· In order to modify the status of electric parking brake, please see chapter "Parking Brake" in section
"Driving".
· Adjust interior lighting brightness or/and ambient lighting as described in paragraph "Interior Lights" under "Lights" in section "Understanding
Press and release the switch ( ) once again to view the related options: "Off" is the default status.
the Vehicle".
Example: How to modify the "Speed Warning" status
Press and release the button to return to the main menu.
NOTE: · Minimum set speed: 20 mph
(30 km/h).
174
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
telltale indicating the set speed limit will appear on display.
The pop-up message and the telltale will be displayed for 5 seconds then system will return to the previous screen.
SCREEN SETUP
After having entered the "Vehicle
Settings" menu, press and release the
switch in the or arrow directions
until this menu item is displayed.
Press and release the switch ( ) to
Scroll with the switch in the or
access the available items for this
arrow directions to view the
submenu.
selectable options.
Then the display will show the last
If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
4
Speed values are in loop, keeping the modified item.
this feature is unavailable and the
switch pressed in the or arrow
When the set speed is exceeded, the
main screen shows possible options in
directions will increase scroll speed.
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal grey (not activable).
Press and release the switch ( ) to
and the telltale indicating the speed
Operate this function with the vehicle
select the option. A check mark will
limit becomes amber.
stopped and transmission in P (Park)
remain next to the previously-selected A pop-up message indicating that the position.
item until a new selection is made.
limit has been exceeded will appear
In order to enter a function, press the
on display.
switch ( ).
The following directory shows the
items available in the "Screen Setup"
submenu:
A setting saved notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds and a white
Upper Left · None · Compass · Outside Temperature (default: Upper
Right) · Date · Time
175
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
· Time/Date (default: Upper Left)
· Range to Empty
· Average MPG (or L/100km or km/L)
· Current MPG (or L/100km or km/L)
· Trip A Distance
· Trip B Distance
Upper Right (example in picture) · None
· Compass
Main Menu: Line 1
· Outside Temperature (default: Upper (only displays in Main Menu)
4
Right)
· None (default status)
· Date
· Compass
· Time
· Outside Temp.
· Time/Date (default: Upper Left)
· Date
· Range to Empty
· Time
· Average MPG (or L/100km or km/L)
· Time/Date
· Current MPG (or L/100km or km/L)
· Range to Empty
· Trip A Distance
· Average MPG (or L/100km or km/L)
· Trip B Distance
· Current MPG (or L/100km or km/L)
· Trip A Distance
· Trip B Distance
· Audio
Main Menu: Line 2 (only displays in Main Menu) · Same configurable options as Line 1
Main Menu: Line 3 (only displays in Main Menu) · Same configurable options as Line 1
176
MPH km/h Display (instruction line) · On · Off
Main Menu Navigation · On · Off
Outline Coloring · On · Off
Key-On Display · On · Off
Key-Off Display · On: Trip summary · Off: screen with Maserati logo and
trident
Defaults · Restore · Cancel Scroll with the switch in the or
arrow directions to view the selectable items (in the example "Time" is selected). A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made.
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
part of the MTC+ (see example in the figures).
display only if a destination has been set on the navigator of the MTC+. If function is set to "Off", the navigation information will not be displayed.
If the "Outline Colouring" is set to "On", the TFT side edge of engine temperature and fuel gauge indicators will change color depending on the selected Drive Mode:
Press and release the switch ( ) to select an item. The notification of setting saved appears as a popup for 2 seconds, then the display will show the last-modified item.
· OFF ROAD: brown;
· I.C.E.: light blue;
· SPORT: green (example shown in picture);
4
· CORSA (TROFEO version only):
golden.
If it is set to "Off", the color/Drive
Mode combination is not active and
the edges will remain "NORMAL" Drive Mode color.
Press and release the button to return to the "Screen Setup" submenu. "Screen Setup" submenu parameters set by the user as the ones to be displayed are also indicated in the top
As for the instruction line "MPH km/h Display", you can either select to display it in sector 6 or not ("Off" option). In the latter case, the function of changing units remains in any case active. If the "Main Menu Navigation" is set to "On", navigation information will be displayed in the main area of the
177
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
"Key-On Display" and "Key-Off
The "Defaults" item of "Screen Setup" Transmission Temperature Warning
Display" items allow user to set display submenu allows restoring Maserati
Light
during vehicle key-on and off. "Key-On Display" is normally set to "On". When entering the vehicle, after the welcome screen, the display will show the information concerning
factory settings.
TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions
Display sections indicated in the figure
This warning light and the related message indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is rising. If this warning light turns on, safely
engine starting sequence. While if it is show warning/indicator lights
set to "Off" (example shown in
concerning all selected driving
pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into P
figure), the display will show the information displayed before last
functions and all set functions/systems. (Park) and run the engine at idle until
The relevant messages will be
the temperature drops and the light
vehicle key-off.
indicated within the main area for five switches off. If the problem persists,
4
seconds, unless otherwise specified.
contact an Authorized Maserati
Fault messages will be stored under
Dealer.
"Stored messages".
When engine is started and ignition device is pressed to stop it, it is possible to set "Key-Off Display", "On" or "Off" to obtain the following display settings:
· "On": "Trip summary" screen (Trip B is reset after each key-on/key-off cycle);
· "Off": screen with Maserati logo and trident.
Charging System Warning Light
This warning light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system warning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. IMMEDIATELY contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to have the vehicle serviced. If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Start Procedures" in section "In an Emergency".
CAUTION! Continuous driving with the transmission temperature warning light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or failure.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light notifies when the engine is overheated. If the temperature reaches critical levels and the gauge displayed in sector 12 turns red, this warning light under the engine temperature gauge indicator will illuminate in red color combined with the related message on display. When the temperature is
178
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
reaching the set threshold an acoustic Check "Engine Overheating" in
is too low. The warning light is
signal will be heard.
section "In an Emergency" for more
combined with a displayed message
If the warning light switches on while information.
and an acoustic signal that will last 4
driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into N (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature does not return to normal, immediately turn the engine off and contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
Under normal conditions, the warning light illuminates when the ignition device is turned to RUN and goes off as soon as the engine is started. If the warning light stays or turns on while driving, the engine oil pressure
minutes. In this case, turn the engine off immediately and carry out the necessary checks. Do not operate the vehicle until the problem has been corrected. This light does not indicate the oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick located under the hood (see "Maintenance Procedures" in
section "Maintenance and Care"). If the problem persists, contact an
4
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Engine Oil Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the engine oil is overheated. The warning light is combined with the related displayed message. In this case, drive carefully until the temperature drops back to normal level and the light warning light turns off. If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light and the related displayed message, indicate a low engine oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick fitted under
179
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
the hood (see "Maintenance
Liftgate and Hood Ajar Indicators
Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care").
WARNING! · If the warning light is accompanied
These light indicators will illuminate to indicate that the
Electric Power Steering Failure Warning Light
by the message "Catalyst Temp Getting Hot Reduce Speed": the
liftgate and/or the hood are ajar.
This warning light, and the related message, illuminate
temperature of the catalytic converters is too high. The driver
When the liftgate or the hood is open, a related message will
when the electric power
must slow down immediately until
be displayed besides the light
steering is not operating and
the warning light turns off.
if the vehicle is running at a speed of
needs service.
If the warning light is on, steering
assistance may be not available.
4
· If the message "Catalyst Temp Hot Stop Safely Wait To Cool" appears after decelerating: the temperature in the catalytic converters has
5 mph (8 km/h) or faster.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator
This indicator light indicates a
WARNING!
reached a dangerous level and the catalytic converters could be
failure of the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
After battery disconnection event, the warning light may be on. In this case, start the engine and perform a steering wheel stroke end to end.
If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer.
· Maserati declines all responsibility for whatever damage deriving from non-compliance with the above mentioned warnings.
If the indicator turns on while driving (a torque decrease is possible), have the system checked by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. When detecting a failure, the light indicator will illuminate while the engine is running.
Catalyst Over Temperature Warning Light
This warning light, and the related message, light up if the engine runs irregularly with consequent high temperature in the exhaust system.
Door Ajar Indicator
This indicator illuminates when one or more doors are ajar. The indicator will show which door is ajar. When one or more doors are open, a related message will be displayed if the vehicle is running at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster.
If the indicator remains lit with the engine running, you can still drive your vehicle. However, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. If the indicator is flashing while the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
180
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
or engine stall and your vehicle may
(horizontal leveling, electromechanical Ice Hazard Indicator
require towing.
swiveling) or of the Advanced
When the external
Low Fuel Indicator
Frontlighting System (AFS).
temperature falls below 38°F
When the fuel level reaches approximately 4.2 Gallons (16 liters) this light under the fuel
Please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to check the system.
Advanced Frontlighting System (AFS)
(3°C), the temperature value blinks for a few seconds, the indicator light turns on, a message is
gauge indicator will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added
Failure Warning Light This warning light and the
displayed and an acoustic signal is triggered to warn the driver of the
together with the related message. In this condition the color indicating the
related message light up to report a failure of the AFS
risk of icy roadbed. Under such conditions, we recommend
quantity of fuel in the tank, inside the
system.
using the I.C.E. drive mode (see
indicator on display, will go from
Contact an Authorized Maserati
"Automatic Transmission" in section
white to amber.
Dealer as soon as possible.
"Driving") drive carefully and slow
4
Refer to "Refueling" in section "Driving" for fuel filling.
Automatic High Beam Failure Warning Light
down as the grip of the tires may be significantly reduced. The indicator light flashes for 5
Windshield and Headlights Washer Low Fluid Indicator
This warning light and the related message illuminate to
seconds and switches off when the temperature reaches 43°F (6°C) or
This indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds to indicate a low level of the windshield and headlights washer fluid. A related message will be displayed. See "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care" for fluid filling.
report a failure of the automatic high beam headlights. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
Suspensions Failure Warning Light
This warning light and the related message turn on while
higher.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas cap) Open Warning Light
After refueling the car performs a check of the fuel filler cap and this warning light comes on if it is not correctly closed, after approximately
Headlight Aiming System Failure Warning Light
driving if there is a failure of the suspension system.
10 minutes also depending on driving conditions.
This warning light and the
Please contact an Authorized Maserati See "Refueling" in section "Driving"
related message indicate a
Dealer to check the system.
for more details.
failure of the automatic
headlight aiming system
181
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
"Automatic Start&Stop System" of
ADAS Status Indicators (If equipped)
WARNING!
section "Driving" for further information.
When you are not viewing the "Drive Assist" page, the
Do not drive with this warning light on. Check that the fuel filler cap is tightened correctly.
Start&Stop Failure Warning Light
This warning light illuminates when there is a failure in the
indicators at the top left-hand side of the display indicate status of individual ADAS system or
Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning Light
Start&Stop system. Switch the engine on or off using the
the combination of them (see examples).
This warning light and related normal procedure with the ignition
message illuminate when
device START/STOP and have the
there is an EPB system failure. vehicle checked at an Authorized
4
The failure could also completely or partially block the
Maserati Dealer. Scheduled Maintenance (Service)
For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control ACC", "Lane Keeping Assist LKA" and "Highway Assist - HAS" in section "Driving".
vehicle because the parking brake
Indicator
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
could remain on even after it has been automatically or manually disengaged
This indicator illuminates and a message flashes on the
(If equipped) This warning light informs the
though its controls.
display for approximately 5
driver that Forward Collision
If it is still possible to use the vehicle
seconds after an acoustic
Warning (FCW) is disabled. If
(parking brake not engaged) drive to signal to indicate that the next
this light occurs together with
the nearest Authorized Maserati
scheduled maintenance is due or is
other specific messages, take your
Dealer and remember to performing
already overdue.
vehicle to an Authorized Maserati
each operation/command that the electric parking brake is not
Unless reset, the message will continue to display each time you cycle the
Dealer for service. This warning light will light even when the activation of
functioning. Start&Stop Disable Indicator
ignition to the RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily,
another driver assistance feature or drive mode (such as " -ESC OFF")
This indicator illuminates
press and release the button on the disables the FCW.
when Start&Stop is turned off through the controls located
steering wheel. To reset the service indicator system, please visit an
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Fault (If equipped)
on the right side of the
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
This warning light informs that
steering wheel or through the relevant
FCW is in fault state. If this
soft-key of the MTC+. See chapter
occurred together with other
specific messages, could mean
182
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
that a system fault requiring servicing the steering wheel (for further details,
at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. It is refer to "TFT Display: Menus and
Ride height set through the
nevertheless possible to drive the
Settings" in this chapter).
control on central console is
vehicle without using this function (for further details, refer to "Forward Collision Warning - FCW" in section "Driving").
General Fault for Driving with a Trailer (NOT for TROFEO version)
The warning light and the relevant message are displayed to indicate a fault or failure of the connection between vehicle and trailer. In these cases please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible, and avoid using the vehicle with a trailer.
Passive Speed Limit Exceeded This indicator light informs the driver that the speed limit that was set has been exceeded.
Stiff Suspension Setting Indicator This indicator light indicate that the stiff suspensions program ("S") is on. For further details, refer to
"Drive Mode" in section "Driving".
Set Drive Mode Indicator
Drive mode set by the driver
always displayed in the
specific area on the RH side of
the TFT display. From the
"Normal" level (shown in
picture) ride height can be
lowered at "Aero 1" or "Aero
2" levels when using vehicle
on the road. When using the
vehicle off road, ride height
can be set to a higher position thanks to "Off Road
4
1" or "Off Road 2" levels. For
further details, refer to "Drive
Mode" and "Off-road Drive"
in section "Driving".
AWD Failure Warning Light
This warning light turns on to indicate a fault of the AWD system otherwise a fault or overheating due to excessive wheel spin.. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible, and avoid using the vehicle in heavy duty conditions.
Set Passive Speed Limit
through the controls on central console is displayed above the transmission lever indicator (example in picture: NORMAL). For further details, refer to "Drive Mode" in section "Driving".
Ride Height Indicator for Vehicle Setup
The lowest position "Entry/Exit" shown in picture is used for entering and exiting the vehicle.
Cruise Control (CC) Ready or Canceled
This white light indicator will illuminate when the CC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in
This indicator light indicates
white below).
the passive speed limit set via
the controls on the RH side of
183
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
For further information, check
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
details, refer to "Brake and Stability
"Electronic Cruise Control" in section "Driving".
This green warning light with below the set speed turns on
Control System" in section "Driving". Hill Descent Control (HDC) Set
Cruise Control (CC) Set
This green light indicator will illuminate with the set speed when the CC is set and in driver override. For further
when the ACC is set (for further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in section "Driving") and vehicle will keep set speed.
This green light with below the set speed turns on when the HDC is set. For further details, refer to "Brake and Stability Control System" in section
information, check "Electronic Cruise Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
"Driving".
Control" in section "Driving".
This warning light turns on
Headlight On Indicator
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Fault
when ACC is not operating or
This indicator will illuminate
4
This warning light on indicates that the LKA system is in fault.
needs servicing, For further details, refer to "Adaptive
when the position lights or headlights are turned on.
If the warning light and the
Cruise Control - ACC" in section
For further details, see
relevant message do not go
"Driving".
"Lights" in section "Understanding the
off after a few manoeuvres and
Blind Spot Assist (BSA) Failure
Vehicle".
eventually a key cycle, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready or Canceled
Warning Light
This warning light and related message light on to report a failure of the BSA system.
Front Fog lights On Indicator
This indicator turns on when the fog lights are on.
This white warning light indicates that the ACC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in white below). For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in
As consequence, on vehicles equipped with ABSA also this latter will be not working or malfunctioning. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible avoiding to use this system.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Ready
Automatic High Beam On Indicator
This indicator turns on when the "Auto High Beam Assist" feature is set on MTC+ (see "MTC+ Settings" in this section).
section "Driving".
This white light turns on to
indicate that HDC is ready to
be set and, once it sets, to turn
it off temporarily. For further
184
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Gear Shift Indicator Light
suggestions provided by the
This indicator lights up to
navigation system do not relieve the
indicate gear shift change in
driver from full responsibility for the
order to optimize fuel
maneuvers made through traffic while
consumption.
driving, or from compliance with road
See "Drive Mode" in section
regulations and other provisions
"Driving" for further
regarding road traffic. The person
information.
driving the vehicle is always and in
any case responsible for safe driving
Performance "Launch Control" Indicator (TROFEO version only)
on the road.
This indicator lights up when Infotainment System
The vehicle is provided with a specific
the car is launched in the "Launch Control" performance start procedure. See chapter "Drive Mode" in section "Driving" for "Launch Control" procedure.
The vehicle is equipped with the infotainment Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+) System, an advanced user interface which combines innovative and exclusive technical features integrating entertainment, user
add to the owner's manual, describing the MTC+ System features and listing all warnings and precautions, which are essential for a safe use of the system. Maserati advises you to read this add carefully and thoroughly. The MTC+ display is positioned in the
4
Service AWD System Message
settings, air conditioning, navigation, central part of the dashboard and the
The message and the warning light on communication and information
manual controls and devices for
the TFT display will illuminate when
features within a single system.
connecting external sources are
all-wheel drive feature requires
The MTC+ System features an audio
positioned on the central console.
service. For further information refer to "All-Wheel Drive" in section
system which is acoustically optimized
for this specific vehicle.
1. MTC+ touch display.
"Driving".
2. Ports for SD card, AUX and USB (for
further details, refer to "Interior
WARNING! The navigation system assists the driver while driving, providing advice
features" in section "Understanding the Vehicle").
3. "Browse" button .
and suggestions, by voice guidance
4. "Back" button .
and graphic information, for the best 5. "Enter" button.
route to reach the set destination. The 6. Volume control.
185
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
7. Tune/scroll control.
features" in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). After connecting the device, by using the MTC+ display softkeys, knobs on the central console and controls at the steering wheel, user can navigate through the content of the connected device and set its playing mode.
Multimedia Navigation Controls on Central Console
The manual controls located on the
Tune/Scroll Control
central console are a further interface By working this knob in "Radio" or
4
for the driver and nearby passenger,
"Media" mode, user can go through
that adds to the MTC+ display
the radio stations or scroll the tracks
softkeys. Using the manual controls,
inside connected external devices and
the MTC+ display will work as a
confirm the selection by pressing enter
graphic display of the inputs from the button.
controls.
In any other mode of the MTC+, use
Manual Controls and Devices
SD, AUX and USB Ports
When an SD card is inserted into its housing, the MTC+ is able to read it and select multimedia files (music and images) from the device. By using the AUX and USB ports it is possible to connect external devices to the MTC+ (see chapter "Interior
Volume Control
By working this knob in "Radio" or "Media" mode, user can adjust the volume of the radio or audio files, from minimum to maximum and vice versa. Turn knob clockwise to increase the volume, counter-clockwise to decrease it. The volume status will be indicated in the top part of the MTC+ display.
this knob to scroll the list of available options or to manage the cursor movement in the lower bar of the main menus. Then press enter button to confirm the function or setting highlighted on MTC+ display.
Browse button
After selecting a function, using the tune/scroll knob or softkeys on MTC+ display, press this button to see the detail of the items/options of the selected function. This button is also used as shortcut to display the phone book, when the "Phone" menu is
186
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
selected, or the favorites when the
3. "Controls" softkey
"Nav (Navigation)" menu is selected.
Touch this soft-key to access the
Back button
features of some driver assistance
Press this button to go back to previous menu or previous screen. Press this button to shift the navigation one level backwards on MTC+ screen. If it is pressed and held for at least 2 seconds, it brings the
system (ADAS) that can be set up (if equipped). Features can be selected and adjusted or turned on/off by touching the related soft-key (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section).
cursor back in the lower bar of the
4. softkey
main menus.
Main menu bar is set up by Maserati: it can be customized according to
Touch this softkey to access
Enter Button
personal requirements, as explained in
Applications / settings screen.
4
To confirm the function or setting
"Customizing the Main Menu Bar" in 5. "Climate" softkey
highlighted on MTC+ display. When in "Radio" mode and the ignition switch in RUN position, you can save your preset stations.
this chapter. For further information refer to the dedicated booklet included in the owner documentation.
Touch this soft-key to access the air conditioning settings. In this screen the following controls are also available: Heated Seats, Heated
Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Display
The softkeys located on the lower part of the MTC+ display represent the main menu modes/functions, which are briefly indicated below.
1. "Radio" softkey
Touch this softkey to enter the Radio mode. The different tuner modes: FM, AM, SXM and "Aha" App (for countries where they are supported) can be selected by touching the related softkeys in the
Steering Wheel and Ventilated Seats. See "Air Conditioning Controls" in this section for further details.
6. "Nav" softkey
Touch this softkey to access the Navigation feature. Refer to the
Radio mode.
MTC+ instruction manual for
2. "Media" softkey (if connected)
further details.
Touch this softkey to access media
7. "Phone" softkey
sources such as: USB Device, AUX,
Touch one of these softkey to access
Bluetooth and SD card as long as
the MTC+ Phone feature that can
the requested media is present.
be set or monitored via MTC+.
187
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Touch one of these soft-keys to access the list of functions that users can set.
Touchscreen Display Warnings
Switch off the screen backlight by touching "Screen OFF" soft-key in the "Controls" screen of MTC+ display.
easily customized to suit user's requirements, as follows:
· touch button to open applications/settings screen;
CAUTION!
· Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
· hold depressed and drag the icon corresponding to the selected function until it overlaps the one to be replaced on the bottom bar.
· Do not press the screen with any
hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick,
jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the
4
touchscreen surface.
· Do not spray any liquid or caustic
Without ADAS
chemicals directly on the screen. Use
a clean and dry micro fiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
· If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol, or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.
Switch OFF Touchscreen Backlight
If the screen backlight becomes annoying when driving, it is possible to switch it off.
With ADAS
Customizing the Main Menu Bar
The softkeys for the main functions of the MTC+ system, indicated at the bottom of the MTC+ display, can be
Once it is set in the menu bar, the new connection will be immediately operational.
Use the MTC+ Display as Projection Device
If your smartphone is properly connected to the vehicle via the USB port, on MTC+ screen in place of "Phone" soft-key and in the source list of "Media" screen you can find the "Apple CarPlay" (example shown in picture) or the "Android Auto" app
188
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
soft-key. "Android Auto" app needs to in Google Play Music. It also offers the
be downloaded on your mobile
possibility to make phone calls or send
device.
and receive messages without taking
your hands off the steering wheel.
You can also request Google to make
any type of research. Android Auto
will give an easier access to
applications and content from the
MTC+ system display.
The following tables show the
"Screen" and "Audio" source (of
projection device or of MTC+
System MTC+ ) when a smartphone is connected, a session is established and
4
These applications use the MTC+
the device (Table A) or the MTC+
display as projector of the functions
System (Table B) is performing an
available on the connected device.
action.
"Apple CarPlay" allows the best use of
your iPhone® in the car and perfect
integration with the MTC + display
and with the controls of the car,
including Siri voice control. You can
make phone calls, access music, send
and receive messages, get real-time
directions on traffic conditions, all
while staying focused on the road.
The "Android Auto" app lets you
share information while driving and
make it easier to access Google. The
interface is equipped with Google
Maps with voice guided navigation,
traffic information in real time,
on-demand access to millions of songs
189
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Table A: device is performing an action
Action
Radio
MTC+ System MTC+ : Active Mode
Media
Navigation
Phone
No App active
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Start Media Player
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Screen:
Audio:
+
MTC+
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Screen:
Screen:
4
Start Navigation
Screen:
Audio: MTC+
Audio: MTC+
Audio:
+ Audio priority + Audio priority
Start Phone Call
Screen: Audio: MTC+
Start VR
Screen: Audio:
Screen: Audio:
Screen: Audio:
Screen: Audio:
Voice Rec. Screen: Audio: MTC+ Screen: Audio: MTC+
Screen: Audio: MTC+ + Audio priority
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
190
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Table B: MTC+ is performing an action
Action MTC+
No App active
Device : Active Mode
Media
Navigation
Phone
Voice Rec.
Start Radio
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Main Audio: MTC+
+ mix prompt nav
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
Start Media Player
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Main Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
+ Audio priority
4
Start Navigation
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Main
Audio: + Audio priority
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+
Audio: + Audio priority
Screen: MTC+
Audio: + Audio priority
Start Phone Call
Screen: Audio:
Start VR
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen:
Audio: MTC+ + Audio priority
Screen:
Audio: MTC+ + Audio priority
Cannot start VR during Call
Screen: Audio:
Start Rear Parking Camera
Screen: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
Screen: MTC+ Audio:
191
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Audio Controls
By pressing the top of the rocker switch you can increase the volume
or turn the tune/scroll bottom knob to tune station.
The vehicle is equipped with audio
and by pressing the bottom of the
controls that allow both driver and
rocker switch you can lower it. Press
front passenger to operate the audio the center button to mute the volume.
system. These controls can be used to The left-hand control functions
adjust audio volume, change radio
depend on the current source. To
station or mode (FM, AM, USB, etc).
change source, press the center
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
button. When in "Radio" mode, pressing the
These audio controls are rocker-type top of the switch will "Seek" up for
switches with a button in the center
the previous listenable station and
4
and are located on the rear side of the pressing the bottom of the switch will
steering wheel, right behind the front "Seek" down for the previous
For further details, refer to
switches.
listenable station.
"Infotainment System" in this section.
When an external source is connected When in App/Settings mode, the
to MTC+, a light press on the top of
tune/scroll bottom knob and the
the switch will play the next track on browse and enter buttons allow
the device connected.
you to scroll through the menus and
Press the bottom of the switch once to change the user's settings (see "MTC+
go to the beginning of the current
Settings" in section "Dashboard
track, or to the beginning of the
Instruments and Controls").
previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down
Press any button to display information on the radio station or track being listened to inside a pop-up
twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third one, etc.
Audio Controls on Central
for 2 seconds on instrument cluster.
Console
The right-hand control manages the volume.
In "Radio" mode, turn the volume upper knob to set the audio volume,
192
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Audio System
The vehicle is equipped with an audio system that offers superior sound quality, higher sound pressure levels and reduced energy consumption. The system maximizes the amplifier and speaker technology delivering substantially higher components and system efficiency.
Basic System
dashboard, one on each front door panel and one on each side wall of the trunk, above the cover level.
· Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeters: one at the base of the windshield side pillars and one on each rear door.
· One bass box in the trunk, under the front part of the floor.
· 12-channel amplifier positioned in the wall of the trunk left side.
The basic sound system features 8 speakers and can develop a sound
4
output of 80 W.
The basic system includes: · Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter
Woofers, one on each door.
· Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeters, one at the base of the windshield side pillars and one on each rear door.
Basic System
Premium System
The vehicle can be equipped with a "Premium" sound system which features 14 speakers and can develop a sound output of 900 W.
This system includes: · Four 6.3 in (160 mm) diameter
Woofers: one on each door.
· Five 3.1 in (80 mm) diameter Midrange: one on the top of the
193
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
front door and one on each side wall of the trunk, above the cover level. · Seven 1 in (25 mm) Tweeters: one on center dashboard, one at the base of the windshield side pillars, one on each rear door and one on each side wall of the trunk, above the cover level. · One bass box in the trunk, under the front part of the floor. · 16-channel amplifier positioned in the wall of the trunk left side.
4
Premium System
High Premium System
The vehicle can be equipped with a "High Premium" audio system including 17 speakers and 1280 W of sound power, available upon request.
The "High Premium" system includes: · Four 6.5 in (165 mm) Woofers: one
on each door. · Five 4 in (100 mm) Midranges: one
on center dashboard, one on each
194
High Premium System
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
MTC+ "Controls" Screen
Touch the "Controls" soft-key on the lower part of the MTC+ display to turn on/off some on-board devices and turn on/off and adjust some driver assist systems (ADAS). Once you enter the "Controls" screen, use the touch soft-keys or turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll and change feature settings of the features and press the enter upper button to confirm the selection. Some of these devices or systems are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle. The "Controls" screen is specific to the vehicles that are not equipped with driver assistance systems (Without ADAS) and for those that have them (With ADAS).
Without ADAS
The ADAS features have two soft-keys: the first "soft-key" changes the current setting on or off, the second "soft-key" on the side shows the current setting. By touching the second soft-key, you will enter the setting page in which all feature options are visible and adjustable.
NOTE:
· For further details refer also to the
"Maserati Touch Control Plus
(MTC+)" guide.
4
· All settings must be edited with ignition device set to RUN position.
· Some of the Customer programmable features are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle.
With ADAS
Some features can be set only on or off touching the corresponding soft-key. The blue color of the soft-key outline will confirm the state change. Other features can have one or more instruction/setting pages that are accessed by touching the corresponding soft-key (example: "Privacy Lock").
Features Common to All Configurations
· Privacy Lock
The two modes of this feature allows you to enter a 4-digit PIN code to lock and unlock the glove box in the passenger side of the dashboard and, choosing "Valet
195
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Mode", to lock your settings for
- customizable features: see "MTC+ Features Specific for Vehicles
listening and guidance.
Settings" in this section.
with ADAS
See "Dashboard Compartments" in this section for further details.
Features Specific for Vehicle without ADAS
· Lane Keeping Assist Activating this feature the LKA
· Start & Stop Off This feature allows you to disable
· Blind Spot Assist
system will attempt to keep the vehicle in lane and can apply direct
the Start & Stop when frequent stops and restarts of the engine may
Activating this feature the BSA and RCP systems assist the driver when
input to electric power steering system to change direction of
become annoying.
See "Automatic Start&Stop System"
in section "Driving" for further
details.
4
· Auto High Beam Assist
changing lanes, overtaking and when parking, by detecting the arrival of other vehicles from a side or rear blind spot. When this happens, a light signal appears in the external rear-view mirror.
vehicle.
The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the LKA soft-key.
Touching this soft-key the set page
By selecting this feature, when the
When the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) is
of LKA system will be displayed (see
forward digital camera detects a
selected, feature can be set to
picture).
vehicle that precedes in the
"Off", "Lights" or "Lights + Chime"
direction of travel or in the opposite
(default mode). When this feature is
direction, adjust the high beam in
activated in "Lights" mode, the
an automatic way not to dazzle.
system will only show a warning
See "Lights" in section
light in the outside mirrors.
"Understanding the Vehicle" for further details.
· Screen OFF
When "Lights + Chime" mode is activated, the system will show a warning light in the outside mirrors
This feature allows you to switch off
as well as give an audible alert when
the MTC+ screen backlight if it
the turn signal is on. When "Off" is
becomes annoying when driving.
selected, the system is deactivated.
Driver warnings can be only "Visual"
See "Infotainment System" in this
For description of this system, see
or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode).
section for further details. · Settings
chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" in section "Driving".
System response can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode)
Touch this soft-key you enter the
and "Late".
"Settings" page that displays all user
System reaction force can be set to
196
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
"Low", "Medium" (default mode)
"Visual", "Visual & Acoustic"
and "High".
(default mode) or "Visual & Haptic".
See "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" in section "Driving" for more details.
System response can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode)
· Active Blind Spot Assist
and "Late".
Activating this feature the system will try to prevent collision between host vehicle and potential blind spot collision hazard. System applies
System reaction force can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) and "High".
See "Active Blind Spot Assist -
direct input to electric power
ABSA" in section "Driving" for more
steering system to change direction
details.
FCW is always active: it is possible to
of vehicle to avoid collision. The current system setting is shown
· Forward Collision Warning (with active braking)
set the sensitivity and the aid of the
active braking.
4
in blue on the right side of the ABSA soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of ABSA system will be displayed (see picture).
The FCW feature primarily uses the front radar and forward looking camera for sensing vehicles and pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function) ahead, and will provide warnings to the driver and may perform braking maneuvers.
FCW sensitivity can be set to "Near", to "Medium" or to "Far". The default status of FCW is the "Medium" setting. Setting it to "Far" means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle or pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function)
The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the FCW soft-key.
in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the best reaction time, though could lead to
Touching this soft-key the set page
some more unwanted warnings.
of FCW system will be displayed (see
"Medium" gives instead a little less
picture).
time for reacting compared to
Driver warnings can be only
"Far", but at the same time should lead to less not desired warning.
To change the setting for more
dynamic driving, select the "Near"
197
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer
immediately cancel and return to the last-viewed screen.
MTC+ Settings
to the vehicle or pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function) in front of you.
FCW with active braking can be set to "On" or "Off".
· Surround View Camera
By activating this feature the system uses four cameras to monitor the
The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". See "Surround View Camera System (optional)" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details.
· Traffic Sign Assist
By activating this feature the forward-facing digital camera, with the aid of maps on the navigation
Customer Programmable Features
The MTC+ System uses a combination of keys able to access and change the customer programmable features present in the "Settings" and "Controls" page (see also "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section). Access programmable features
area around the vehicle when
4
transmission lever is shifted to P
system, is able to detect speed limits touching "Settings" soft-key in the
and traffic signs with a restriction
"Controls" screen page, or using
(Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position.
When activation occurs by touching the "Surround Camera" soft-key in the "Controls" screen or moving the shift lever in R (Reverse) position,
indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in snow conditions). Those are displayed by the TSA system on the instrument cluster display together with a possible alert when the vehicle exceeds the speed limit.
manual controls on central console (refer to "Infotainment System" in this section). Turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll through menus and change settings on MTC+ display, touch the enter upper
the initial view will be the default
button to confirm the selection.
view (associated with current gear
state). Image will be displayed with
active guidelines while in that gear as long as vehicle speed remains lower than 12 km/h (8 mph).
When vehicle is shifted into a
different gear, the image will
remain displayed for 10 seconds, or
vehicle is shifted in P (Park), or until vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (8 mph), at which point it will
See "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in section "Driving" for further details.
Without ADAS
198
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
To make a selection, and enter the desired function, touch the corresponding soft-key on the menu (the picture shown is "Engine Off Options").
With ADAS
In this mode the MTC+ System allows
NOTE:
you to access the following
· For further details refer to the
programmable features (some of them
4
"Maserati Touch Control Plus
are optional or for a specific
(MTC+)" guide.
model/version and may not be
· All settings must be edited with ignition device set to RUN position.
available on your vehicle): Display, Units, Voice Commands, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistant, Lights, Doors &
To scroll through the functions, move the cursor up or down, or touch the arrow or . Once the desired
To display the programmable features Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote
mode is entered, press and release the
menu on MTC+, you can also touch
Start, Engine Off Options, Suspension, touch screen area of the setting that
soft-key to view all available
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM
you wish to modify. The new setting
applications and then select
Setup, Restore Settings and Clear
will be highlighted with one or more
"Settings".
Personal Data.
boxes to indicate status or possible
NOTE: · Only one touch screen area/soft-key
may be selected at a time.
· Menu navigation indications refer to the use of soft-keys on MTC+ display: the same operations can be
variants of the function status. A check mark in a box indicates the current status of the function. Touch the check mark to cancel, or the empty box to insert the check mark, and change the status of the function.
performed using the manual
controls on central console.
199
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Display
The available languages are specific
After pressing the "Display" soft-key the following mode settings will be
to the target markets. · Touchscreen Beep
available.
When in this display, you can turn
· Display Mode
When in this display you can select one of the auto display settings. To change mode status, checkmark
on or shut off the sound activated by pressure of a touchscreen soft-key.
· Controls Screen Time-Out
"Night", "Day" or "Auto".
When this mode is selected, the
Once the procedure is completed (for · Display Brightness with Headlights
"Controls" screen will remain
example, Display mode) touch the
On (Night)
displayed for 5 seconds. If this mode
4
back arrow soft-key to return to
When in this display, you can select
the previous menu or touch the upper
the brightness with the headlights
right "X" soft-key, to close the settings
on. Adjust the brightness from level
is not selected, the screen will remain displayed until closed manually.
screen. Touching the or soft keys
0 to 10 with the "+" and "" setting
and the cursor on the right side of the
soft-keys or by selecting any point
screen will allow you to scroll up or
on the scale between the "+" and
down through the available settings.
"" soft-keys.
· Display Brightness with Headlights Off (Day)
When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness as previously explained for "Night" setting.
· Set Language
When in this display, you can select one language for all display descriptions, including the trip functions and the navigation system.
· Nav Next Turn Pop-ups in Cluster
By selecting this feature, the next turn direction will appear on the instrument cluster along a programmed route until the desired destination is reached (see picture).
200
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
displayed in the TFT Display and in the
change the voice response length
navigation system. The following
settings. To change the voice
selectable units of measure are listed
response length, touch the "Brief"
below: · Distance unit:
or "Detailed" softkey. · Show Command List
select from: "mi" or "km".
When this feature is selected, it is
· AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon Connection
· Speed unit: select from: "MPH" or "km/h".
· Consumption unit: select from: "MPG (US)", "MPG (UK)", "L/100km" or "km/L".
possible to select options during a voice control session. Options for available controls are: "Always", "w/Help" or "Never".
Clock
This feature allows to use the MTC+ · Capacity unit:
Time is always visible on the
4
display as a projection device
select from: "gal (US)", "gal (UK)" dashboard analog clock (see "Analog
connected via USB port in order to
or "L".
Clock" in this section) and in digital
browse the Apple CarPlay and Android Auto apps. By setting this feature, automatic switch from native screen to projection device
· Pressure unit: select from: "psi", "kPa" or "bar".
· Temperature unit:
format on the instrument cluster and on the MTC+ display.
will happen every time you connect
select from: "°F" or "°C".
your smartphone. For further details · Power unit:
refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide.
select from: "kW", "hp (US)" or "hp (UK)".
Units
· Torque unit:
After pressing the "Units" and then
select from: "lb-ft" or "Nm".
"Custom" softkey on the touchscreen you may select between "U.S." units and "Metric" of measure. Each unit of measure can be independently
Voice Commands
After pressing "Voice" softkey the following modes will be available.
· Voice Response Length
When in this display, you can
201
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
you can set the hours manually from 1 to 24. To select, touch the "+" or "" soft-keys to adjust the hours.
· Set Time Minutes
With "Sync Time with GPS" feature
unchecked and this mode selected,
you can set the minutes manually
from 0 to 59. To select, touch the
"+" or "" soft-keys as done for the
hours.
4
With this feature it is possible to view and set the following modes.
· Sync Time with GPS
· Time Format
When in this mode, you can select the time format display. To change
Safety & Driving Assistant
Touch this soft-key to set the following modes.
Time is normally automatically
the current setting, touch and
· ParkSense (Park Assist)
synchronised with the radio signal. It is also possible to set automatic synchronisation mode using GPS signal instead.
release the "12 Hrs" or "24 Hrs" soft-key.
· Show Time In Status Bar This feature will allow you to turn
The park assist system will scan for objects behind and in front of the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle
on or shut off the digital clock in the speed is less than 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
status bar (main menu bar).
The system can be enabled with
· Set Date in Cluster
"Sound" only, "Sound+Display", or turned "Off". See "Park Assist
When in this mode, you can set the
(optional)" in section "Before
date manually in the main menu bar
Starting" for further information.
of the MTC+ and on the instrument cluster display. Touch the "+" or "-" · Front Sensors Active in Drive
soft-keys to adjust day, month and
If this feature is active, when driver
year.
takes shift lever from P (Park) or N
· Set Time Hours
(Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking sensors are activated. If this feature
With "Sync Time with GPS" feature
is not active, when driver takes shift
unchecked and this mode selected,
lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
202
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
D (Drive), front parking sensors are · Auto Folding Side Mirrors
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
NOT activated.
By selecting this feature the
By selecting this feature, the system
· Front ParkSense Volume
rear-view mirrors automatically fold
will automatically activate the
When this feature is selected, the
when the vehicle is locked by the
windshield wipers if the rain sensor
chime volume of front park assist
key fob and when the power
senses moisture on the windshield.
sensors can be set to "Low",
liftgate (if equipped) is closed and
The feature can be set to "On" or
"Medium" or "High" level.
locked by pressing the button on
"Off".
"Medium" is the default setting.
the outer ledge of the left boot
· Hill Start Assist
The system will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Rear ParkSense Volume When this feature is selected, the
compartment lining. When the vehicle and the liftgate will be unlocked and the ignition device is set in RUN position, the rear-view mirrors will automatically open in the position they had before the
This feature allows you to disable
the HSA system. The feature can be
set to "On" or "Off". See "Brake
and Stability Control System" in
section "Driving" for further details.
4
chime volume of rear park assist sensors can be set to "Low", "Medium" or "High" level. "Medium" is the default setting. The system will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
By selecting this feature the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse). The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
lock.
If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfold to reactivate the automatic behave.
· ParkView Backup Camera Delay
By selecting this feature, when the shift lever is moved out of R (Reverse), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), or the transmission is shifted into P (Park) or the ignition device is switched to the OFF position. The feature can be
Lights
Press the "Lights" soft-key to set the following modes.
· Headlight Off Delay
By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlight off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the engine is shut off. To change the current headlight off delay status, touch and release the "0", "30", "60" or "90" soft-key to select the desired time range.
set to "On" or "Off".
203
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
"Understanding the Vehicle" for
· Auto Door Locks
further information.
When this feature is selected, all
· Headlight Dip (Traffic Changeover) (if equipped)
doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is in motion. The feature
By selecting this feature, the
can be set to "On" or "Off".
headlights will change their light
distribution when a left-hand-drive
vehicle enter a Country with
right-hand-drive system and vice
· Headlight Illumination on Approach
versa. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
4
By selecting this feature, the driver · Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can choose to have the headlight off
or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
By selecting and check-mark this
the doors are unlocked with the key
feature, the DRL lights will turn on
fob RKE transmitter.
whenever the engine running. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". · Auto Unlock on Exit
· Headlights with Wipers
By selecting this feature, while the headlight lever is in "AUTO" position, the headlight will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are activated. The headlight will also turn off when the wipers deactivate if they were activated in the current mode. The feature can be set to"On" or "Off".
· Auto Dim High Beams
· Adaptive Front Light
By selecting this feature, the headlights rotate following the steering wheel direction change and change their flux distribution at high speeds, when the vehicle enters an town area and when it's raining. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". See "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details.
By selecting this feature, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is open. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
· Flash Lights with Lock
By selecting this feature, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter or when using
By selecting this feature, the high beam headlight will deactivate
Doors & Locks
the Passive Entry feature. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
automatically under certain conditions. See "Lights" in section
Press the "Doors & Locks" soft-key to set the following modes.
· Sound Horn with Lock When this feature is selected, the
204
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
horn will sound when the doors are
unlock on the first press of the key · Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob
locked with the key fob RKE transmitter. You can choose from the following options: "Off" (no sound), "1st Press" (sound on the first press of the button) and "2nd Press" (sound on the second press of the button).
· Sound Horn with Remote Start
fob RKE transmitter button.
If the vehicle is programmed on "1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks":
· all doors will unlock no matter which "Passive Entry" equipped door handle is grasped;
· only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped;
This selected mode enables to combine the key fob to personal driver's position settings. These settings will be implemented when pressing the button on the key fob RKE transmitter with ignition device in RUN position.
· Power Liftgate Alert
When this feature is selected, the
· with "Passive Entry", touching the
When this feature is available, if it
horn will sound when you use the
handle more than once will only
selected, further to turn indicators
key fob RKE transmitter to start the
result in the driver's door opening.
flashing, an acoustic warning will
engine. The feature can be set to
If driver door first is selected, once
also be triggered when opening
4
"On" or "Off". See "Remote Start
the driver door is opened, the
and closing the liftgate and also
System" in section "Before Starting"
interior door lock/unlock switch can
when the fully open position of the
for further details.
be used to unlock all doors (or use
liftgate is set by the user. The
· Remote Unlock Sequence
key fob RKE transmitter).
feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
By selecting this feature you may set · Passive Entry
· Hands Free Power Liftgate
up only the driver's door or all doors mode will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE transmitter
button. When "Driver Door" is selected, you must press the key fob RKE transmitter button twice to unlock also the passenger's doors. When unlocking "All Doors" by first press selection mode, all doors will
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle door(s) without having to push the key fob RKE transmitter or buttons. By selecting this feature, "Passive Entry" may be set to "On" or "Off". The default status is "On". With "Passive Entry" deactivated, also the "Pre-Short Drop" function is
To prevent the accidental opening of the power liftgate/Hand free (optional) with the movement of the foot, it is possible to disable the "Hand Free" function. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". This operation is recommended when you have to wash the car (for further information, refer to
disabled (for further information,
"Power Liftgate Operation" in
refer to "Bodywork Maintenance
section "Before Starting").
and Care" in section "Maintenance
and Care").
205
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Auto-On Comfort & Remote
and "All Starts" (activation of this
Opening of one front doors will
Start (If equipped)
function when you start the engine
cancel this feature.
· Auto-on Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering
in all modes).
Engine Off Options
The switch-off delay can be cancelled (0 seconds) you can choose
from 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10
This feature allows to activate the
This feature allows you to set some
minutes.
comfort of the driving seat when starting the engine.
functions after turning off the engine. · Headlight Off Delay
If equipped, the driver's
· Easy Exit Seat
By selecting this feature the
heated/vented seat and/or heated
When this feature is selected, the
headlight will stay lit for up to 90
steering wheel will automatically
driver's seat will automatically move
seconds after turning off the
activate by temperatures below 40°F
rearward once the engine is shut off
engine.
4
(4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26°C) the driver vented seat
for easy exit of the vehicle. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
The switch-off delay can be cancelled (0 seconds) or reduced to
will turn on.
60 or 30 seconds.
· Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
· Remote Start
If the vehicle is equipped with the remote start system, you can choose from the following options: "Off", "Remote Start" (activation of this function when you use the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine)
· Engine Off Power Delay (Power duration after engine shutdown)
By selecting this feature, the power window switches, radio, MTC+ Phone System, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after turning off the engine.
Select this mode to automatically lower vehicle to minimum ground clearance when driver takes transmission to P (Park) to help entry into and exit from the vehicle and unloading of cargo from the boot compartment. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
Suspension
This feature allows displaying and setting the following modes of the pneumatic suspension system.
· Auto Entry/Exit Suspension Select this mode to automatically lower vehicle to minimum ground
206
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
clearance when driver takes
alignment when servicing
Adjust the settings with the "+" and
transmission to P (Park) to help entry into and exit from the vehicle
suspension and/or steering parts. The feature can be set to "On" or
"" setting soft-keys or scroll and touch the slider in any point on the
and unloading of cargo from the trunk compartment. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
"Off".
Audio
scale between the "+" and "" soft-keys.
· Warning/Suspension Warning
This feature enables to view and set
Messages Only
the available audio modes depending
Select this mode to choose whether to display only warnings (option "On"). The feature can be set to "On" or "Off".
on the type of audio system supplied on the car. The following modes refer to the "High Premium" audio system.
· Tire Change Mode/Stationary Auto · Balance/Fade
4
Leveling
Use this screen to adjust the balance
Select this mode to disable the pneumatic suspension to avoid automatic levelling, when vehicle must be lifted for changing a wheel
and fade settings. Touch and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the "C" icon to readjust to the centre.
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume combined to vehicle speed.
or tire. The feature can be set to
To change the speed adjusted
"On" or "Off".
volume touch the "Off", "1", "2" or
· Transport To Mode
"3" soft-key.
Select this mode to lower the pneumatic suspension to minimum
ride height and disable system
operation to help vehicle loading
and transport, for instance on the
platform of a tow truck. The feature
can be set to "On" or "Off".
· Wheel Alignment Mode Select this mode to prevent automatic pneumatic suspension
· Equalizer
Use this screen is used to adjust the "Bass", "Mid" and "Treb" settings.
207
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
· Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. Available settings: "On" and "Off".
Phone/Bluetooth
· Paired Phones
4
Press this soft-key to select and connect phones and audio sources.
· Clari-Fi
This function improves the audio quality by enhancing digitally compressed source files such as MP3 and AAC files and certain music tracks played by radio stations. In case of high-definition source files like the ones on a CD, Clari-Fi shall apply no enhancement. Clari-Fi intervention is completely automatic. The feature can be set "On" or "Off".
· Auto Play
· Do Not Disturb
Settings available for this feature: Auto Reply
To change the mode status, touch the "Text", "Call" or "Both" soft-key. Auto Reply Message To change the mode status, touch the "Custom" or "Default" soft-key. Customize Auto Reply Message This feature allows you to customise the "Auto Reply Message". Text messages are
By selecting this feature you will be notified which phones are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system.
For each option, you can also add a one or more devices: for further information, see the MTC+ guide.
When a portable device is connected
limited to 160 characters (key pad
via USB port to MTC+ system, it
is not available while vehicle is it
plays automatically the songs if this
motion).
feature is set to "On".
208
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
would like to skip followed by
On the Maserati website, at
pressing the arrow soft-key.
www.maserati.com, or through an
· Subscription Information
Authorized Maserati Dealer you may
SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires a
consult the list of telephones that are
user-paid subscription to access
compatible with the MTC+, and their
these stations.
level of compatibility.
It will be necessary to access the
SiriusXM Setup
information on the Subscription Information Screen in order to
· Paired Audio Sources
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" soft-key the following settings will be
subscribe. Touch the Subscription Info soft key
By selecting this feature you will be notified which audio source are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth
available. · Tune Start
to access your receiver ID number.
Write down the SiriusXM ID
4
numbers for your radio. To activate
system.
"Tune Start" begins playing the
SiriusXM service, either call the
For each option, you can also add a
current song from the beginning
number listed on the screen or visit
device and change the PIN code of
when you tune to a music channel,
SiriusXM online at
the device you wish to connect. For
so you can enjoy the complete song.
www.siriusxm.com/subscriptions or
further information, see the MTC+
"Tune Start" works in the
call the number listed.
guide.
background, so you will not even
· Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your
When this mode is selected a
favorite song with only a few
pop-up message will appear in case
seconds left to play.
of incoming call. Information associated to call in progress are
· Channel Skip
available by entering to the
SiriusXM can be programmed to
"Audio" menu using the buttons on
designate a group of channels that
the steering wheel RH side.
are the most desirable to listen to or
to exclude undesirable channels
while scanning. To make your
selection, touch the Channel Skip
soft-key, select the channels you
209
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Restore Settings
Dashboard Compartment
When this feature is selected, it will reset the "Display", "Clock", "Audio", and "Radio Settings" to their default settings.
There is a glove box compartment on the passenger side of the dashboard to store small items or documents.
Run this feature and a pop-up will
appear asking user to confirm default
settings resetting. Select "Yes" to
WARNING!
restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the Do not operate the vehicle with a
settings are restored, a pop-up appears glove compartment lid in the open
confirming that settings have been
position. Cellular phones, music
In the compartment there is a location
reset to default and then the MTC+
players, and other handheld electronic to hold the Owner's documentation.
4
will restart.
devices should be stowed while
Inside the door there are
driving. Use of these devices while
compartments for storing glasses and
Clear Personal Data
driving could cause an accident due to small items.
When this feature is selected, it will
distraction.
remove personal data concerning
settings and/or options that have been
modified compared to factory settings
CAUTION!
and will also remove from system
Do not place objects weighing over
memory Bluetooth devices and presets. 22 lb (10 kg) in the glove box
To remove personal information, select compartment.
this feature and a pop-up will appear asking confirmation to delete all personal data. Select "OK" to clear, or
To open the glove box, pull the handle as shown in the picture.
"Cancel" to exit. Once the data have been cleared, a pop up appears confirming that personal data have been cleared and then the MTC+ will restart.
The compartment is illuminated by a courtesy light when open (the light will automatically switch off when the compartment is closed). Under the courtesy light there are two
USB inputs for charging the connected
source (see "Interior Features" in
210
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details).
NOTE:
· "Glove Box Mode" and "Valet Mode" can not be activated at the same time.
· "Glove Box Mode" and "Valet
Mode" lock features must be
activated when the glove box is
already closed. If you activated one
of these lock features when the
glove box is opened, the glove box will not close properly and will not
With ADAS
lock
· Checkmarked one of the two
Privacy Lock Features
Activation Procedure
features (the figures shows "Glove
4
Box Mode" feature only) and touch
The glove box is equipped with an opening/closing electric actuator that can be locked and unlocked via the
· Open "Controls" screen and touch "Privacy Lock" soft-key.
the soft-key to activate the feature.
"Privacy Lock" menu of the MTC+, by
entering a 4-digit PIN code. When you
have to leave the vehicle to another
driver (for eaxample, to park it), the
"Valet Mode" feature is available in
the same menu. This feature, in
addition to the glove box, allows you
to lock your settings for listening and
guidance. It is important to memorise and take note of the PIN since if it is lost, you must contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer that will reset this feature.
Without ADAS
· Using the keypad, enter the four digits of the PIN and touch "OK". The system prompts you re-enter the PIN code to confirm it.
211
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
Glove box is now locked and the MTC+ Unlock glove box by entering the lock
· If you do not enter all PIN digits, a
will go back to "Controls" page. In this code as previously specified.
4
prompt will indicate that you should condition, the system operation is
Glove Box Manual Unlock
do so.
reduced and only "Climate",
· In case of an incoming call while entering the PIN, the MTC+ system
"Controls" and "Settings" features are active.
If battery is dead, it is necessary to manually work the actuator on the LH side of the glove box to unlock the
will temporarily stop the release
Deactivation Procedure
glove box that has been locked using
function. As soon as the call is over,
To unlock the glove box which it was
the PIN code.
the keypad screen will be displayed again so that you can enter the PIN.
locked with PIN code, touch "Controls" · Proceed carefully and start with the
soft-key on the status bar and then
central part, indicated by the arrows
· When the next page shown in figure "Privacy Lock" soft-key to enter this
in the figure, and remove the
appears, touch "OK".
page.
dashboard molding beneath and on
· Touch the soft-key to deactivate the
the sides of the climate control
feature (the figure shows "Glove Box panel. This molding is fastened by
Mode" feature only).
means of 10 pins (indicated in the
figure) press-fitted onto clips present
in dashboard structure.
212
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Dealer to have unlock feature via PIN code checked.
· After removing the molding, take
the screwdriver from the tool kit
under trunk mat (see "Tool kit" in
4
section "In an Emergency").
· Insert screwdriver tip inside the hole on LH side of glove box structure: push until home against actuator pin.
· Push down screwdriver tip to release actuator pin and manually unlock the glove box. The actuator will remain in this condition until battery feed is restored.
Inner Section · Reinstall the molding ensuring that
pins match with the clips of dashboard structure.
· Press on the molding, always starting from the central part until all 10 pins are engaged in their clips and "click" in place.
After releasing the glove box by means of this procedure, do not lock glove box using the PIN code and contact an Authorized Maserati
213
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Analog Clock
Air Conditioning Controls passengers using the soft-keys on
MTC+ display.
To adjust the analog clock located on the center of the dashboard between
The vehicle is equipped with an automatic dual-zone air conditioning
Dual Zone Climate Controls
the air outlets, use the MTC+ System
system that allows to adjust separately This system can be operated by using
(see "MTC+ Settings" in this section).
the temperature and the airflow
the controls of the climate control
distribution in the left and in the right panel on the dashboard, or the
zone of the passenger compartment, according to the requests of the driver and the front passenger.
soft-keys on the MTC+ display when "Climate" mode is selected. In the "Climate" screen of the MTC+,
A humidity sensor, positioned on the inner surface of the windshield, over
the front seats comfort setting soft-keys may be present (optional
4
the rear view mirror, allows the A/C
equipments). The "OFF" state of the
system to prevent/eliminate fogging of front seats comfort setting is shown on
the windshield and side windows. The best efficacy in preventing
their soft-key.
The time can be displayed also on the MTC+ main menu bar and on the instrument cluster display (see "MTC+ Settings" in this section). Clock lighting works in the same way as instrument and controls backlighting (refer to "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle").
fogging is obtained by selecting the "AUTO" function, described later. A dual zone solar sensor helps to achieve the best comfort in presence of solar radiation. Upon request, the vehicle can be equipped with an additional automatic dual-zone air conditioning system installed in the central console,
between the front seats. The
additional dual-zone module, can be Front seats and steering wheel comfort
operated by the rear passengers (see setting soft-keys are present even
"Four-zone Climate Control
when the A/C is off (see "Front Seats"
(optional)" in this chapter), by means and/or "Steering Wheel Adjustment"
of the control panel at the end of
in section "Understanding the Vehicle"
central console, but also by the front for further details).
214
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" ("Radio", "Media", "Controls", etc.) the settings of driver and passenger temperature and air flow distribution will be indicated on the upper part of the display together with the active front seats and steering wheel comfort functions.
1. Climate control on/off
Once you enter the screen "Climate",
touch the "ON" soft-key to switch the
4
climate control on/off. If the A/C
system has been turned off,
temperature values in the upper status
bar will be obscured in all MTC+
modes.
Description of Controls
All described functions can be set and modified using the climate control panel or the MTC+ display.
To adjust driver and passenger side temperature and fan speed, climate control panel features rocker switches that can be pushed up to increase temperature/speed, or down to decrease them. When MTC+ is in any mode other than "Climate", pressing an air distribution or blower hard control on the climate control panel a small pop-up will appear for three seconds above the "Climate" icon on the main bar.
The "OFF" soft-key will appear when the A/C is on.
215
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
You can increase or decrease the
paragraph "Dual zone Climate Control
For vehicles equipped with Remote
temperature using the rocker switch
Start, the Air Conditioning System will on the climate control panel.
Functions" in this chapter. 6. Blower control
not function during Remote Start operation if the climate control is left in "OFF".
2. A/C
NOTE:
In "SYNC" mode, this control will also automatically and simultaneously adjust the passenger temperature.
Blower control is used to adjust the amount of air forced through the climate system. Eight levels of blower speed can be selected. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to
4
Touch the "A/C" soft-key to change the current air conditioning setting; the soft-key illuminates when the A/C is on. Operating this function will cause the automatic feature to switch into manual mode and the "AUTO" LED on the buttons and MTC+ soft-key will turn off.
4. Passenger temperature control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Touch the soft-key for cooler temperature. Touch the soft-key for warmer temperature. The passenger's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC+ screen between the
switch to manual. On the climate control panel, push the rocker switch up to increase fan speed. Push the rocker switch down to decrease fan speed. Pushing down the rocker switch when set blower is at the first speed, causes the A/C system shutdown (OFF condition).
3. Driver temperature control
soft-keys and .
On the MTC+ display, touch the small
Provides the driver with independent You can increase or decrease the
icon of the blower to decrease the
temperature control. Touch the blue
temperature using the rocker switch
speed, or the big icon to increase it.
soft-key for cooler temperature. Touch the red soft-key for warmer
on the climate control panel.
Between the two icons, bars will appear to show the number of the
temperature. The driver's temperature NOTE:
corresponding selected speed.
setting will be displayed on the MTC+ Pressing the 4 button/soft-key while in The blower can also be activated/
between the soft-key and . The MTC+ display can also be used to
"SYNC" mode will automatically exit "SYNC".
regulated by touching the bars between the two blower icons.
adjust the temperature by touching and sliding the bar towards soft-key
, to increase temperature, or towards soft-keys to decrease it.
5. Recirculation Press to change the current setting, the LED indicator on the button and
When the MTC+ is displayed in any mode other than "Climate", the blower speed is indicated by the bright segments in the climate icon.
During this phase, a small pop-up on the side will show the corresponding temperature.
the relevant soft-key illuminates to indicate which recirculation function is activated. For further details, see
7-8. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting
216
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
the air flow rate and the air
LED on the button and the MTC+
· Keep all objects inside the vehicle at
distribution respectively on the driver soft-key illuminated).
a safe distance from the window.
and on the passenger zone. Press "AUTO" to switch the ATC between manual and automatic mode. The LED on the button and the "AUTO" soft-key illuminates when the "AUTO" function is activated. See "Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)" in this chapter for more information.
10. REAR defrosting/demisting Press the button or the MTC+ soft-key to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors. The LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key will illuminate when the rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors are on.
11. MAX A/C By pressing the "MAX A/C" button ot the MTC+ soft-key, the system automatically switches to get the maximum cold air flow in both zones.
12-13 Air flow distribution modes The airflow distribution mode,
9. MAX defrosting/demisting
The rear window defroster and the
respectively on the driver and on the
Press the button or the MTC+
heated external mirrors automatically passenger zone, can be adjusted so air
soft-key to switch the airflow setting to the windshield and the front side
turn off after 10 minutes.
comes from the dashboard vents,
4
vents under the dashboard in
windows to get quick defrosting/ defogging. The LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key illuminates when
CAUTION! Failure to observe the following
direction of the floor, vents under the front seats and demist/defrost vents. The MTC+ display contains the
this feature is activated. Operating this function will cause the ATC to
cautions may cause damage to the rear windows defroster:
relevant soft-keys used to set these modes for each zone. The climate
switch into manual mode: so the "AUTO" LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key will turn off. With engine off, the blower will run at
· Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a
control panel features a single button for each zone: press it several times to select and set the required airflow distribution mode.
minimum speed (1) and can be increased manually: with engine on, the blower speed will gradually increase to the higher speed (8). MAX defrosting/demisting shall also involve REAR defrosting/demisting function. If this function is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting, switching on the A/C ("A/C"
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
· Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Available settings are as follows: · "Floor" mode
Air for each zone comes from the front vents, located under the dashboard and under the front seats. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging.
217
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
· "Dashboard" mode
· "Mix" mode
15. "REAR" mode
Air flows for each zone from four
Air for each zone comes from the
This soft-key is present only if the
adjustable vents of the dashboard, two vents on the upper part of the dashboard and two positioned at the rear end of the central console. Each of these vents can be singly
defrost/demist vent, the vent under the dashboard and from floor vent. This mode is recommended for cold climates, to improve comfort and prevent windows fogging.
vehicle is equipped with the additional dual-zone air conditioning system for rear passengers. Touching "REAR" soft-key you enter the screen where the settings available for rear seat
adjusted. The air grids or vanes of
· "Hi-Level" mode
passengers are displayed. For the
the vents can be moved to adjust air flow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to
Air for each zone comes from the dashboard defrost/demist vents, from the dashboard and central
description of these controls, see paragraph "Four-Zone Climate Controls (optional)" of this chapter.
regulate or close the airflow.
console adjustable vents and the
Dual Zone Climate Control
4
· "Bi-Level" mode
fixed floor vents.
Functions
Air for each zone comes from the dashboard and central console adjustable vents and the fixed floor vents. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging.
· "Tri-Level" mode
Air for each zone comes from all the adjustable/fixed and defrost/demist vents.
14. "SYNC" mode Touch the "SYNC" soft-key on the MTC+ to switch the Sync feature
Air Conditioning (A/C) The "A/C" soft-key allows to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the vents into the cabin. For improved fuel
NOTE:
on/off. The "SYNC" soft-key
economy, touch the "A/C" soft-key to
Bi-Level mode is designed to let cooler air come in the dashboard and rear part of the central console vents and warmer air from the floor vents.
illuminates when this feature is selected. This function is used to synchronise the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. When the "A/C" and "AUTO" functions are switched off it is not
· "Defrost" mode
Air for each zone comes from the dashboard defrost/demist vents to
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in "SYNC" will automatically exit this feature.
possible to have air at a lower temperature than the outside.
prevent windows fogging.
218
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Recirculation
and Air Quality
button or the MTC+ soft-key
Sensor (AQS)
change the state as follows.
When outside air contains smoke,
· First press: the A/C system activates
odours, or high humidity, or if rapid
the automatic recirculation control
cooling is desired, you may wish to
by using the signal transmitted from
recirculate interior air by pressing the
the AQS. The symbol `'A'' on the
recirculation control button or the
button and the MTC+ soft-key
relevant soft-key to activate the two
lights up.
different functionalities.
The recirculation function, that allows · Second press: the A/C system
to open/close the A/C air inlet by
operating the
button on the
activates the recirculation, the LED
on the
button or the MTC+
climate control panel or the MTC+ soft-key, is integrated with the Air
soft-key lights up. The A/C system will stay this way up to a new
4
Quality Sensor. This sensor, positioned upstream of
actuation, or until the increased humidity could lead to windshield
the A/C filter, in front of the air intake
fogging: in this case the recirculation
of the A/C system, detects the
automatically switches to external
presence of polluting substances and
air.
submits an electric signal to the A/C
· Third press: the A/C system switches
control unit, that closes the intake of
back to external air (default
the external air by activating the air
operating mode).
NOTE:
recirculation.
The
button or the MTC+ soft-key
can therefore enable three operating
The next press of the
button or
the MTC+ soft-key restars the
operating cycle just described.
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to window fogging. Select the MIX mode and increase
modes, switchable in sequence.
NOTE:
the blower speed to prevent fogging.
Starting from the outside air condition with LED on the button off and MTC+ soft-key not highlighted, in which the external air is aspirated by the A/C
To avoid the risk of fogging, the AQS is disabled when the external temperature falls below 35°F (2°C).
MAX A/C Activating this function, the system switches to exit "AUTO", enter "A/C"
system and treated to be introduced
and recirculation. The minimum
into the passenger compartment,
temperature (LO) in both zones, the
subsequent actuations of the
maximum blower speed and the
219
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
"Dashboard" air distribution mode
· Set the desired temperature
are also selected.
adjusting the driver and/or passenger
The blower speed can be adjusted and temperature control buttons or
the air distribution can be modified without exiting "MAX A/C". To exit
soft-keys. The system automatically work to maintain the best comfort
"MAX A/C" touch the relevant MTC+ soft-key or exit A/C or recirculation.
level inside the passengers compartment.
· When the system is set up for your
comfort level, it is not necessary to
change the settings anymore, simply
allow the system to function automatically.
· To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode,
4
during cold start-ups the blower
speed will remain low until the
engine warms up.
Selecting , "AUTO", or "OFF", will also exit "MAX A/C".
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic operation
· Press the "AUTO" soft-key of driver and/or passenger zone on the climate control panel or the relevant soft-key button on the MTC+ screen. The text "AUTO" will appear inside the space usually occupied by the bars between the blower icons.
Manual operation The system allows manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by using the blower control. In this case the blower will operate at a fixed speed until a different speed is selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle exiting the "AUTO" mode. The user can also choose the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation, recirculation control and
220
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
"SYNC" mode can also be manually selected.
temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons.
Four-Zone Climate Controls (optional)
5. Blower control Blower control is used to regulate the airflow of the rear climate system.
Air conditioning controls that allow
There are seven blower speeds
rear passengers to adjust the
available. Adjusting the blower will
temperature in the left and right rear
cause the automatic mode to switch to
part of the passenger compartment
manual.
are located at the rear end of the
Press the "+" button to increase
central console underneath the
2. A/C
blower speed.
adjustable air outlets.
Press to change the current air
Press the "-" button for lower speed.
conditioning (A/C) setting, the "A/C"
Airflow distribution modes
4
symbol on the button illuminates
The airflow distribution can be
when the A/C is on. This will cause the adjusted to let air come in from the
automatic operation to switch into
adjustable and fixed central console
manual mode and the "AUTO"
vents and floor vents. The set mode is
indicator will turn off.
recognizable through the lighting of
3. Left side temperature control
the softkey or the LED on the button
Provides the rear passengers with
of the climate control panel.
Description of Controls
The following functions can be operated/adjusted by using the rear climate control panel.
independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons.
6. "Bi-Level" mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the rear central console and from the fixed ones on the lateral sides of the central console directed to the floor.
1. Rear climate control on/off Press the button to switch the rear climate control on/off. The LED on the button turns on when the rear A/C is on.
4. Right side temperature control Provides the rear seats passengers with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set
221
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
· Adjust then the temperature you
Once you have entered the rear
The Bi-Level mode is designed to
wish to maintain by regulating the climate screen, by touching the
provide comfort by sending cooler air
left and/or right side temperature
following soft-keys, the driver is able
out of the central console vents and
control buttons. Once the desired
to:
warmer air from the floor vents.
temperature is set, the system will
1. The A/C compressor shell turn on.
achieve and automatically maintain
7. "Floor" mode
that comfort level.
2. The system controls the interior temperature (controls 3, 4) by
Air comes from the fixed floor vents
· When the system is set up for your
adjusting the air flow rate and
under the front seats and on the
comfort level, it is not necessary to
the air distribution (controls 5) of
4
lateral sides of the central console.
8. "Torso" mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the central console. Each of these
change the settings anymore: simply allow the system to function automatically. To provide you with maximum comfort
the rear passengers.
3. Adjust the temperature in the left rear zone.
vents can be singly adjusted. The air
in the Automatic mode, during cold
4. Adjust the temperature in the
grids of the vents can be moved
start-ups the blower speed will remain
right rear zone.
up/down and right/left to adjust the
low until the engine warms up.
5. Set the airflow distribution mode.
airflow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate the airflow or to close the vent.
Four-Zone Climate Control by the Driver
By operating the MTC+ display controls the driver can adjust the
6. Synchronise the two rear passenger temperature setting. If the driver adjust the temperature while SYNC mode is on, this will
9. AUTO
settings of the rear climate zones by
affect the rear passenger
This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting
touching "REAR" sof-key.
temperature. If the front or rear passengers adjust the
the air flow rate and the air distribution.
· Press the "AUTO" button: the automatic rear climate control switches from manual to automatic
temperature setting the system automatically break the function and turn it off.
7. Set the blower speed through seven speed levels.
mode and vice-versa. The "AUTO"
8. Re-activate the rear climate
symbol on the button illuminates
setting.
when this function is activated.
9. Turn off the rear climate option.
222
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
10. Block the settings of the rear climate.
11. Return to the front climate control screen.
· Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by fast defrosting/defogging. The "Mix" mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide
such as leaves or other objects. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter make sure
sufficient heating. If side window
the air intake is clear of ice, slush,
fogging becomes a problem increase and snow.
blower speed.
· The temperature can be displayed in
NOTE:
Metric or U.S. units by selecting the
"Units" customer programmable
· Recirculation mode without A/C
feature. See "MTC+ Settings" in this
should not be used for long periods
section.
of time, as fogging may occur.
· Any time you store your vehicle or
· If inside the passenger compartment
keep it stationary (i.e., during
4
there are conditions of high
vacation) for two weeks or more,
temperature and humidity, when the run the air conditioning system at
A/C compressor is switched on (A/C
idle for about five minutes in the
softkey illuminated on MTC+ display
fresh air by high blower setting. This
or LED on climate control panel A/C
will ensure adequate system
button ON) there may be some cold
lubrication and minimize the
steam at ventilation port outlet: this
possibility of compressor damage
situation is normal and does not
when the system is started again.
indicate air conditioning system
malfunction.
A/C Filter
Operating Tips
· Continuous use of the air recirculation in winter, in rainy weather or humid climate is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
· Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
· Make sure the external air intake grille, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally removed by A/C filter at the entrance of the air climate system. See "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care" for filter replacement instructions.
223
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel
The commands on the right side of the steering wheel activate/deactivate the phone mode ( ) and the Voice Recognition ( ) controls functions.
The voice command communication system is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume can be adjusted from the upper knob on the central console (see "Infotainment System" in this section or from the steering wheel radio controls (see "Audio Controls" in this
Phone Mode
By using the phone button on the steering wheel it is possible to: activate the phone mode, start a call, show recent incoming and outgoing calls, show contacts list, etc.
section).
The system will automatically mute the
radio when using the phone mode.
When activating the phone mode
4
using voice commands with speakerphone, you should talk quietly
in a normal conversational tone by
keeping the driving position and
turning to the microphone of the voice
command system located inside of the
These functions are only available
internal rear-view mirror.
when one or more Bluetooth®
The ability of the system voice control
compatible mobile phones are paired to recognize the user's voice
with the MTC+ System connection: to commands can be invalidated when
pair a phone and to learn all available speaking too quickly or too loudly.
functions refer to the MTC+ guide.
NOTE:
On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through an Authorized Maserati Dealer you may consult the list of telephones that are compatible with the MTC+, and their level of compatibility.
WARNING!
Any voice-controlled system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable regulations. Full attention should be kept on driving.
All these functions can also be reached by using the touch screen commands on the MTC+ display in "Phone" mode.
224
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Voice Commands
it may be possible to send messages,
By using voice commands, after pressing the VR button on the
make phone calls, create notes and reminders, etc.
steering wheel, it is possible to control
the AM, FM radio, SiriusXM satellite
radio and all devices connected and
managed by the "Media" mode (i.e.
SD card, USB/iPod player).
When pressing the VR button an
acoustic signal will invite to give a
When pressing the phone button
voice command.
an audible sound will invite you to
impart a command.
NOTE:
4
Information on incoming call is
For further details refer to the
indicated in a pop-up on instrument
Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)
cluster display main area if this feature guide.
is checkmarked on MTC+ (see "MTC+
Settings" in this section). Said information will stay displayed until a control is executed (e.g.: answer, reject, etc.) for the incoming call. The screen will only display the phone number or name of caller (if available) as long as this complies with system specifications in terms of font and number of characters. Call details can be displayed at any time through "Audio" submenu item, then "Phone: call details" using the buttons on steering wheel RH side. On display, said details shall temporarily replace the ones on media source in use.
Siri Smart Personal Assistant
When a compatible iPhone or iPad that supports Siri voice recognition is paired to the vehicle via Bluetooth® , a long press of the VR button activates the Siri Smart Personal Assistant. When you use MTC+ display as projection device (mirroring function) a short press is sufficient. Siri requires mobile internet access and its functionality might change depending on the geographical area. Through simple voice commands, without taking your eyes off the road,
225
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
226
5 Driving
Normal Starting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Automatic Start&Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Active Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Off-Road Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Forward Collision Warning FCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Blind Spot Assist BSA (without ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . 310 Highway Assist HAS (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Traffic Sign Assist TSA (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Tires - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
227
Driving
Normal Starting of the Engine
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
CAUTION!
WARNING!
It is dangerous to run the engine in an enclosed area. The engine consumes oxygen and discharges carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gases in the atmosphere.
When doors are opened, the instrument cluster displays the Maserati Logo in the center and the complete odometer plus the open doors indicator in the lower part of the cluster.
· Before starting the engine, switch off the electrical devices with a high power consumption (air-conditioning and heating system, heated rear window, headlights, etc.).
· Do not start the engine if the fuel level in the tank is low.
The keyless ignition allows the driver
to operate the ignition switch by
pushing the center button, as long as
WARNING!
the key fob RKE transmitter is within
California Proposition 65
the passenger compartment (check
5
Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
"Keys" in section "Before Starting" for further information).
can expose you to chemicals including
By pressing the brake pedal and
such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to:
Before starting the engine, close the doors, adjust your seat, the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt and instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear (see "Automatic Transmission" in this section).
pushing the START/STOP button the engine starts. Instrument cluster displays the initial sequence with indicator light and analog instruments test routine and switch-on of the engine temperature indicators and fuel level. This happens if option "On" was set in screen settings for display switch-on (see chapter "Instrument cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
228
Driving
NOTE:
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC
warm engine is obtained without
or RUN (engine not running) position
pumping or pressing the accelerator
and the transmission is in P (Park), the
pedal.
system will automatically time out
If the driver only pushes the START/STOP button but does not press the brake pedal, the ignition switch
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
cycles to the ACC position (see "Keys" After starting the engine, the idle
The current display subsequently sets up with the latest screenshot.
in section "Before Starting") and the instrument cluster displays the latest screenshot. At the second press of the
speed is controlled automatically and will decrease as the engine warms up.
Engine Start Failure
START/STOP button, the ignition
device switches to RUN position (see
"Keys" in section "Before Starting")
WARNING!
and the instrument cluster displays the · Do not attempt to push or tow your
5
latest screenshot.
vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
At the third press of the START/STOP
equipped with an automatic
button the ignition switch returns to
transmission cannot be started this
OFF position and the display powers
way.
If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to starting it, press the button again.
down. At the fourth press of the START/STOP button the screen will display the message that invites you to press the brake pedal and push the START/STOP button to start the engine.
· If the vehicle battery is dead, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. See "Auxiliary
Jump Start Procedure" in section "In
an Emergency" for further
information.
229
Driving
Starting with a Cold Engine Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden acceleration and rev the engine up at low medium speeds. Highperformance driving should be avoided until the engine temperature reaches 149-158°F (65-70°C).
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to OFF position.
Automatic Start&Stop System
The Maserati Start&Stop system allows the engine to automatically switch off when the vehicle stops and to restart when the driver intends to drive. This
Engine Turn-Off
Engine Turn Off when in Automatic
feature helps reduce fuel consumption. During the "Stop
· With the shift lever in P (Park), D (Drive) or R (Reverse) positions (see
Start&Stop
(AutoStop)" phase the ignition is still
When the engine has been turned off on and all security features are
"Automatic Transmission" in this section) and vehicle standstill, press
by the Start&Stop system, press and release the START/STOP button. The
available. In order for the Start&Stop to activate,
and release the START/STOP button to switch off the engine. A burst on
ignition switch will return to the OFF position and the vehicle is off.
the vehicle must be stationary and the brake pedal adequately pressed.
the accelerator pedal before turning
5
off the engine has no purpose and "Panic Stop" Strategy
increases fuel consumption.
In panic conditions, if driver stops
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not sufficiently
· If the shift lever is in N (Neutral) and engine in any non-standard manner
the START/STOP button is pressed
while driving at a speed over 5 mph
pressed the Start&Stop may not function even if the vehicle is stopped.
once, the instrument cluster will display a "Vehicle Not in Park" message and the engine will remain running.
WARNING!
(8 km/h), the "Panic Stop" strategy can manage the situation by checking gearchange condition upon engine cutting, driver's action on brakes, road condition (flat or slope) so as to set gearchange to the most suitable condition.
When the Start&Stop switches off the engine, the related light
illuminates on the instrument cluster. As soon as the brake pedal is released, the engine turns on. While the vehicle is stopped, the
Never leave a vehicle out of the P
transmission can be placed in P (Park)
(Park) position, as it could move.
pressing the "P" button on the shift
lever.
In this case it is possible to release the
brake pedal and the vehicle will
230
Driving
remain in "AutoStop" with engine off. "Controls" page (see "MTC+
· When the vehicle is maneuvering:
Pressing the brake pedal and shifting
"Controls" Screen" in section
shift lever in R (Reverse).
transmission into D (Drive) or R (Reverse) will deactivate the "AutoStop" condition and restart the engine.
"Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
Start&Stop Not Active
For keeping driving safety, interior comfort and a correct functioning of engine and vehicle, the Start&Stop function does not activate under the following conditions:
· When the driver's seat belt is unbuckled (see example in picture).
· When the temperature conditions inside the vehicle do not correspond to the air conditioning setting.
· When the front and rear "defroster" function is activated.
· When the engine coolant and the engine oil temperature are not on proper functioning level.
· When the external temperature is too cold.
· When the battery charge is below
safety value.
· When the previous stop had just
Start&Stop Deactivated
happened (few seconds) and the
5
minimum speed has not yet been
Start&Stop function is deactivated
achieved.
under the following conditions:
· Shortly after R (Reverse) has been set
· When SPORT drive mode is activated.
· When (ESC OFF) drive mode is activated.
or when driving under a certain speed level.
· When the hood is open.
· When ride height is set to Off Road 1 or Off Road 2.
· If it has been disabled through the main menu item "Start & Stop" via the controls on the right side of the steering wheel (see chapter "Instrument cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and
· When the driver door is open.
· When the fuel level is too low.
· When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep road.
· When the vehicle is stopped with steered wheels (over 135° of steering wheel angle for each part).
· The sensors managing the Start&Stop have been damaged.
· Start&Stop system faults are present.
· When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and/or Highway Assist (HAS) system are engaged.
Controls") or via the MTC+ in the
231
Driving
Automatic Restarting of the
· When the accelerator pedal is being Move the shift lever to D (Drive) to
Engine
pressed (together with the brake
drive away.
The engine may automatically restart, before the brake pedal has been released, when one of the following
pedal).
· If a long time has passed since the last automatic stop of the engine.
WARNING!
conditions occurs:
Occupants Safety Function
· Even when the vehicle is stopped in the "Stop (AutoStop)" phase, the
· The SPORT drive mode or (ESC
To enhance occupants safety, the
driver is responsible for the vehicle
OFF) drive mode is being activated.
Start&Stop system monitors if the
and the occupants and shall take
· If the Start&Stop function has been driver is present and does not allow
care of what happens inside and
disabled through the main menu
automatic restarting of the engine if
outside the vehicle.
voice "Start & Stop" (see chapter "Instrument cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") or via MTC+ in the "Controls" page (see "MTC+
one of the following maneuvers is being performed while in "AutoStop" condition:
· The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt
· Even when the vehicle is stopped within the "Stop (AutoStop)" phase, the vehicle driver is responsible for the vehicle, the vehicle's occupants
5
"Controls "Screen" in the section "Dashboard Instruments and
and releases the brake pedal. · The driver opens the door and
and the vehicle's surrounding area. Never leave the vehicle unattended
Controls").
releases the brake pedal.
with the engine running; doing so
· If shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).
· If the steering wheel is moved to steer the wheels.
· The driver unbuckles the seat belt and opens the door.
· The driver opens the hood.
poses a risk of danger. It is a good practice to always ensure to set the parking brake and place the transmission gear selector lever into
· When the temperature conditions inside the vehicle do not correspond
All the above-mentioned conditions deactive the Start&Stop function (the
the P (Park) position, thereby ensuring the vehicle will not move,
to the air conditioning setting.
"AutoStart" is deactivated and the
when performing any vehicle checks,
· When changing the temperature setting on the air conditioning.
engine remains off) and the transmission shift automatically in P (Park).
maintenance and/or service procedures on the vehicle.
· When the defroster function is being The telltale will flash to indicate
activated.
the Start&Stop function disabling. To
Start&Stop Function Disabling
· When the battery charge is below
restart the engine it is necessary to
Under certain driving conditions, when
safety value.
press the brake pedal and push the
frequent stops and restarts of the
START/STOP button.
engine may become annoying, it is
232
Driving
possible to turn off the Start&Stop function. Use the controls located on the right side of the steering wheel (see instructions in chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") and select "Start & Stop" main menu item which displays the status of the function: Start & Stop enabled is the default status. Hold the switch ( ) to change the status of the function. When the Start&Stop function is turned off, in addition to the related message the amber indicator
indicated in the picture will turn on.
· Touch the "Start & Stop Off" soft-key to disable the function.
Without ADAS
· Touch the (Apps) soft-key on the lower part of MTC+ display.
· Touch the "Start & Stop Off" soft-key to disable the function.
To quickly disable the Start&Stop
function, you can insert it in the main menu bar, at the bottom of the MTC+
5
display, as follows:
With ADAS · Touch a second time the same
soft-key to re-enable the function.
· press button to open applications/settings screen;
· hold depressed and drag the "Start & Stop Off" icon until it overlaps the one to be replaced on the bottom bar.
Another way to disable the Start & Stop is via the MTC+.
· Touch the "Controls" soft-key on the lower part of MTC+ display.
NOTE:
The highlighted soft-key indicates the disabled status of Start & Stop system and vice versa.
233
Driving
Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") there is a
Automatic Transmission
malfunction in the Start&Stop system The vehicle is equipped with an
and the engine cannot be switched off electronically controlled 8-speed
and restarted automatically. To switch automatic transmission, which
off or restart the engine it is necessary automatically changes gear according
to push the START/STOP. Have the
to the vehicle's instantaneous usage
vehicle checked at an Authorized
parameters (vehicle speed, road
Maserati Dealer.
gradient and accelerator pedal
position).
Once it is set in the menu bar, the new menu will be immediately operational.
It is possible to change gear manually thanks to the "M +/-" (Manual) position for the shift lever.
NOTE:
The electronic shift lever replaces the
The yellow LED on the button
indicates the disabled status of
5
Start&Stop system and vice versa.
If the driving conditions allow it, the user can re-enable the Start&Stop
conventional mechanical lever and has no mechanical connection to the transmission. The transmission is operated by electrical actuators on the hydraulic system and all commands to the control system are transmitted by
function at any time using one of previous ways.
the CAN network. The lever itself represents a mere user interface. Gear
NOTE:
After user intervention, the Start&Stop system will automatically update the status of the function in all contexts where it can be modified.
positions are simulated by solenoids inside the lever body, which are computer-controlled and enable or disable certain positions of the lever. The solenoids inside the shift lever prevent the movement of the lever
Start&Stop System Failure
towards invalid positions. The electronically-controlled
When the indicator light and the related message illuminate on the TFT display (see chapter "Instrument
transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating, therefore the
234
Driving
gearshift behaviour could become perfect as expected after few hundreds of km.
2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the brake pedal fully depressed.
whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Automatic Transmission Lever
CAUTION!
In order to properly use the automatic transmission, it is essential that you read through the whole chapter, so that you can understand right from the start what the correct and granted operations are.
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the
Automatic transmission is operated by a shift lever with unlock button, located on the central console, which can have the following operating positions:
· P (Park): button control;
· R (Reverse);
Damage to the transmission may occur brake pedal.
· N (Neutral);
if the following precautions are not
· As with all vehicles, you should
· D (Drive) automatic forward speed;
observed:
never exit a vehicle while the engine · M -/+ (Manual): "+" shifting to
is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
higher gear or "" shifting to lower
· Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop:
always apply the electronic parking brake, shift the transmission into P
gear in manual mode (see "Drive Mode" in this section).
5
this is the default position of the lever. After engaged P (Park) it is
(Park), and turn the engine off.
possible set the ignition switch to
· When leaving the vehicle, always
OFF.
remove the key fob and lock your
· Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only
vehicle.
after the vehicle has come to a
· Do not leave the key fob in or near
complete stop and the engine is at
the vehicle.
idle speed.
· Do not shift between P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) when the engine is above idle speed
· To effect any change from vehicle stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or
This vehicle is equipped with a feature which requires the transmission to be placed in P (Park) before the engine can be turned off. This prevents the driver from inadvertently leaving the vehicle without having placed the transmission in P (Park). This system
Transmission status is visible on the lever and on the lower part of the Instrument cluster display.
also locks the transmission in P (Park)
235
Driving
Shift Lever Movements
· Automatic lane ("R", "N", "D") as
To Engage a Mode (briefly)
Shift lever has two main positions with main central position.
To select one of the operating modes,
a single step selection (backward/
· Manual lane ("M +/-") on left
move the lever as previously indicated
forward): two unstable position (2)
position: move forward for "" and and press the brake pedal at the same
and (3) and two stable position (1) and backward for "+".
time.
(4).
5
· "P" is a button on the top of the lever.
To engage "P" mode, driver must press the "P" button.
Shift Lever Backlit
· White backlit for "P", "R", "N", "D" and "M +/-": brighter when selected and dimmer when not selected.
In order to engage "R", "N" or "D" mode, driver have to move the shift lever by pressing the unlock button. If the unlock button is not pressed, the instrument cluster shows the popup
· When P (Park) mode is selected, the message shows in picture.
letter "P" becomes brighter and "
" appears brighter near "N".
Backlit on the shift lever depends on
the status of the ignition device.
236
Driving
in "M +/-" position, will go to central disappears after 2 seconds. By
stable position automatically.
operating instead the lever, the new
· If using the shift lever in M +/(Manual) mode, you can activate it
range will be indicated in the field and in the lower part of the display.
by moving the lever from D (Drive)
to the left and then forward towards
the "-" symbol or back towards the
"+" symbol and the gear is shifted.
The lever functions like a joystick, so releasing it after giving the command, it automatically returns to the two stable positions (vertical in line with "R", "N" and "D" or in line with ""
· To exit P (Park) mode, or to pass from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position when the car is stopped or is moving at a low speed, the brake pedal must also be pressed.
and "+" when in "M +/-" mode).
· Normally, to engage R (Reverse)
CAUTION!
5
mode, press the brake pedal and the · DO NOT accelerate while shifting
unlock button together.
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
· To pass from P (Park) mode directly
another mode.
to D (Drive) mode, in addition to
· After selecting a transmission mode,
pressing the brake pedal, it is also
wait a few seconds before
necessary to press the unlock button. accelerating. This precaution is
· Normally, to pass from R (Reverse) mode directly to D (Drive) mode and vice versa, in addition to pressing the brake pedal, it is necessary to press the unlock button.
· The P (Park) mode can be automatically enabled by pressing the "P" button: if the shift lever was
particularly important with a cold engine.
Transmission Status on the Instrument Cluster Display
By pressing the unlock button on the lever, the gear change positions field is displayed: if you release the button without moving the lever, the field
If the vehicle is in D (Drive) status, in M +/- (Manual) or temporarily in manual drive mode, the gear position is indicated beside the lever status ("D" or "M"), on the lower part of the display.
237
Driving
Automatic Transmission Range The Instrument cluster will display the
P (Park)
related indicator light message for 5 seconds.
and the
Use this position to park the vehicle.
The transmission can be shifted from
"P" position only with the brake pedal
5
and the unlock button pressed: then
move the shift lever. To move the shift
lever from "P" position to any other
position, the engine must be switched
on. The engine can be regularly
Service Shift Lever
started in P (Park) range. Never
In the event of a shift lever malfunction, a message on the instrument cluster will invite to stop the car safety and turn off the engine. In this way the system moves the transmission in P (Park) position.
attempt to use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. When parking on a level surface, you may press the "P" button first, and then apply the electronic parking brake by pulling the trigger upwards.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before pressing the "P" button. For enhanced security, turn the front wheels toward the kerb on a downhill
and away from the kerb on an uphill
grade.
238
Driving
R (Reverse)
button and the action on the shift
WARNING! · Never use the P (Park) mode as a
substitute for the electric parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to prevent vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· Make sure the transmission is in P (Park) before leaving the vehicle.
This range is used to move the vehicle backward. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards. We recommend to shift into R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
· Vehicle stationary: switching between R (Reverse) and D (Drive),
lever. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards, while switching to D (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving forwards. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park) mode if you must leave the vehicle.
passing from N (Neutral), requires
brake pedal pressed and action on
CAUTION!
the lever.
WARNING!
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range, as this can
· Vehicle moving: the driver can switch from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral) acting on the shift lever without
Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or never turn off the ignition to coast downhill. These are unsafe practices
5
damage the drivetrain.
pressing the unlock button and the
that limit driver's response to
· The following indicators should be
brake pedal.
changing traffic or road conditions.
used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the "P" position:
when shifting into P (Park), push the "P" button on the shift lever.
with the brake pedal released, verify that "P" position is illuminated on the shift lever and in the instrument cluster display.
N (Neutral)
· Vehicle stationary and engine started: switching from N (Neutral) to P (Park) requires "P" button pressed only. Switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed and the action on the shift lever.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in N (Neutral) can result in transmission damage. Refer to "Towing a Disabled Vehicle" in section "Emergency" for further information.
· Vehicle moving: switching from N
D (Drive)
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires pressing the unlock
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides
239
Driving
the smoothest upshifts and downshifts (Drive) mode to M +/- (Manual) mode and lower gears and improve the
and the best fuel economy. The
regardless of car speed.
overall performance of the vehicle.
transmission automatically shifts up
· When in D (Drive) mode, using the
This mode allows you to move the shift
and down through all gears. The D (Drive) mode provides optimum
paddles behind the steering wheel (if lever step by step forward "" or equipped), will cause the system to backward "+" without pressing the
driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions of the vehicle.
enter a temporary function and enable the manual shift mode. This
unlock button. The current transmission gear is displayed on the
· Vehicle stationary: to switch from D
range is indicated with the symbols instrument cluster beside "M".
(Drive) to R (Reverse) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed and the action on the shift lever: to reach N (Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is possible by only acting on the shift
"+/-" above and below "D" letter on the gear range field of the display. The system will then switch back to automatic mode according to time elapsed in "temporary" mode and
lever.
driving conditions.
· To enable special operations while
At extremely cold temperatures (-23°F /
the car is moving at a low speed,
-30°C or below), transmission may be
5
such as getting out of marsh or snow, affected by the low temperature of
it is possible to run quickly from D
the engine and transmission. Normal
(Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, by pressing the unlock button and acting on the shift lever passing from
operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a normal level.
Manual mode can be activated at any time, with no need to release the brake pedal.
N (Neutral).
M +/- (Manual)
In M +/- (Manual) mode, the
· Vehicle moving: switching to N
This mode is obtained by moving the transmission will shift up or down (+/-)
(Neutral) from D (Drive) it is not
shift lever to the left in "M +/-"
if manually selected by the driver by
necessary to press brake pedal.
position.
using the shift lever, or shift paddles
· From D (Drive) selected mode it is always possible to switch to M +/(Manual) mode, by move the shift lever to the left (see following paragraph); to return to "D"
In this mode, the transmission interacts with the driver in order to allow manual shift and ensure increased control of the vehicle. The current mode allows the transmission system
on the steering wheel (if foreseen). The transmission remains in the engaged gear until the driver shifts into another higher or lower gear, except in the following cases.
position, move the shift lever to the right. It is possible to shift from D
to optimise the engine brake action, remove undesired shifting into higher
· Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
240
Driving
automatic operation. The
If you enter the I.C.E. drive mode
transmission will also upshift
when the gearshift is in "M +/-"
automatically once maximum engine position, the system activates the
speed is reached.
automatic return of the shift lever in D
· If in SPORT mode, the transmission
(Drive) mode.
will remain in the selected gear even Shift Paddles (if equipped)
when maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only if enabled by the driver. Manual upshift or downshift will be maintained as long as SPORT mode is selected, even by full stroke pedal press.
· If in "M +/-" or in SPORT mode, the transmission will automatically
The driver can change gears with the shift paddles behind the steering wheel when in D (Drive) and M +/(Manual) mode. Using the shift paddles, the corresponding icon will display on the instrument cluster beside the "M" indication and current shifted gear.
Pull the right shift paddle "+" towards the steering wheel and release it to enter the higher gear; do the same operation with the left shift paddle "" to enter the lower gear.
downshift as the vehicle slows to halt (to prevent engine lugging) and the current gear will display on the instrument cluster. Shifting the shift lever backward "+" or moving the right shift paddle "+" towards the steering wheel when stationary, will cause the vehicle to start in second gear. If the vehicle speed is too low, the system will ignore further upshifts. Avoid using speed control
· When in D (Drive) mode, by pressing
"" paddle the transmission shifts to
5
"D1 - D2" temporary mode (or the
"Launch Control" on the TROFEO
version).
· Pull simultaneously both paddles to
deactivate the D (Drive) temporary
mode (or the "Launch Control" on
the TROFEO version).
Gear Shift Indicator Light
when the M +/- (Manual) mode is
In order to improve fuel economy, we
engaged.
recommend that you shift gears when
When the car stops in M +/- (Manual)
the system prompts you to do so. This
mode, the transmission automatically
will help reduce fuel consumption
moves the shift lever and inserts P
without significantly affecting vehicle
(Park).
performance.
241
Driving
The indicator beside the displayed gear will light up just before reaching the required speed to change downshift or upshift (example in the figures).
the indicator light will illuminate again.
NOTE:
The gearshift indicator will only work when the transmission is set in M +/(Manual) mode.
warning light illuminates on the instrument cluster.
Transmission Malfunction and Overheating Conditions
Transmission Emergency Control
Transmission function is electronically
monitored to detect abnormal
In this case, slow down until
conditions. If a condition that could
temperature returns to normal level
result in transmission damage is
(the light will turn off).
5
detected, "Transmission Limp Home Mode" will be activated. In this
If this is not sufficient, we recommend to stop the vehicle, shift the lever to
situation, the transmission may
position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. In some situations, the
keep the engine idle until the temperature red warning light
transmission system may not re-engage if the engine is turned off
turns off and the message disappears from the display. Resume
and restarted. A message in the instrument cluster
driving without demanding high engine performance. If the red
will inform the driver about the more warning light and the related
serious transmission conditions, and
message turns on again, it is advisable
When the new gear is engaged, the
indicate what actions may be
to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine
indicator turns off. If the shift runs late necessary.
and wait for the engine/transmission
or is not performed at all, the indicator remains lit for a few seconds then turns off. As soon as new conditions requiring further gear change occur,
Transmission Oil Overtemperature If the transmission oil temperature exceeds the operating limit, the red
assembly to fully cool down. If the instrument cluster message indicates that the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown,
242
Driving
perform the following procedure preferably at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
All-Wheel Drive
The active on-demand All-Wheel Drive
WARNING!
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
(AWD) system provides available optimum traction for a wide variety of road and off-road surface and driving
There may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs.
following steps.
conditions. The system minimizes
· Stop the vehicle.
· Shift the transmission into P (Park), if possible.
wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary. To maximize fuel economy, the AWD
· Turn the engine off.
system automatically disengages
· Wait approximately 30 seconds.
torque distribution on front axle when
· Restart the engine.
road and environmental conditions
· Shift the transmission into D (Drive) are such that wheel slip is unlikely to
and then into the desired gear
occur. When specific road and
range. If the problem is no longer
environmental conditions require
5
detected, the transmission will
increased levels of road traction, the
NOTE:
return to normal operation.
AWD system automatically distributes
the torque between front and rear
If the AWD system service warning
NOTE:
axle in order to grant the best driving light and message appears after
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer at your earliest possible convenience, which has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
experience. Torque distribution is displayed on the TFT in the "Drive Mode" main menu. Refer to paragraph "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" in chapter "Instrument Cluster" of section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further
engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly or is in recovery mode due to overheating caused by the excessive wheel spin. In this condition the vehicle can continue driving but only rear wheel drive is
Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position
information.
working. If the warning light and message are often activated, it is
See chapter "Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position" in section
recommended to have the vehicle serviced at an Authorized Maserati
"In an Emergency".
Dealer.
243
Driving 5
244
Drive Mode
Controls Preview
Drive modes and ride heights to use with the vehicle on and off road can be set using the buttons and vehicle height selector on central console.
CAUTION!
"NORMAL" is the default drive mode, optimized for the best balance between performance, fuel consumption and emissions in the standard conditions use of the car.
TROFEO Version only Buttons on the central console have following functions:
· (ESC OFF): to exclude/reactivate the ESC system.
· OFF ROAD: to activate/deactivate the specific driving mode for off road conditions (uphill/downhill, cobblestone, mud, grass and sand). In this mode, the vehicle has a specific ESC/ASR calibration and shock absorbers skyhook damping curve. Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. When in "OFF ROAD" drive mode, hard suspension can not be set through the button on the central console.
· I.C.E: to activate/deactivate the drive mode to ensure increased control on slippery surfaces as well as higher energy efficiency.
Driving
· SPORT (NOT for TROFEO version): to illuminates and, for some of these, the released) is the standard function
activate/deactivate a sportier drive
vehicle configuration obtained is
mode. The ON status is activated by
mode. In this mode, the vehicle has a graphically displayed on instrument
pressing the button, the dedicated
faster throttle response and ESC
cluster. The same screen is also
sport calibration (not recommended obtained when selecting the "Drive
LED will illuminate. It is necessary to press the (ESC OFF) button for at
on wet/slippery surfaces). Activating mode" menu using the buttons on this drive mode, will also change the steering wheel.
least 3 seconds. At each key-on the car starts always in
EPS setting.
When changing drive mode between NORMAL drive mode (all the LEDs are
· SPORT and CORSA (TROFEO version OFF ROAD, I.C.E., NORMAL and SPORT, OFF) and driver can select different
only): to activate/deactivate the
engine temperature and fuel level
drive mode according to following
sportier and the race drive mode.
indicators inner edge will change color table.
When in "SPORT" drive mode, the vehicle has a faster throttle response and ESC sport calibration (not
if"Outline Coloring" of submenu "Screen Setup" is set to "On" (see example in the figure). Refer to
Button
ON Button pressed (LED ON)
recommended on wet/slippery
chapter "Instrument Cluster" in
surfaces). Activating this drive mode, section "Dashboard Instruments and
Electronic Stability Control ESC partially
will also change the EPS setting.
Controls" for further information.
deactivated.
5
When in "CORSA" drive mode, in
OFF OFF ROAD drive mode
addition to what indicated for the
ROAD ON.
sposts mode, the transmission use a specific gear shift pattern and the traction is shifted more on the rear wheels with increased oversteering behavior. Traction control with
I.C.E. SPORT
Increased Control and Efficiency mode ON (*).
Sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON.
dedicated calibration to maximize
traction vs stability and "Launch
Control" start mode.
· (Suspension): to switch between the two suspension setting modes: soft (LED light off) and hard ("S" on the cluster and LED light on).
By selecting one of these drive modes, the yellow or white LED on the button
Setting the Drive Mode
Drive modes can be set using the buttons on central console. Keys (buttons) only have two statuses: OFF and ON. The OFF status (button
245
Driving
Button
ON Button pressed (LED ON)
mode/s. (ESC OFF) is the only mode that does not depend on the activation or deactivation of the other
SPORT · Button pressed the
modes. The tables show the two
CORSA
first time (upper LED
configurations with:
(TROFEO ON): sportier drive
version
mode (SPORT) ON.
only) · Button pressed the
· (ESC OFF) button NOT pressed; · (ESC OFF) button pressed.
second time (upper
and lower LED ON):
race drive mode
WARNING!
(CORSA) ON, ESC
On Trofeo version, when CORSA drive
partially deactivated
mode is activated, the (ESC OFF)
(ON) and hard/stiff
indicator light on the instrument
suspension setting
cluster is on because the intervention
("S").
of the Electronic Stability Control
5
· When button is
(ESC) system is lower than the other
pressed third time, it
modes, but still present to allow a
returns to OFF-button more sporty drive.
release.
You can always press (ESC OFF) button
Hard/stiff suspension setting ("S").
(*) I.C.E. (Increased Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order to reduce fuel consumption,
to fully deactivate ESC system. Due to high power output of the engine can be potentially dangerous to drive the car on wet or slippery roads with ESC off and CORSA drive mode set.
exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by
dampening vehicle reactions
(control). The current mode is also
useful for low-grip surfaces.
The tables below summarize the adjustment of transmission and engine parameters according to set drive
246
(ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed (NOT for TROFEO Version)
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD
I.C.E.
OFF ROAD
I.C.E.
SPORT
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
Driving
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
Setup
NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions
OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions
I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions
SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions
NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions
Stability control
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Active Normal
Active with specific tuning
Off Road
Active Normal
Active-Sport (*) Active-Sport (*)
5
Sport
Sport
Suspensions setup
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Normal
Hard
Engine control Normal
Normal
Comfort
Performance
Performance
Engine boost
Normal boost
Overboost
Low boost
Overboost
Overboost
Exhaust sound
Low (Rev. Threshold)
Normal
Close to 5000 rpm
Always High
Always High
Gear shifting point
Normal
Off Road
Comfort
Performance
Performance
Kick down
Yes
Yes
Yes - Soft
Yes - Strong
Yes - Strong
Upshift rev. limiter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (No, when in Yes (No, when in
M+/-)
M+/-)
247
Driving
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
Automatic downshift
Normal
Anti - Stall
Normal
Shifting timing Normal
Quick - Normal Comfort
5
(*) In low- and medium-grip conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate SPORT mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed).
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
248
(ESC OFF) Button pressed (NOT for TROFEO Version)
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
Driving
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
Setup
NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions
OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions
I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions
SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions
NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions
Stability control OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Sport
Sport
5
Suspensions setup
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Normal
Hard
Engine control Normal
Normal
Comfort
Performance
Performance
Engine boost
Normal boost
Overboost
Low boost
Overboost
Overboost
Exhaust sound
Low (Rev. Threshold)
Normal
Close to 5000 rpm
Always High
Always High
Gear shifting point
Normal
Off Road
Comfort
Performance
Performance
Kick down
Yes
Yes
Yes - Soft
Yes - Strong
Yes - Strong
Upshift rev. limiter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (No, when in M+/-)
Yes (No, when in M+/-)
249
Driving
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
Automatic downshift
Normal
Shifting timing Normal
5
Normal (Anti Stall, when in M+/-)
Normal
Normal Comfort
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
250
(ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed (TROFEO Version only)
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD
I.C.E.
OFF ROAD
I.C.E.
SPORT
SPORT
CORSA
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
Driving
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
Setup NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions
Stability control Active
OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions
I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions
SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions
CORSA +
NORMAL +
Manual + Hard Auto + Hard
suspensions
suspensions
5
Active with specific tuning
Active
Active-Sport (*) Active-Corsa (*) Active-Sport (*)
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Sport
Corsa
Sport
Suspensions setup
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Normal
Hard
Hard
Engine control Normal
Normal
Comfort
Performance Performance Performance
Engine boost
Normal boost Overboost
Low boost
Overboost
Overboost
Overboost
Exhaust sound
Low (Rev. Threshold)
Normal
Close to 5000 rpm
Always High
Always High
Always High
Gear shifting point
Normal
Off Road
Comfort
Performance Performance Performance
Kick down
Yes
Yes
Yes - Soft
Yes - Strong
Not
Yes - Strong
251
Driving
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
Upshift rev. limiter
Yes
Automatic downshift
5
Normal
Shifting timing Normal
Yes Anti - Stall
Yes Normal
Quick - Normal Comfort
(*) In low- and medium-grip conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate SPORT or CORSA mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed).
Yes (No, when in M+/-)
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
Not Anti - Stall Quick - Corsa
Yes (No, when in M+/-)
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
252
(ESC OFF) Button pressed (TROFEO version only)
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD
I.C.E.
OFF ROAD
I.C.E.
SPORT
SPORT
CORSA
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
Driving
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
Setup NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions
OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions
I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions
SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions
CORSA + Manual + Hard suspensions
NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions
5
Stability control OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Active-Sport
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Sport
Corsa
Sport
Suspensions setup
Normal
Off Road
Normal
Normal
Hard
Hard
Engine control Normal
Normal
Comfort
Performance
Performance Performance
Engine boost
Normal boost Overboost
Low boost
Overboost
Overboost
Overboost
Exhaust sound
Low (Rev. Threshold)
Normal
Close to 5000 rpm
Always High
Always High Always High
Gear shifting point
Normal
Off Road
Comfort
Performance
Performance Performance
Kick down
Yes
Yes
Yes - Soft
Yes - Strong
Not
Yes - Strong
253
Driving
Button pressed: LED ON
Button not pressed: LED OFF
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT
CORSA
OFF ROAD I.C.E.
SPORT
CORSA
Upshift rev. limiter
Automatic
5
downshift
Yes Normal
Shifting timing Normal
Yes
Yes
Normal (Anti Stall, when in M+/-)
Normal
Normal
Comfort
NOTE: A different drive mode can be set even with engine running and vehicle in motion.
To activate a drive mode, press briefly the corresponding button. The LED beside the button will light up and set drive mode screen will be displayed (example in the figure: NORMAL) for 5 seconds.
254
Yes (No, when in M+/-)
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
Not Anti - Stall Quick - Corsa
Yes (No, when in M+/-)
Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-)
Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-)
Activate/Deactivate (ESC OFF) Drive Mode
To activate (ESC OFF) drive mode press the corresponding button for at least 3 seconds: the yellow LED on the button will turn on.
Driving
To deactivate the drive mode, press
To disable the drive mode activated,
To disable the SPORT mode without
the same button again: the LED will
press the same button again: the LED activating the CORSA mode, press the
turn off and the display will show the will turn off.
same button once again: the two LED
message indicating that (ESC OFF)
Activate/Deactivate SPORT and
will turn off.
drive mode is off and ESC system is
CORSA Drive Mode (TROFEO Version Monitoring Settings on Display
active. Activate/Deactivate OFF ROAD, I.C.E.,
only) To activate SPORT drive mode, press
By gaining access to "Drive mode" menu through the buttons on steering
5
SPORT and (Suspension) Drive Mode
the corresponding button once: the upper white LED on the button will
wheel right-hand side, it is possible to monitor the settings for driving on
To activate one of these drive mode,
turn on. CORSA drive mode can be
and off road.
press the corresponding button once: active by pressing again the same
The list and figure show vehicle
the white LED on the button will turn button: also the lower LED on the
parameters referred to each drive
on (example in picture: SPORT mode). button will turn on.
mode. Driving mode and its
When in "CORSA" drive mode, "OFF
parameters are identified by a
ROAD" and (Suspension) hard (S)
different color (example in the figure:
drive mode can not be set and you can I.C.E.).
run the "Launch Control" start
procedure.
255
Driving
A Ride height B Powertrain C ESC D Torque distribution
5
Drive Mode
E Suspension stiffness
Press " " (Suspension) button, the icon with "S" beside will light up on
the upper right side of the TFT display.
The table below specifies the default, ride height and relevant commands that can be set, for each drive mode.
Default Condition
ESC
Off Road
Off Road
Possible Ride Height / Command
· Off Road 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
· Off Road 2 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
Off Road 1
256
Drive Mode
Default Condition
ESC
I.C.E.
Normal
Normal
ESC
Normal
Normal
Normal
ESC
Sport
Normal
Normal
Driving
Possible Ride Height / Command
· Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
· Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
· Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. · Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height
selector according to current speed.
· Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector
according to current speed.
· Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector
according to current speed.
· Aero 2 / Only speed dependent.
· Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height
selector according to current speed.
5
· Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
· Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
· Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. · Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height
selector according to current speed.
257
Driving
Drive Mode
Default Condition
ESC
Corsa
Corsa
Possible Ride Height / Command
· Other ride heights can not be set when in "CORSA" mode.
· Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
Aero 2
ESC
Sport
· Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed.
· Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector
Sport
according to current speed.
· Aero 2 / Only speed dependent.
· Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height
5
Aero 1
selector according to current speed.
Automatic Selection of "NORMAL" Drive Mode upon Ignition (Predominant Mode) If "Off Road" drive mode was set before switching off the vehicle, "NORMAL" drive mode will be set automatically upon re-ignition. Over 3 mph (5 km/h), vehicle height if was set to "Off Road 1" or "Off Road 2" will lower to "Normal" ride height if no other inputs from the user.
258
I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC
To release the vehicle in low grip conditions (e.g.: heaps of snow, mud, sand, etc), it is possible to shift the transmission in the specific driving mode as required for these situations, by pressing the I.C.E. button and to exclude completely the yaw and spinning control system, by pressing the button for at last three seconds
(ESC OFF).
Setting Ride Height
The pneumatic suspension system ensures vehicle continuous automatic leveling and allows setting ground clearance by simply moving the ride height selector. The selector can be moved forward ( ) and backward ( ) by one position at a time in order to set six different heights. Every position is identified by the switch-on of the corresponding LED at the left side of
the selector and in the dedicated area at top right of the display. The table below shows the possible selector positions and the relevant symbols.
Driving
Off Road 2 Off Road 1 Normal Aero 1 Aero 2 Entry/Exit
During transition from one position to The system requires that the engine
another, the instrument cluster display be running for all changes. When
will show a pop-up indicator (above
lowering the vehicle, all of the doors,
the coolant temperature indicator)
including the liftgate, must be closed.
which reproduces the ride height
If a door is opened at any time while
symbols. On this indicator, the LED for the vehicle is lowering, the change
the new position, set by means of the will not be completed until the open
5
selector on central console, will flash door/s is/are closed.
while the LEDs of intermediate
The pneumatic suspension system of
positions will turn on when set
this vehicle uses a lifting and lowering
position is reached. The new position pattern preventing the headlights
will be displayed on the dedicated
from incorrectly shining into
area at top right of the display and
oncoming traffic.
the indicator will turn off after
When raising the vehicle, the rear of
approximately 2 seconds.
the vehicle will move up first and then
the front.
When lowering the vehicle, the front
will move down first and then the
rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may
be noticed that the pneumatic
suspension system operates briefly,
this is normal. The system is correcting
259
Driving
the position of the vehicle with little steering wheel (see chapter
· Low battery: start the engine to
suspension movements to ensure a
"Instrument Cluster" in section
recharge battery and change ride
proper appearance.
"Dashboard Instruments and
height.
Display Messages
After shifting selector to change position, a pop-up message will indicate for 5 seconds when set position has been reached (after pneumatic suspension system
Controls"). The change from one position to another can occur only if the following requirements are met.
· Lifting: engine running, speed lower than preset limit, etc.
· Entry/Exit position not available: check the cause preventing this control.
Using the Ride Height Positions and speed Thresholds
The different ride heights that can be
intervention that might last up to 30 seconds).
· Lowering: engine running, speed
set with the selector allow user to
lower than preset limit, doors closed, drive the vehicle on and off road,
This type of message will be displayed
etc.
using the available drive modes and
only if the option to view all
Ride height change can be temporarily functions.
pneumatic suspension system messages suspended or disabled under the
was set (For further details, refer to
following conditions, as indicated in
NOTE:
"MTC+ Settings" in section
5
"Dashboard Instruments and
the pop-up messages on instrument cluster display.
The indications below explain as a general rule which selector position
Controls").
· High speed: decrease speed to set new height.
· Pneumatic suspension system overheat: wait for the system to cool down before changing height.
· Door(s) and/or liftgate open: close door(s) and liftgate to lower the vehicle.
has to be used in certain situations and which are the speed thresholds at which it is possible to set the available ride height and when system automatically switches to a different height. In any case, the driver must always assess and set the ride height and drive mode most suitable to the conditions of the current driving path
· Pneumatic suspension system
on a case by case basis.
temporarily disabled or in fault: wait
Set ride height and drive mode can be monitored on instrument cluster display via "Drive mode" menu, using buttons on the right-hand side of the
a few minutes and repeat the operation or contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
· Normal: normal ground clearance. This is the standard height position of the pneumatic suspension and is meant for normal road conditions.
260
Driving
In this ride height position driver can height can be set only in "OFF
regardless of vehicle speed if the
set the "NORMAL" and "I.C.E. drive
ROAD" drive mode.
"SPORT" mode is set.
modes. After the engine is switched off, the drive mode is set to "NORMAL". If "OFF ROAD" drive
Select this height while the vehicle speed is below 18 mph (30 km/h). When in the "Off Road 2" height, if
· Aero 2: lowers the vehicle by approx. 1.4 in (35 mm). It is the height ensuring excellent
mode was set, "NORMAL" mode will be set, but the user-set ride height
the vehicle speed remains between 18 mph (30 km/h) and 25 mph (40
aerodynamics for top performance by further lowering the vehicle. This
will remain until the speed threshold is reached.
km/h) for over 30 seconds or if vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
ride height is available in "NORMAL", "SPORT ", "
· Off Road 1: raises the vehicle by approx. 1 in (25 mm). This is the height suitable for most off road driving conditions until the
(40 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to "Off Road 1" height. For further details, refer to "Off-road drive" in this section.
(Suspension)" or "I.C.E." drive mode. This is the default ride height when "CORSA" drive mode (TROFEO
other off road option is needed. This · Aero 1: lowers the vehicle by approx. version only) is set. System
ride height can set only in "OFF
0.8 in (20 mm).
automatically lowers the vehicle
ROAD" drive mode. Select this
This height provides improved
when speed exceeds 105 mph
height while the vehicle speed is
aerodynamics by lowering the
(170 km/h) or when it remains
5
below 50 mph (80 km/h). When in
vehicle. This ride height is available
between 105 mph (170 km/h) and
the "Off Road 1" height, if the
in "NORMAL", "SPORT ", "
115 mph (185 km/h) for over 15
vehicle speed remains between
(Suspension)" or "I.C.E." drive
seconds. The system will return to
80 km/h (50 mph) and 56 mph
mode. System automatically lowers
Aero 1 height when the vehicle
(90 km/h) for over 30 seconds or if
the vehicle when speed remains
speed remains between 96 mph
vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph
between 74 mph (120 km/h) and
(155 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h)
(90 km/h), the vehicle will be
80 mph (130 km/h) for over 15
for over 15 seconds or if the vehicle
automatically lowered to
seconds or if the vehicle speed
speed falls below 87 mph (140 km/h).
"NORMAL" height. For further
exceeds 80 mph (130 km/h). The
· Easy/Entry: lowers the vehicle by
details, refer to "Off-road Drive" in this section.
system will return to "NORMAL" height when the vehicle speed
approx. 1.8 in (45 mm). This mode lowers the vehicle for
· Off Road 2: raises the vehicle by approx. 1.5 in (40 mm). This height is intended for off-road
remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 56 mph (90 km/h) for over 15 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and
use only where maximum ground clearance is required. This ride
below 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will enter "Aero 1" height,
unloading of cargo from the trunk. This ride height can be set only in
261
Driving
"NORMAL", "SPORT ", "
a drop of pressure in the pneumatic
system from limiting occupants'
(Suspension)" or "I.C.E." After
suspension system.
safety.
selecting this height, once the vehicle Approximately, after one week of
speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h), inactivity, vehicle ground clearance will "Launch Control" Mode
the vehicle height will begin to
lower by 0.4 in (10 mm). To set off the (TROFEO version only)
lower. To exit "Entry/Exit" mode,
drop of pressure due to inactivity, it is
move selector to another position or necessary to start the engine and allow "Launch Control" mode is a
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24
some time until system reaches
performance start procedure.
km/h). Automatic lowering of the
operating pressure and lifts the vehicle By activating this procedure you get
vehicle into "Entry/Exit" mode can be to set ride height. A message on
the best possible acceleration from
enabled through the MTC+ (refer to instrument cluster display will warn
standstill of the car.
"MTC+ Settings" in section
driver when set ride height is reached. This mode allows you to ground the
"Dashboard Instruments and
torque necessary to prevent the
Controls"). If this feature is enabled,
wheels from slipping during
the vehicle will only lower if the
acceleration performance.
gearshift lever is in P (Park), the
To make a performance start in
5
engine is running, doors and liftgate
are closed and the Pneumatic
"Launch Control" mode, the following conditions must be met:
Suspension System should be either
· Water and transmission temperature
in "NORMAL" or "Aero". The Vehicle
in proper range.
will not automatically lower if the pneumatic suspension system is in "Off Road 2" or "Off Road 1" mode. The lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is switched off and a door is opened to prevent setting the alarm off.
Driving vehicle before the set riding height is reached is not safe and could damage suspension components.
· No engine, AWD and on board systems faults.
· The vehicle must be traveled at least 440 mi (700 km).
· "CORSA" drive mode on. · Shift lever in "D" or"M +/-" position.
Lowering Vehicle Height for Inactivity
Lowering of vehicle ground clearance after a long period of inactivity should be considered normal since it is due to
WARNING! After a long period of vehicle inactivity, drive only when vehicle reaches set ride height to prevent any
· The vehicle must be stationary on a level road surface.
· The driver door closed and the safety belt fastened.
problems of the pneumatic suspension
262
Driving
Launch Control Sequence
NOTE: · All the above mentioned conditions
must be verified in order to activate "Launch Control" performance start procedure.
· To confirm the "Launch Control" sequence, press full the brake pedal as indicated in the message on the instrument cluster.
and engine torque calibrated to maximize performance.
· During "Launch Control" ACC, FCW and HAS (if equipped) are temporarily disabled.
· Each step displayed on the
instrument cluster has a time out
approximately of 5 seconds.
During the acceleration phase the
· With brake pedal pressed and
"Launch Control" symbol appears at
steering wheel straight, pull "" left · With brake pedal pressed full, press the top right of the TFT display.
paddle. The instrument cluster shows the "Launch Control" engaged page.
full the accelerator pedal as indicated in the message on the
5
instrument cluster.
· To confirm the procedure, pull again the "" paddle down. To abort the procedure, pull "+" right paddle.
· Release brake pedal. The launch of the vehicle starts with ESC that manages the maximum performance
263
Driving
Active Alternator
Off-Road Drive
To improve overall efficiency by
This vehicle is equipped with a specific
reducing the auxiliary loads on the
"Off Road" driving mode which allows
engine, the vehicle is equipped with a
to drive through various terrain
smart alternator that is mainly active
conditions (rock, mud, sand), also
in the latter energy balance phases
uphill and downhill, eventually in
(for example, during braking, coasting
condition of lateral inclination.
and overloading). The alternator
To set the "OFF ROAD" drive mode,
becomes active when the battery
please see the paragraphs "Setting the
charge is insufficient and when the vehicle exits from the braking and overload situations.
Active Alternator Feature (if feature is available) In the I.C.E. screen, the user can display
The bonus range (about 37 mi / 60 km for each full of fuel) is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.
Drive Mode" and "Setting Ride Height" of chapter "Drive Mode" in this section. In order to enhance this specific performance, the "OFF ROAD" drive mode modifies the setting of:
5
in the form of dynamic bars some
· Ride height;
informative parameters on the state of battery charge ("CHARGE"), efficiency of drive style ("EFFICIENCY") and the matured economy (" " bonus range) expressed in miles (mi) or kilometres (km).
· Engine, transmission calibration;
· Suspensions. When "OFF ROAD" is selected, ride height is set to "Off Road 1" (vehicle is higher by approx. 1 in / 25 mm). It is possible to select ride height "Off
Road 2" (vehicle is raised by approx.
1.5 in / 40 mm) using the ride height
selector.
"OFF ROAD" drive mode is limited up
to a max speed of 56 mph (90 km/h). In
case the vehicle speed should exceed
this limit, the drive mode will be
de-selected automatically and the
drive mode will return to "NORMAL".
264
Driving
"Off Road 2" ride height is limited
lower than 19 in (50 cm) and crossing precautions must be considered
instead up to a max speed of 25 mph speed lower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
before entering the water.
(40 km/h). In case the vehicle speed should exceed this limit, ride height will be put automatically to "Off Road 1" while driving mode will remain "OFF ROAD". An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
In "OFF ROAD" drive mode, also engine, transmission settings are changed in order to provide the most suitable level of torque and selected gear to improve traction on low-adherence condition and uphill climbing.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording to a maximum of 19 in (50 cm) of water. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system
A higher clearance and the longer travel of the suspension might allow
into recirculation mode during water fording.
the vehicle to overcome some
WARNING!
obstacles.
In case of downhill, the use of the Hill
A higher ground clearance means a
Descent Control (HDC) is
CAUTION!
higher center of gravity. If at all
recommended, especially for relevant When driving through water, do not
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt slope and in case of low-adherence
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check
5
maneuvers. Failure to operate this
conditions.
water depth before entering, as a
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Although the pneumatic suspension system contributes to limiting these risks by setting precautionary speed thresholds, the driver must always pay utmost attention and drive carefully.
Also suspensions (Skyhook Continuous Damping Control) are set to a specific calibration in "OFF ROAD" drive mode, in order to obtain the right damping force provided by the shock absorbers, combined with the increased ride heights "Off Road 1" and "Off Road 2".
precaution. Check all fluids afterwards: driving through water may cause damage to engine and driveline that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety
WARNING! "Off Road 2" ride height must always be selected in case of water fording. Please remember water fording limits: max depth of the water must be
Driving Through Water
Set maximum ride height "Off Road 2" before driving through water. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, a number
and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
265
Driving
controlled speed lower than 5 mph
Maintenance
· When driving in mud, avoid using
(8 km/h) while in water to minimize wave effects that might cause serious damage to all components, especially the engine.
After driving through water, have your vehicle fluids and lubricants inspected at an Authorized Maserati Dealer to assure the fluids have not been
low gear that could cause wheel spin. Follow the tire and vehicle manufacturer's advice on tire pressure.
contaminated.
· When driving in sand, adopt lowest
WARNING! Avoid driving through flowing or standing water. Doing so can be
Driving in Snow and Wet Grass
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds,
gear possible.
Hill Climbing
Before climbing a hill, determine the
highly dangerous and can be very difficult to determine the depth of the water you are driving through. If driving through water cannot be avoided, and after driving through it,
set "I.C.E." drive mode with transmission in M +/- (Manual) and shift the transmission to a low gear. See "Drive Mode" in this section for further details. Do not shift to a lower
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side and shift the transmission to a lower gear. The vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist (HSA) that helps the driver to
apply the brakes lightly to ensure the gear than necessary to maintain
5
brakes are operating correctly.
forward motion. Over-revving the
manage the brake intervention in acceleration when driving uphill (for
Flowing Water
engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
further details, refer to "Brake and Stability Control System" in this
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control. Follow these instructions even when
section). WARNING!
cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (25 cm).
driving through a path section covered If you lose forward motion, or cannot
with wet grass.
make it to the top of a hill or grade,
Standing Water
Do not drive in standing water deeper than 19 in (50 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Driving in Mud and Sand
In general, when driving in mud and sand, if your wheels spin, always reduce the throttle in order to slow the tires and regain traction.
never attempt to turn around. Always back carefully straight down a hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always drive straight up or
down.
266
Driving
Traction Downhill
Always consider these tips further to
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent Control (HDC) to
your experience gained in off-road driving.
WARNING! Abrasive material in any part of the
avoid repeated heavy braking (for
After Driving Off-road
brakes may cause excessive wear or
further details, refer to "Brake and Stability Control System" in this section). When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking power. Avoid repeated heavy braking and downshift the transmission whenever possible in order to cool down the
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.
unpredictable braking operation. Do not drive if braking system is not efficient: get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary by an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
· If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels and
brakes.
· Completely inspect the underbody of suspension linkages for impacted
Warnings and Tips for Off-road Driving
your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
material. Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance and affect suspension response. Removing it
5
When driving off-road, using the "OFF · Inspect the radiator for mud and
will correct the situation.
ROAD" drive mode which is specific
debris that might decrease sinking
for this use.
effect and clean as required.
Before driving, always make sure that · Check for accumulations of plants or
the vehicle reached the ride height set through the selector.
brush in underbody. These things could be a fire hazard if they get in
When driving, always:
contact with the exhaust system.
· limit driving speed as much as
· After extended operation in mud,
possible to tackle bends, bumpy
sand, water, or similar dirty
sections and slopes;
conditions, have all parts that got in
· increase visual control in front and
contact with mud, sand and water
on the sides of the vehicle to quickly spot any obstacles in your path
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
(potholes, branches, etc.);
267
Driving
Parking Brake
raising the lever located behind the shift lever.
The vehicle is equipped with an
When the parking brake is applied, the
electric automatic parking brake, also
warning light
lights up on the
called EPB (Electric Parking Brake).
tachometer and the related message
The braking action is ensured by a
will be displayed for 5 seconds on the
power actuator directly working on
instrument cluster.
the brake pad inside each caliper of
If you attempt to engage/disengage
the rear brake system.
the parking brake without having
It can be automatically engaged when
pressed the brake pedal, a message
the engine is turned off and disengaged with engine running,
During engagement and disengagement procedures, the
will be displayed, warning you to press the brake pedal.
driver seatbelt latched and driver door closed, while pressing the brake pedal
warning light
flashes until the
parking brake has reached its
If the engine was turned off when the automatic engagement device was
and operating the shift lever.
maximum activation force and is
deactivated (see "Deactivating
Furthermore, EPB can be automatically respectively fully released.
Automatic Operation" in this chapter)
5
engaged above a slope threshold with In the above-mentioned conditions,
it is possible to shift the parking brake
gearshift in park to avoid damage to the vehicle. EPB can be disengaged
the automatic engagement function can be deactivated/activated by
simply by pulling the lever upward within 3 minutes after turning off.
before turning off the vehicle. When the parking brake is applied, the
selecting the menu item "Vehicle settings" on the main menu (refer to
warning light
lights up on the
paragraph "Deactivating Automatic
tachometer display and the related
Operation" in this chapter).
message is displayed on the instrument
cluster for 5 seconds (see "Instrument Manual Engagement/
Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
Disengagement
The parking brake can also be
manually engaged or disengaged
when the engine is running or the
ignition switch is in the RUN position,
by pressing the brake pedal and
268
Driving
· It is advisable to keep the "Auto
· Auto Apply On (recommended
CAUTION! The main function of the EPB is to allow safe parking of the vehicle,
Apply" function always active (On) so that the vehicle is properly secured with electric parking brake.
setting); · Auto Apply Off.
therefore it must only be applied when the vehicle is already stationary. If the EPB is used while the vehicle is moving and decelerating until a speed lower of 3 mph (5 km/h) and, in particular, until complete stop (typically in a sudden brake), it is necessary to have the EPB system checked by an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Deactivating Automatic Operation
The automatic engagement function can be deactivated/reactivated by selecting the menu item "Vehicle settings" through the switch on the right side of the steering wheel (refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
WARNING! It is advisable to keep the "Auto Apply" function always active (On) so that the vehicle is properly secured with electric parking brake.
Press and release the switch toward
the arrow ( ) to select "Electric Park
5
WARNING!
Brake".
· Always hold the brake pedal pressed
during engagement or
disengagement of the parking
brake.
Scroll with the switch toward the
· The EPB command activation while
arrow or through the
running generates a deceleration of
programmable options.
the vehicle with strong deceleration
Press and release the switch toward
(Dynamic Braking). It is therefore
the arrow ( ) to set the selected
recommended to use this feature
option. A check mark will remain next
only in case of emergency. The
to the selected item until a new
stability of the car is guaranteed by the action of the activated ESC system.
Press and release the switch once again toward the arrow ( ) to visualize the options connected to this
selection is made.
function.
269
Driving
automatic parking brake system may temporarily be deactivated for safety reasons. Therefore, typically upon starting the engine, when the battery voltage drops, a message may temporarily be displayed, indicating that automatic operation is temporarily disabled.
· In case of repetitive requests to reset
the EPB through the messages shown
"Setting Saved" Selection notification
on the TFT display, please contact an Initialize the EPB System after
appears as a popup for 2 seconds then Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Re-connecting the Vehicle Battery
the display will show again the
After the detachment and the
modified function.
Failure Indication
subsequent connection of the battery,
In the event of electric parking brake on the instrument cluster display the
5
system failure, the warning light
warning light will be illuminated.
on the display will light up and the To initialize the EPB system, lift,
related message will show for 5
release and lift again the lever located
seconds.
behind the shift lever.
Emergency Disengagement
In case of brake lock with complete
In order to disable the automatic operation follow the same procedures
WARNING! In the event of an EPB failure, take your vehicle to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
electrical system failure, it is necessary to force the electric actuator on the rear calipers (see "Emergency Release of the Parking Brake" chapter in section "In an Emergency").
and select the other option.
EPB Operation with
Overheated Brakes
CAUTION!
· Under certain conditions when the battery voltage is low, the electric
Driving on mountain roads with steep slopes or a sports use of the vehicle could overheat the brake system
270
Driving
components. In these conditions the parking brake must not be used since
Parking
activate the Entry/Exit ride height to avoid any contact of the bottom of
the push of the power actuator might Before leaving the vehicle, make sure
the car with the protrusions of the
not be sufficient to ensure vehicle
that the parking brake is fully applied ground.
braking, especially on a slope. Drive normally without braking to allow the brakes to cool down a few minutes before stopping. In this way, the automatic or manual activation of the parking brake will ensure vehicle braking.
and place the transmission lever in the P (Park) position by pressing the "P" button.
WARNING! · Always check that the vehicle is
locked before leaving it.
When parking on hill roads, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in P (Park), otherwise the load on the
· Never leave children unattended in transmission locking mechanism may
the vehicle.
make it difficult to move the shift
· Do not park the vehicle on paper,
lever out of P (Park).
grass, dry leaves or other flammable In certain conditions, it is however
materials.
advisable to disengage the parking
5
· Do not leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.
brake manually and slightly apply the service brake for starting off. This is advisable when there are obstacles
very close to the vehicle in the
CAUTION!
direction in which you intend to move.
· When you need to park the vehicle on a steep slope, both with the engine on or off, it is recommended not only to engage the parking brake, but also to shift the transmission lever to P (Park) before leaving the vehicle.
· When parking on uneven surfaces (rocks, sidewalks, etc..) do not
271
Driving
"Drive Away Inhibit" strategy
In order to avoid a dangerous condition resulting from leaving the vehicle "not braked" with running engine and without driver on board,
"Drive Away Inhibit" strategy alerts the driver with messages on the instrument cluster display and sounding chimes, then puts the transmission in P (Park).
The table shows the vehicle condition and the action that the system runs to exit the dangerous condition.
Vehicle condition
· Engine running and speed lower than 1.8 mph (3 km/h).
· Transmission in any position other P (Park).
· Driver safety belt unlocked. · Driver door opened. · Brake pedal pressed.
Warnings
5
· Slow continuous chime.
· The condition of the vehicle not in P
(Park) position will be signaled by a
message on the display.
Action of the driver
The driver releases the brake pedal to get out of the vehicle.
Warnings · Fast chime. · A message which invites to engage
the parking brake to prevent vehicle movement will be displayed on the display.
The system puts the transmission in P (Park) position.
272
Driving
Brake and Stability Control System
natural laws of physics from affecting the vehicle, nor can they increase traction, braking or steering
Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, the ESC system detects the driver's chosen direction comparing it to the
The vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control System (ESC), which helps to maintain directional control in the event of loss of grip of the tires. The system is able to detect potentially dangerous
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires.
· These systems cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
one maintained while running. In case of discrepancy between the required trajectory and the current one, the ESC system brakes the appropriate wheel to counteract over or under steering.
situations for the stability of the
following another vehicle too
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is
vehicle and automatically sets the
closely, or hydroplaning.
turning more than appropriate for
brakes on all four wheels in a
· The capabilities of a vehicle
the steering wheel position.
differentiated manner, in order to
equipped with these systems must · Understeer - when the vehicle is
provide a torque settlement of the
never be exploited in a reckless or
turning less than appropriate for the
vehicle.
dangerous manner that could
steering wheel position.
ESC includes the following subsystems: jeopardize the driver's and the
The ESC system has two available
· ABS (Anti-lock Braking System);
passenger's safety or the safety of
operating modes:
5
· EBD (Electronic Brake-force
others.
ESC on
Distribution); · TCS (Traction Control System); · BAS (Brake Assist System); · BTO (Brake Throttle Override); · HSA (Hill Start Assist); · ROM (Roll-Over Mitigation); · TSM (Trailer Sway Mitigation); · HDC (Hill Descent Control).
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects over steering and under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake to the appropriate wheel.
This is the normal ESC operating mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, the ESC system is set in this mode and should be used for most driving conditions. The ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as pointed out in the following paragraphs.
ESC off
Engine power may also be reduced to The "ESC off" mode is aimed for a
assist in counteracting the conditions more spirited driving experience but
WARNING!
of instability and maintain the right
also purposeful for driving in sand, or
· These systems cannot prevent the
direction. The system is also able to
gravel. The current mode disables the
reduce the engine power.
TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
273
Driving
threshold for ESC activation, allowing
pressing the (ESC OFF) button and in front of yours and reduce your
higher wheel spin than normally
remain in this operational mode no speed when entering a curve.
granted by the ESC system. The (ESC longer than needed. Once the
OFF) button is fitted beside the gear
situation requiring "ESC off" mode is NOTE:
shift lever: to deactivate the system see "Drive Mode" in this section.
overcome, turn the ESC on again by pressing the (ESC OFF) button. This may also be performed while in motion.
· When the vehicle's speed is higher than 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as other motor noises. The system is
WARNING! In SPORT mode the ESC control thresholds are higher for maximum
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Electronic Brake-force
performing a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly.
performance on dry road surface. To Distribution (EBD)
· This self-check occurs each time the
ensure maximum security of the ESC, it is recommended not to activate
The Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
SPORT mode on surfaces with
medium- and low-grip (e.g., wet,
5
snow, dirt, etc..) with ESC system
active ( (ESC OFF) button not
pressed).
brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically "pumps" the brakes during severe braking to prevent wheel lock-up.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris.
NOTE:
The Electronic Brake-force Distribution You may also experience the following
(EBD) prevents the rear wheels from
when the brake system goes into Anti-
· When in "ESC off" mode, the TCS
over-braking and provides greater
Lock:
functionality of ESC is deactivated
control of available braking forces
(except for the limited slip feature
applied to the rear axle.
· The ABS motor running (it may
described in the TCS paragraph of
continue to run for a short time after
this chapter). All other stability
the vehicle stops).
features of ESC function regularly.
· To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "ESC off" mode by
WARNING!
The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking, but it does not increase the physical grip limits between the tires and the road. Therefore, always keep a safe distance from the vehicle
· The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
· Brake pedal pulsations.
· A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS functioning.
274
Driving
Traction Control System (TCS) vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce
WARNING!
· The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
The current device is an integral part of the ESC system. It operates automatically by reducing the power transmitted by the engine in case of slipping, loss of grip on wet floor (aquaplaning), acceleration on slippery snow-covered or frozen surfaces, etc. Activating under slip conditions different control systems:
brake pedal pressure earlier than required. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake Throttle Override (BTO)
To complete the range of systems that assist braking, the vehicle is equipped with BTO, which is designed to stop the vehicle even when it is during acceleration. If the brake pedal is depressed together with the
performed by qualified Maserati
· if slippage affects both drive wheels, accelerator, the system does not
personnel.
it reduces the power transmitted by consider as "conflict" the sequence
· Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will
the engine;
"brake-first-then-accelerator" of pedal
diminish their effectiveness.
· if slippage only affects one drive
application and it will not engage the
Pumping brakes makes the stopping wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel BTO. When the system recognizes that
5
distance longer. Just press firmly on
automatically.
the accelerator pedal is stuck pressed
your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
and the sequence "accelerator-firstthen-brake-pressed" (this sequence is
· The ABS installed to this vehicle does not control trailer braking system. Pay utmost attention when driving on slippery ground since the trailer traction might get poorer.
· Do not modify the vehicle braking system to control the trailer brakes. The hydraulic system controlling vehicle braking must remain independent from trailer braking system.
This system completes the ABS system by optimizing the vehicle braking capacity during emergency brake maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes in order to help reduce braking distances. The quick brake coupling is optimal for BAS performances. In order to fully exploit the system, apply continuous
recognized as a "conflict"), the engine power will be automatically reduced and, if the driver continues to depress the accelerator and the brake pedal, the system can make the vehicle come to a complete stop. Additionally, if the brake pedal is released when the accelerator is still stuck pressed, the corresponding engine torque increase gradually to a safe value. During this event, the ETC light
brake pedal pressure during the entire indicator will illuminate. The system
275
Driving
exits from this strategy when the
The system will not activate if the
occur. ROM cannot prevent all wheel
accelerator pedal is completely
transmission is placed in N (Neutral) or lift or roll-overs, especially those that
unstuck.
P (Park).
involve leaving the roadway or
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Roll-Over Mitigation (ROM)
striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of a ROM-equipped
The HSA system is designed to assist
This system anticipates the potential
vehicle must never be exploited in a
the driver when starting a vehicle
for wheel lift by monitoring the
reckless or dangerous manner, which
uphill. HSA will maintain the level of driver's steering wheel input and the could jeopardize the user's safety or
brake pressure applied for a short
speed of the vehicle. When ROM
the safety of others.
period of time also after releasing the determines that the rate of change of
brake pedal.
the steering wheel angle and vehicle's Trailer Sway Mitigation (TSM)
If the driver does not apply the
speed are sufficient to potentially
throttle during this short period of
cause wheel lift, it then applies the
TSM uses sensors in the vehicle to
time, the system will release brake
appropriate brake and may also
recognize an excessively swaying
pressure and the vehicle will start sloping down. The system will release
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
5
brake pressure proportionally to the amount of throttle/torque applied as
ROM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
the vehicle starts to move in the
ROM can only reduce the chance of
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the
chosen direction.
wheel lift occurring during severe or
sway of the trailer. TSM will become
HSA Activation Criteria
evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
active automatically once an
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, excessively swaying trailer is
The following criteria must be met in such as road and off-road conditions, recognized.
order for HSA to activate: · vehicle is stationary;
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
TSM cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer
· gear selection matches vehicle uphill
tongue weight recommendations.
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is
Refer to "Trailer Towing" in this
in forward gear; vehicle backing
WARNING!
section for further information. When
uphill is in reverse gear).
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, TSM is functioning, the "ESC
HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all
road and off-road conditions, and
Activation/Malfunction Indicator
forward gears when the activation
driving conditions, influence the
Light" will flash (see "Instrument
criteria have been met.
chance that wheel lift or rollover may Cluster" in section "Dashboard
276
Instruments and Controls"), the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSM is disabled when the ESC system is partially deactivated (button
pressed, LED on).
· Active: feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed.
Enabling and Activating the HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch on LH side of steering wheel.
WARNING! If TSM activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations, by actively controlling the brakes. HDC is part of the ESC system and has three possible states:
· Off: feature is not enabled and will not activate.
· Enabled: feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application.
Standard Configuration
Optional Configuration NOTE: The figures only show the Standard Configuration.
Driving
The following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
· Maximum activation speed: 18 mph (30 km/h).
· Parking brake is released.
· Driver door is closed.
HDC enabling is indicated by the
white light with below 3 dashes on
instrument cluster display coming
steady on. The light remains white
while the driver operates the pedal
unit to change the speed, or when
driving on a flat stretch of road
between two descents, or when the
descent is over.
Failed enabling is indicated by a message on display.
5
Once enabled, when driving the
system automatically activates HDC.
When the vehicle exceeds 2.5 mph
(4 km/h) and a defined threshold of
slope, the light turns green and the
current speed appears below it until
the default speed value set to 5 mph
(8 km/h). Therefore, the vehicle speed
is increased or decreased until it
reaches the default value.
277
Driving
· Push down (SET -) multifunction switch to decrease the speed up to 1.8 mph (3 km/h) : pressing the brake pedal up to default speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). The set value appears under the green light on the display.
HDC Cancelled
If the driver press down (CANC) multifunction switch or presses the brake pedal, the light turns white to indicate that HDC feature is temporarily cancelled.
The set speed for HDC is selectable by
the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the pedal unit or the
multifunction control on steering
wheel, which is the same used to set
the Cruise Control (see "Electronic
5
Cruise Control" or "Adaptive Cruise
Control - ACC" in this section).
· Push up (RES +) multifunction switch Driver Override to increase speed until the required
· If the driver brakes, the speed goes below the default value: when s/he
value is displayed below the light on display.
green
If the driver pushes the accelerator and the vehicle speed exceeds the set
releases the brake pedal, the speed goes back to 3 mph (4 km/h).
speed, the green light will stay on and a pop-up message on display will
warn driver.
· If the driver accelerates without
exceeding the maximum limit value
of 18 mph (30 km/h), when s/he
releases the accelerator pedal HDC
will set to the speed reached by
vehicle in that moment. The set value
appears under the green light on
the display.
Or:
278
Driving
Brake Overheating with HDC
manner that could jeopardize the
The icon on instrument cluster display and the LED on steering wheel button
driver's safety or the safety of others.
will flash when HDC deactivates due
to overheated brakes. The flashing
will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
· HDC will be deactivated but remain available when driver pushes the accelerator steadily, without exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h). A pop-up message and the green light will stay on.
· When the vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) but is lower than
WARNING! · HDC is only intended to assist the
driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
· Prolonged use of the system might
can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
5
31 mph (50 km/h) this function turns
overheat the brakes. In case of
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
to stand-by mode, the light with
brake overheating, the HDC, if
or wash your hands frequently when
below the set speed turns white. In
active, will be progressively
servicing your vehicle. For more
this case, to reset the function it is necessary to push up (RES +)
deactivated after warning the driver information go to:
(switch-off of LED on button);
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
multifunction switch.
feature can be reactivated only after vehicle
· While, if speed exceeds 31 mph
brake temperature will have
(50 km/h), or when driving beyond
decreased sufficiently. Distance that
18 mph (30 km/h) for over 70
can be traveled depends on brake
seconds, system will immediately
temperature, load and vehicle
disable the feature and the light
speed.
will turn off.
· The performance of a vehicle
equipped with HDC must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous
279
Driving
Using the Brakes
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
whenever the brake pads and/or brake discs are replaced.
CAUTION!
brake damage. In an emergency full braking capacity may be impaired.
Brake Overheating
To obtain a good performance by
Driving on mountain roads with steep
brake pads and discs, avoid sudden
Brake Pads and Brake Discs
slopes or a sports use of the vehicle
braking during the first 190 mi
Wear on the brake pads and brake
could overheat the brake system
(300 km).
discs depends to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use
components. In these conditions, the parking brake must not be used since
The pad wear limit is indicated by the illumination of the warning light
and therefore cannot be expressed in actual miles driven on the road.
the push of the power actuator might not be sufficient to ensure vehicle
and by a message on the
The brake system is designed for
braking, especially on a slope.
instrument cluster.
optimal braking effect at all speeds
Drive normally without braking to
In this event, please contact an
and temperatures.
allow the brakes to cool down a few
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Certain speeds, braking forces and
minutes before stopping. The
ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, automatic or manual activation of the
5
humidity and long outdoor stopping periods) can therefore cause the
parking brake will ensure vehicle braking.
brakes to "squeal". This is normal and will cease after a few brakings.
Brake overheating could also cause "squeals" and "vibrations".
WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in
New Brake Pads and/or Brake Discs
New brake pads have to be "bed in", and therefore only attain optimal friction to the brake disc when the vehicle has covered several hundreds of miles. During this break-in period, the slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder. This applies
280
Driving
Use of the Engine
of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of malfunction.
Breaking-In
Specific Requirements
Today's most modern production
Avoid exceeding 5000 rpm for the first
methods are designed to provide
620 mi trip (1000 km).
extremely precise construction and
After starting the vehicle, do not
assembly of components. However,
exceed 4000 rpm until the engine has
moving parts do undergo a settling
warmed up sufficiently (coolant
process, basically in the first hours of temperature: 149-158°F /65 70°).
vehicle operation. Do not drive keeping at a constant high speed rate for a prolonged time.
Trailer Towing During the first 620 mi (1000 km) of a
Ensure proper operation of different devices checking their respective
While cruising, brief full-throttle
new vehicle it is advisable not to tow a control telltales.
acceleration within the limits of local trailer. This allows to limit the load on
traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
the engine and on the other parts of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
While Driving
Never travel with the tachometer indicator approaching the peak rpm, not even downhill. When the
· Under normal conditions, all red warning lights on the instrument cluster display should be off. When they come on, they indicate a malfunction. Refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard
5
should be consistent with anticipated tachometer indicator is approaching
Instruments and Controls".
climate conditions under which vehicle the peak rpm (red colored zone), take · Continuing to drive when a red
operations will occur. For the
precautions to avoid exceeding that
warning light is on could cause
recommended viscosity and quality
limit.
serious damage to the vehicle and
grades, see "Refillings" in section
affect its performance.
"Features and Specifications". A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles/kilometers of operation. This should be considered as a normal part
Onboard Diagnostic System
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine,
281
Driving
and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will
CAUTION!
Electronic Cruise Control
The electronic Cruise Control (CC)
provide excellent performance and
· Prolonged driving with the
enables the driver to maintain the
fuel economy, as well as engine
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) desired vehicle speed without pressing
emissions well within current local
on could cause further damage to
the accelerator pedal, reducing driving
regulations of various countries.
the emissions control system. It could fatigue on highways, especially long
If any of these systems require service,
also affect fuel economy and
trips, as the set speed is automatically
the system will turn on the
drivability. The vehicle must be
maintained. A firm press on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
serviced before any emissions tests
accelerator pedal or the braking pedal
It will also store diagnostic codes and
can be performed.
will temporarily deactivate the cruise
other information, which your
· If the Malfunction Indicator
control function.
Authorized Maserati Dealer will use to Light (MIL) is flashing while the
service your vehicle. Although the
vehicle will still be driveable and not
need towing, contact an Authorized
5
Maserati Dealer for service as soon as
possible.
engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
CAUTION! The device can only be switched on at speeds exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h) and it switches off automatically when the brake pedal or the accelerator
· After the problem has been solved, pedal is pressed.
the Authorized Maserati Dealer
personnel will perform specific tests
for a complete check of the system
and, if necessary, road tests.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control function must only
be activated when traffic and the
route permit a constant speed to be
maintained safely for a sufficiently
long distance.
282
Driving
Controls
Shared by All Configurations
The electronic Cruise Control controls are located on the left hand side of the steering wheel. Control configuration depends on which driver assist systems are installed to the vehicle. In the standard configuration there is a specific button to enable and disable the CC.
Optional Configuration Control buttons have the following functions:
Standard Configuration
Multifunction switch: · Press up (indication RES
+): increase speed, set current speed or resume previously set speed when system is in "cancelled" status; · Pushed (indication CANC): deletes the set speed; · Press down (indication SET -): set speed/decrease speed.
ON/OFF button to engage/disengage CC system.
NOTE: · The figures only show the Standard
5
Configuration.
Standard Configuration
In the optional configuration, there is no specific button to enable and disable the CC, since driver uses the ACC control buttons.
Optional Configuration
Press ACC Gap button and hold it down for 2 seconds to enable the CC system.
Press ACC button to disable the CC system.
· In order to ensure proper operation, the CC system has been designed to shut down if multiple systems are operated at the same time (example: ACC and FCW). When conditions so allow, the CC system can be reactivated by pushing the CC "ON/OFF" button or the ACC Gap button (in the Optional Configuration) and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
283
Driving
Displayed Information
CC conditions are displayed on the instrument cluster after selecting "Driver Assist" menu (see paragraph "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" under "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Displayed information depends on
WARNING!
Never leave the electronic Cruise Control system on when not in use. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
system status: ready, disabled, cancelled or set.
To turn the system off, push the
Speed Range of Use
Apart from the pop-up messages at the centre of the display, CC system status is represented by icons at the
ON/OFF button a second time or the ACC button (in the Optional Configuration). The white light will
Speed Minimum
mph (km/h) 18 (30)
top left. These icons remain displayed turn off.
Engaged/activated
18 (30)
even when you exit the "Driver Assist"
5 screen.
Maximum
130 (210)
The CC screen can be displayed any time the driver changes system status
Setting Desired Speed
or settings. After 5 seconds of CC
Turn on the CC function. When the
inactivity, the display goes back to last
vehicle has reached the desired speed
screen.
(in the example: 60 mph), push
Activation
downward the multifunction switch (SET -) and release.
To turn the system on, push the
The green light below the desired
ON/OFF button or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in the Optional
NOTE:
speed will illuminate on the instrument cluster display.
Configuration).The white light with The CC system must be turned off
below 3 dashes on the instrument
when not in use.
cluster display will illuminate.
284
Driving
multifunction switch will increase or
decrease the set speed of 1 mph or
1 km/h; a continuous pressure of the
same will increase or decrease the set
speed of 5 mph or 10 km/h.
Release the switch when the desired
speed is reached, and the new set
speed will be visualized below the
green light.
Each subsequent tap of the
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
multifunction switch will increase or decrease the speed by 1 mph or 1 km/h.
Driver Override
If the driver presses the accelerator pedal while the CC is on, such as to
NOTE:
Temporary Deactivation
overtake another vehicle, and exceeds
The vehicle should be traveling at a
A soft tap on the brake pedal,
the set speed limit, the system will
steady speed and on level ground
pressing the multifunction switch
before pushing the switch downward. (CANC), or normal brake pressure
temporarily deactivate the CC. During the event, the speed indication below
5
while slowing the vehicle will
the green light will be blinking.
Pressing the "ON/OFF" button or
temporarily deactivate the CC without
the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in erasing the set speed memory. The
the Optional Configuration) or
white light will appear on the
moving the ignition switch in OFF
display.
position erases the set speed memory.
Changing Speed Setting
Pushing the multifunction switch upward (RES +) or downward (SET -) once, or by holding it down, will enable to increase or decrease the set speed by one unit (1 mph or 1 km/h). If the car is equipped with ADAS Systems, the single press of the
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed and the green light with
285
Driving
below the set speed with steady light will be displayed.
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC (optional)
ADAS Equipments
safety system and is not designed to prevent accidents. The ACC allows driver to keep Cruise Control active in limited or moderate traffic conditions with no need to
upward the multifunction switch (RES The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
constantly restore the Cruise Control.
+) and release. The green light with part of ADAS equipments together
The ACC uses a radar sensor, located
below the set speed will illuminate on with:
on the front grille behind the trident,
the instrument cluster. Resume can be used at any speed above 18 mph (30 km/h).
Using Electronic Cruise Control on Hills
· Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) · Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) · Forward Collision Warning (FCW) · Highway Assist (HAS) · Traffic Sign Assist (TSA).
and the forward-facing camera behind the internal rear-view mirror to detect the presence of a vehicle ahead at a close distance and moving in the same direction.
The transmission may be downshifted FCW, HAS and TSA are separate
on hills to maintain the vehicle set
functions that may not be present in
5
speed. The CC system maintains set
speed up and down hills. A slight
the ADAS equipment. For more details see "Forward Collision Warning -
speed change on moderate hills is
FCW", "Highway Assist - HAS" and
normal. On steep slopes it is
"Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in this
recommended to drive without CC.
section.
WARNING!
Electronic Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Do not use electronic Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery roads.
NOTE: LKA and ABSA are described in the relevant chapters of this section.
ACC Preview
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) further increases the drive comfort ensured by the Cruise Control when driving on highways and freeways. Always consider that ACC is not a
This vehicle, in this chapter, will be indicated as "target vehicle" or "vehicle ahead".
NOTE: · If the sensor detects no vehicle
ahead, the ACC system will maintain set steady speed. · If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle
286
Driving
ahead, the ACC system automatically or unexpectedly. The driver must be
could cause an incorrect assessment
kicks in by slightly accelerating or
careful since his/her intervention
of the required safety distance.
braking (to avoid exceeding the
could be necessary.
It is recommended to disable the ACC
initially set speed) so that the vehicle keeps present distance, trying to adapt to the speed of the detected vehicle ahead.
· It is always the driver's responsibility to obey speed limits and to keep minimum legal distance to the preceding vehicle.
system in the following instances:
· When driving in the fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, slush, heavy traffic and similar complex situations such as
· ACC system can decelerate only with highway construction zones.
limited braking, it cannot execute
· When entering a junction lane or a
WARNING!
emergency braking.
slip road to leave the highway; when
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is The ACC system: designed to increase vehicle driving
driving on narrow, icy, snowy, slippery roads, or on uphill and
comfort. It must not be considered
· Does not activate/react in the
downhill roads.
as a means of replacing the required
presence of pedestrians, bicycles,
· The system is designed and calibrate
attention of the driver. The driver is always required to drive carefully. The driver is always required to pay
incoming traffic from opposite direction and steady objects such as a vehicle stuck in a traffic jam.
for car with no trailer.
· When circumstances do not allow to drive safely at constant speed.
5
utmost attention to driving conditions (road, traffic, weather)
· Is meant for the use on highways and well-built roads, not for city
Displayed information
and style (speed, distance from
traffic or mountain roads.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
sensed vehicle ahead, brake use).
· May not have enough time to react condition, as well as the LKA and HAS
Driver has the full responsibility of
and/or decelerate sufficiently on
status, is displayed on instrument
the vehicle therefore his attention is vehicles when lane is changed too
cluster after selecting "Driver Assist"
crucial to keeping vehicle control, in
quickly or the relative speed is too
menu (see paragraph "TFT Display:
particular when approaching curves
high. In such cases the driver has to Menus and Settings" under
and situations with heavy traffic.
react appropriately and without any "Instrument Cluster" in section
Failure to follow these warnings can acoustic/visual warning.
"Dashboard Instruments and
result in a collision and death or
· Cannot consider road, traffic and
Controls").
serious personal injury
weather conditions and might prove Displayed information depends on
· In some driving scenarios, the ACC could have detection problems. In
limited when visibility is poor. · Does not always fully recognize
system status: ready, set, temporarily cancelled or override.
such cases, the ACC could kick in late complex driving conditions and this
287
Driving
Apart from the image at the center of the display, CC, ACC, HDC, LKA and HAS systems status is represented by icons at the top left and right. These icons remain displayed even when exiting the "Driver Assist" screen. The vehicle(s) and horizontal bars represent the ACC status as ready (white) or with sensed vehicle ahead (green); the white, grey or yellow lines represent the LKA and HAS systems. The ACC screen can be displayed any time driver changes system status or settings. After 5 seconds of ACC inactivity, the display goes back to last screen.
5 ACC Controls and Activation Conditions
The buttons on the LH side of the steering wheel control the ACC operations and the other functions/driver assist systems installed to this vehicle.
288
1 Multifunction control shared by all driver assist functions/systems: · Press up (indication "RES +"): increase speed, set current speed or resume previously set speed when system is in "cancelled" status. · Pushed (indication "CANC"): cancel the function if it was in "set" status, going in a ready condition but remembering the previous set speed. · Press down (indication "SET -"): set speed/decrease speed.
2 Two functions button with ACC activated: · ACC Gap: pressed and released; set the distance to sensed vehicle ahead as horizontal bars (setting cycle starts to 3 bars). · CC On: pressed for 2 seconds activates the CC system. · Press it to switch from CC to ACC.
3 ACC ON/OFF button. If enabled, pressing this button will disable CC.
4 HAS ON/OFF button with ACC set only. See "Highway Assist - HAS" in this section for further details.
NOTE:
Any change made to tire dimensions affects performance of Adaptive Cruise Control and Front Collision Warning (FCW), if equipped.
The ACC is not activated in the following conditions:
· When braking. · When parking brake is activated. · When automatic transmission is in P
(Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). · When vehicle speed is out of preset
speed range. · When brakes are overheated.
Driving
· When driver door is open.
Activation/Deactivation
· When the driver's seat belt is unbuckled.
· When the road is particularly steep (both uphill and downhill) at low
NOTE:
Pictures show status of ACC and LKA systems.
speed.
· When ride height is "Off Road 1" or "Off Road 2", or drive mode is "OFF
Press and release ON/OFF button to activate the ACC. The display will show the white symbol with below
ROAD".
3 dashes will illuminate indicating that
· When drive mode (ESC OFF) is selected.
· When the door is opened at low speed.
system is ready to be set.
Non-Driver Assist Page If a vehicle is detected as being too close, the display will show a message for 5 seconds and trigger a signal to
· When there has been an ESC event
warn the driver that current
in the last 5 seconds, or is still active.
conditions do not allow enabling of
· When there is an object too close in
the ACC. At any rate, system will
5
front of the vehicle.
remain in the ready status.
It is possible that more than one
system is active at the same time such
as ACC and ABSA just to mention
some. While activation of ACC and CC at the
Driver Assist Page
same time is impossible.
Speed Range of Use
Speed Minimum Engaged/activated Maximum
mph (km/h) 0 (0) 18 (30) 130 (210)
Push the ON/OFF button a second time and release to turn the system off. A pop-up message is displayed for 2
289
Driving
seconds to indicate that ACC was disabled.
distance bars, in the center of the display.
down (SET -). Speed can be increased or decreased in two ways:
· Pressing control once, set speed will increase or decrease by one unit corresponding to 1 mph (1 km/h).
· Hold the control to increase or decrease set speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) at a time.
NOTE:
· When pressing the multifunction
control up (RES +) or down (SET -),
the new set speed will be the current
Remove foot from accelerator pedal
speed of the vehicle.
and vehicle will continue at set speed.
· When using (SET -) control to
WARNING!
Driver Override
decelerate, if the engine braking
5
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally activate the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
If driver accelerates beyond the set speed or faster than the car would do with ACC engaged, the set speed below the green light will blink and the time gap bars will vanish to indicate that in this condition the system cannot control the distance
power does not slow down the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow down the vehicle.
· The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
Setting the Speed
between vehicle and sensed vehicle ahead. Vehicle speed will be
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after a two or three second
When the vehicle reaches the required determined only by the accelerator
delay, the system will not be able to
speed, press down and release the
pedal position.
resume driving the car
multifunction control (SET -). The
autonomously. At this point it is
display will show set speed
Changing Speed Setting
necessary for the driver to manually
corresponding to vehicle current one. Speed value will be indicated below the green symbol and above the
Once speed is set, driver can increase or decrease it by respectively pressing multifunction control up (RES +) or
reengage the system by either using the multifunction control (press SETor RES+) or by pressing the
290
Driving
accelerator pedal (see "ACC
· Transmission lever is not in D (Drive).
Operation Before and During Stop" in this chapter).
· The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the
· "CORSA" drive mode (TROFEO version only) is set.
· Ride height is set to "Off Road 1" or "Off Road 2".
· The Electronic Stability Control and the Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activate.
· Vehicle parking brake is operated.
· The driver safety belt is unbuckled at low speed.
· The driver door is ajar at low speed.
WARNING! The resume function should be used only when road and traffic conditions allow it. Resuming a too high or too low speed for current traffic and road conditions could cause a harsh vehicle acceleration or deceleration which could increase the risk of collisions and death or serious injury.
Setting the ACC Gap
braking temperature exceeds normal · The driver disabled the ESC using the The specified ACC gap can be set by
range.
(ESC OFF) button on central
varying the distance setting among
console.
the four possible options identified by
Temporary Deactivation
· The road is too steep both uphill and the number of horizontal bars:
5
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the multifunction control (CANC), or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will temporarily deactivate the ACC without erasing the set speed memory. The white light will appear on the display with below the set speed.
Conditions for Disabling and
downhill at low speed. The system is deactivated and set speed is deleted from system memory, if the ACC ON/OFF button is pressed or if ignition device is turned to OFF.
Resuming Speed
If a speed setting is stored in system memory, press the multifunction control (RES +) up and take foot off
· Maximum (longest) distance: 4 bars.
· Long distance: 3 bars (default distance).
· Medium distance: 2 bars.
· Short distance: 1 bar. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the gap to the vehicle ahead. If system does not detect the presence
Deactivation
the accelerator pedal. The last set
of any vehicles ahead, only the bars
Besides the cases specified in the previous paragraph, the following conditions will disable the system:
· Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) kicks in.
speed will be displayed.
referred to set distance will be displayed. When system detects the presence of a vehicle ahead, it is displayed in front of the bars (see example in the figure).
291
Driving
· The driver disables the system.
The maximum braking applied by ACC
is limited; however, the driver can
always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary. Any time the ACC system
automatically operates the brakes, the
brake lights will turn on as if the driver
was braking.
A Proximity Warning on display will
alert the driver if ACC predicts that its
Driver Assist Page
Each press and release of the button changes the gap starting from 3 bars
maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance.
(default distance) and moving in a
If this occurs, a visual alert will flash on
sequential way towards the minimum the display and a chime will sound
distance: 32143214 and so while ACC continues to apply its
on.
maximum braking capacity.
5
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle
will maintain the set speed. If a slower
moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the system displays the target
vehicle icon before the bars. From that
moment, the system adjusts the vehicle
Non-Driver Assist Page
speed automatically to maintain the
To increase or decrease the number of distance setting, regardless of the set
bars, corresponding to the gap from
speed.
vehicle ahead, press and release the
The vehicle will then maintain the set
distance setting button.
distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle ahead moves out of the lane or view of the sensor.
· The distance setting is changed.
292
Driving
NOTE:
determines that the vehicle has moved the ACC system shall be cancelled
The displayed warning is a warning for the driver to take action and does
back to a location with left hand drive.
when the EPB is applied.
not necessarily mean that the Forward ACC Operation Before and
Collision Warning (FCW) system is applying the brakes autonomously.
During Stop
WARNING! · When the ACC system is resumed,
If an ACC host vehicle follows a target
the driver must ensure that there
Overtake Aid
vehicle to a standstill, after two or
are no pedestrians, vehicles or
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front.
three seconds the system will not be able to resume driving the car autonomously. In this condition, TFT displays an instruction message pop up for 5 seconds.
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
This additional acceleration is
When the ACC system brings the
· During the automatic stopping
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal to start overtaking. In
vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, the brakes are
behind a vehicle in some rare cases it may happen that the system does
locations with left hand drive traffic, overtake aid is active only when
released after two or three seconds after the stop and at the same time
not recognize the rearmost point of
the vehicle ahead but a target under
5
passing on the left hand side of the
the system inserts the parking brake.
the vehicle ahead (e.g. the back axis
target vehicle.
When parking brake engages the ACC
of a truck with a high loading edge
When a vehicle goes from a location
deactivates going to ready state.
or a bumper of a vehicle although
with left hand drive traffic to a
At this point the driver must reengage
overhanging load is hanging over
location with right hand drive traffic, the system acting on the multifunction the vehicle's rear). In these cases the
the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
control (RES + or SET -) or alternatively on the accelerator pedal. While ACC
system cannot guarantee the appropriate stopping distance
condition, overtake aid is active only when passing on the right side of the
with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver unbuckles the
leading to collision in the worst case. For this reason the driver has
target vehicle. This additional
seatbelt or opens the door, the ESC
to be attentive and ready to brake
acceleration is triggered when the
system will activate the EPB. During
during automatic stops.
driver utilizes the right turn signal to standstill, ACC system monitors the
start overtaking. In this condition the occupant detection signals: if the
ACC system will no longer provide
driver's seatbelt becomes unbuckled,
overtake aid on the left side until it
293
Driving
Display Warnings and
To keep the ACC System operating
NOTE:
Maintenance of ACC and FCW Systems
properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
If the radar sensor wipe warning message occurs frequently (e.g. more
Wipe Front Radar Sensor Warning This warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage it.
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
due to sensor poor or failed signal reception. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC and FCW
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
Clean Front Windshield Warning The warning will display and a signal will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance
systems may also become temporarily · If the sensor or front end of the
due to failed signal reception. This
blinded due to obstructions, such as
vehicle is damaged due to a collision, most often occurs at times of poor
mud, dirt or ice on the radar sensor. In see your authorized dealer for
visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain
these cases, the system will be
service.
and fog. The ACC and FCW systems
5
disabled. This message can sometimes be
· Do not attach or install any
may also become temporarily blinded
accessories near the sensor, including due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt,
displayed while driving in highly
transparent material or aftermarket or ice on windshield and fog on the
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC inside of glass or when driving in bad
reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The
system failure or malfunction. When weather. In these cases, the system will
ACC and FCW systems will recover
the condition that deactivated the
have degraded performance.
operation after the vehicle has left
system is no longer present, the
The ACC and FCW systems will recover
these areas. Under rare conditions,
system will return to the "Adaptive operation after the vehicle has left
when the radar is not tracking any
Cruise Control Off" state and will
these areas. Under rare conditions,
vehicles or objects in its path this
resume function by simply
when the camera is not tracking any
warning may temporarily occur.
reactivating it.
vehicles or objects in its path this
If weather conditions are not a factor,
warning may temporarily occur.
the driver should examine the sensor.
If weather conditions are not a factor,
It may require cleaning or removal of
the driver should examine the
an obstruction. The sensor is located in
windshield and the camera. They may
the center of the front grille, behind
require cleaning or removal of an
the Maserati trident.
obstruction.
294
Driving
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the ACC and FCW systems will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper warning
message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the windshield and forward-facing camera inspected at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Precautions while Driving with ACC
Turns and Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Towing a Trailer
vehicle speed and acceleration for
If the ACC and FCW systems turn off,
stability reasons, with no target
and the system displays a service warning, there may be an internal
WARNING!
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve the system will
5
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits functionality.
Towing a trailer when using ACC can lead to serious system failures which
resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
Although the vehicle is still driveable
can cause severe accidents.
functionality. Moreover, the radar
under normal conditions, ACC and FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC and
Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your
sensor might detect a vehicle on a nearby lane or no longer detect the target vehicle.
FCW again later, following a key cycle. direct line of travel, or a vehicle
If the problem persists, contact an
merging in from a side lane. There
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake
or accelerate unexpectedly.
295
Driving
In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lane and it may not detect the vehicle until it is too late for the driver to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Using ACC on Hills
When driving on steep hills, ACC may
not detect a vehicle in your lane when
the vehicle reaches the crest.
Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of
5
the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
Stationary Objects and Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling.
Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles (like motorcycles) traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
296
Driving
Radar Device - Regulatory
Forward Collision Warning
Information
FCW
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the "Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with braking action uses the same parts already described for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for sensing vehicle ahead (hereinafter
"target vehicle") as well as part of the
warnings/messages on system
condition and activation status.
The difference between full and
Full performance can be reached only reduced performance is not visible for
when both the sensing parts have
the driver.
detected a vehicle or, if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) system, also a
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System (if equipped)
pedestrian.
The Pedestrian Emergency Braking
5
(PEB) is a sub-system of FCW and it
provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings on the
instrument cluster display, and may
apply automatic braking when it
detect a potential frontal collision
with a pedestrian.
WARNING! Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every type of potential collision with pedestrian.
(Continued)
297
Driving
(Continued)
forward collision. If the driver reacts to activation and functionality.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Operation
The FCW provides audible and visual warnings when a potential collision is detected. Brake jerk and limited braking may also be applied
the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning messages will be deactivated.
· It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle. The limit of four events applies to the brake jerk too.
· The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system
depending on the specific scenario.
NOTE:
should be deactivated to prevent
NOTE:
· Bad weather conditions, like strong rain, snow, etc., can lead to reduced
unnecessary warnings. If the vehicle ride height is set to "Off Road 1" or
FCW system is not intended for
system performance. Under these
"Off Road 2", the FCW system will be
5
towing: this could lead the system to
conditions relevant objects will not
automatically deactivated.
malfunctions and/or to late reaction.
be detected or detected late by the · FCW will automatically deactivated
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking radar sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
system.
· FCW is designed to react in specific situations in typical traffic scenarios
when (ESC OFF) button is pressed (LED light up) and when HDC is active.
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a with objects in the same lane driving
forward collision. When the system
in the same direction, but under
determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a warning brake jerk. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow down the vehicle and mitigate the potential
certain conditions it can also react on stationary objects in the same lane. It is not designed to react to oncoming traffic or crossing traffic.
· The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
WARNING!
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to
298
Driving
follow this warning could lead to
FCW Status
serious injury or death. The driver is always in charge to safely drive and to avoid critical situations not relying on the support of the system. Driver has to keep in mind that the system and therefore its intervention is always subject to the prevailing physical limits.
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is
The driver can adjust FCW sensitivity or enable/disable the brake actuation with the other emergency brakings by touching "Controls" soft-key on MTC+ display. The current setting is indicated beside to the "Forward Collision Warning" soft-key. If you want to change the setting, touch the soft-key on the side to enter FCW page.
not intended either to warn or to
This warning light informs the driver
apply any brake aid/brake
that FCW is disabled. This warning
intervention in case of collisions
light will light even when the
with pedestrians (if not equipped
activation of another driver assistance
with PEB sub-system), bicycles and
feature or drive mode (example:
not licensable vehicles in general.
(ESC OFF)) disables the FCW.
Speed Range of Use
NOTE:
5
The FCW system setting is kept in
Speed Minimum Engaged/activated Maximum
mph (km/h) 0 (0) 1.12 (1.8) 155 (250)
When the speed is outside the specified limits, the system automatically disables without turning on the corresponding warning light on the instrument cluster.
Setting options are described in the following paragraph. When FCW status for some reason changes to off, the corresponding amber warning light on instrument cluster will light on.
memory from one key cycle to the next.
Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking
The default status of FCW Sensitivity is the "Medium" setting. When the active braking function ("Forward Collision Warning Active Braking") setting is on, the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther
away and it applies limited braking.
299
Driving
This gives you the most reaction time
of speed.
NOTE:
to help avoid a possible collision.
· The active braking (autonomous
· The adjustment of the sensor could
Changing the sensitivity status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with
braking/braking aid) will not provided in case of potential collision with static object such as guard rails,
be affected by strong shocks or light collisions. This could affect the system by reducing the systems
the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" sensitivity setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
walls, etc..).
· FCW will be disabled like ACC (refer to chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control ACC" in this section.
performance or could increase the false positive rate. The adjustment of the radar system has to be proved or a new adjustment has to be performed by an Authorized
"Medium" is the intermediate status Changing the active braking status to
Maserati Dealer.
between the two described above.
5
"Off" prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. In this state the system disables the brake jerk.
· The radar system requires specific feature to detect objects. The detection could be disturbed/reduced by environment influences, for example by electrical field or the object itself. Object with small radar reflection properties could not be
NOTE: · The default values shall appear at
every new ignition cycle: Sensitivity = "Medium" and Active Braking = on.
Limited Operation and Service Warning
The messages indicating on display the limited functionality or service at an Authorized Maserati Dealer required are the same as for the ACC system. For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control ACC" in this section.
detected or detected late. · When in "CORSA" mode (TROFEO
version only), the FCW feature is deactivated.
Radar Device - Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all
· FCW may not react to irrelevant
the radio frequency and radar devices
objects such as objects not in the
can be consulted by accessing the
path of the car, stationary objects
"Services" section on the website
that are far away, oncoming traffic,
www.maserati.com.
on cross traffic vehicles, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate
300
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist - LKA NOTE:
(optional, with ACC only)
In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be
This system was designed especially
disabled by the system in order to
for highway or freeway driving, to
minimize the risks.
reduce the risk that the vehicle, under
particular circumstances, accidentally departs from the lane in use. When
Speed Range of Use
this happens, graphic instructions on
Speed
mph (km/h)
instrument cluster display together with steering torque application and steering wheel vibration (depending on the distance to the line) warn the
Minimum Engaged/activated Maximum
37 (60) 37 (60) 112 (180)
Touching the soft-key on the side the driver can change the setting. Driver warnings can be only "Visual"
driver that the vehicle is going out of
or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode).
the lane and initiate a steering
Customized Settings
System response can be set to "Early",
maneuver to try to prevent the lane
"Medium" (default mode) or "Late".
exit.
LKA is configurable by the driver in
System reaction force can be set to
5
To detect lane lines, the system uses
order to maximize its efficiency based "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or
the forward-facing camera behind of on the driver driving style and the
"High".
the rear-view mirror, which is the same expectation of the system, reducing at
one used also by the lighting system
the same time the possible
to manage the automatic high beams. invasiveness.
The logic core is in the front radar.
Entering "Controls" page on MTC+
LKA system remembers the condition display the driver can see the current
it was in before turning off the
setting beside the "Lane Keeping
vehicle.
Assist" soft-key.
Refer to "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in Touching "Lane Keeping Assist"
section "Dashboard Instruments and
soft-key can disable or enable the
Controls" for further information.
system.
Meanings of Settings
· "Visual" only: the system will not request any steering torque/
301
Driving
vibration to correct the car trajectory. System Availability
ABS) will also prevent the system from
The system will only show on the TFT display when the vehicle is passing
The ADAS systems (LKA, CC, ACC, FCW and HAS) help the driver while driving.
operating. Changing lane results in system inhibition for a certain time. In
the lane. · "Visual & Haptic": the system will
These systems can be set and monitored simultaneously on the
addition, the driver must respect some road characteristics such as
apply steering torque when lane
display, after opening "Driver Assist"
departure is detected while showing menu (see paragraph "TFT Display:
minimum-maximum width, lanes clearly defined by two lane boundaries
at the same time the proper cluster Menus and Settings" under
and for a limited time, the presence of
indication, adding to this steering
"Instrument Cluster" in section
at least one lane boundary.
vibration when the departure is very "Dashboard Instruments and
NOTE:
imminent. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and LKA is enabled then the following menu will be used by the system.
Controls"). LKA is designed for an attentive driver; therefore the system is available only when his/her hands are on the steering
· In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks.
5
· "LKA Sensitivity": it tunes the distance to the lane boundary where the system will start to apply steering torque.
· "LKA Strength": it tunes the steering torque value to have a stronger or weaker trajectory correction/ deviation.
wheel or with hands off only for a very limited amount of time. When the system is enabled it will trigger cluster warning in case at least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel. The torque application as well as the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in case of: high driver torque in the
· With lane boundaries it is mainly referred to painted lines, nevertheless the system in good conditions might properly recognize as valid lane boundaries also other types (for example road edges, curbs, etc..).
steering wheel, high lateral
Being this function used to prevent
acceleration, trailer connected to the unintentional lane change/lane drift, it
WARNING!
In rare cases, Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) may make an inappropriate steering torque application. LKA may be interrupted at any time counter steering. Lack of attention may lead to serious injury or death.
proper control module, hands not on the steering wheel detected for more than a certain time. High dynamic driving behaviors, driving on the lane boundary or driving off course will prevent the function from working. FCW braking and stability system interventions (ESC,
will be temporary suppressed/inhibited by a turn indicator activation, therefore, graphic warning, steering torque application and vibration will be terminated. In this condition in case of a vehicle detected by the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system in the covered area on the proper side, there can be the
302
transition from LKA to Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) (if this latter is on and properly configured).
Function Description and Operating Mode
Intent of the function is to prevent the lane departure by warning the driver through indication on the cluster and if set applying steering torque and vibration. Whenever the system is enable there will be graphic on the dedicated screen in the driver assist page and for the others it will be available in the left top corner of the cluster screen. The graphic which intent is to represent at the glance the system knowledge of the lane in front of the car, the system suppression status and warning. For this a simple colour code has been adopted for each line (of the two presented):
· Both grey lines means system is enabled, not able to operate (suppression condition present or lane detection system not able to estimate properly the lane);
· Left/right grey line: the lane detection system is not able to detect that specific lane boundary;
· Yellow line: there is a steering torque intervention in progress that tries to prevent a departure on that side, in this situation the warning should increase the driver attention requiring him to properly handle the situation;
· Yellow flashing line: the graphic is shown whenever the system detects a very imminent lane departure, at this can be added torque and steering vibration if configured by the customer.
The white lines (one or both) indicates that the corresponding lane boundary is detected and the system is capable to intervene on it. An example of this screen, with only LKA system activated and with LKA and ACC systems activated, can be found in the following figures:
A: with only LKA system activated, steering torque in progress to correct the trajectory towards the lane center;
B: with LKA and ACC systems activated, car is crossing the lane boundary, steering torque and vibration if configured are in progress when this graphic is shown.
Driving
5
Driver Assist Page 303
Driving
rain, snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun on the camera, etc.).
prevent/interrupt the system intervention.
NOTE:
· The presence of the hands on the steering wheel is detected by a logic
WARNING!
combination of a capacitive sensor installed in the steering wheel and
If the driver fails to adapt his/her driving style, Lane Keeping Assist
the measured applied torque at the (LKA) can neither reduce the risk of an
steering column. This leads to a more accident nor override the laws of
robust hands detection when hands physics. It cannot take into account
are actually on the steering wheel (at least one).
road, weather or traffic conditions. Active LKA is only an aid. Driver is
always responsible for the distance to
· The sensors are not able to detect
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
the presence of the hands on the
for braking in good time and for
steering wheel areas covered in
staying in lane.
5
wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts
(where present).
System in Fault
Non-Driver Assist Page
The icons that represent the status of the ADAS systems remain displayed even when you exit the "Driver Assist" screen.
Sharp turns, slopes and change in slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well as construction areas and all the scenario described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. Damaged front bumper, windshield
When the LKA cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components or because the windshield in front of the forward facing camera is dirty, the amber light and/or the corresponding message will be displayed.
System Limitations
Because of physical limits, in order to properly operate, the system needs good visibility (it might not work or not properly operate in case of heavy
replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as fault, but not explicitly indicated here may also
304
Driving
Blind Spot Assist BSA (without ACC)
vehicle is in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the transmission is in (P) Park.
BSA System Operation
The Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located
inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles
(cars, buses, motorbikes, etc.) that
If message suggestion does not allow enter the blind spot zones from the
fixing the fault, do not use the system rear/front/side of the vehicle.
and have the vehicle inspected at the The example shown in the figure
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
highlights the blind spots on either side of the vehicle when oncoming
The BSA detection zone shown in
Radar Device - Regulatory
traffic is approaching from behind.
figure covers approximately one lane
Information
on both sides of the vehicle (approximately 11 ft or 3.3 m). The
5
The "Regulatory Information" for all
blind spot area extends from
the radio frequency and radar devices
immediately behind the exterior
can be consulted by accessing the
rear-view mirrors up to about 23 ft (7
"Services" section on the website
m) behind the rear bumper.
www.maserati.com.
When the vehicle is started, the BSA warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational and on. The BSA system sensors operate when the
305
Driving
The BSA system monitors the detection · Always pay attention to the traffic "BSA and RCP Setting" in this chapter
zones on both sides of the vehicle
situation and maintain a safe
for further information.
when the vehicle speed reaches
distance at the side of the vehicle.
The BSA system monitors the detection
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
zone from three different entry points
higher and will alert the driver of
NOTE:
(side, rear, overtaking traffic) while
vehicles in these areas. WARNING!
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSA system will issue an alert whenever a vehicle enters any one detection zone as outlined below.
· The BSA system does NOT alert the become misaligned. Take your vehicle Speed Range of Use
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
at an Authorized Maserati Dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a
Speed
mph (km/h)
detection zones.
sensor that is misaligned will result in Minimum
6 (10)
· The BSA might alert the driver too
the BSA not operating to specification. Engaged/activated
6 (10)
late especially in case of rapidly
5
approaching vehicles.
WARNING! Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist (BSA). BSA does not detect/react to the following:
The area on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSA system can function properly. Do not cover or block the area of the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, spoilers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Maximum
()
Entering from the Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.
· Overtaking vehicles close on the
The BSA system notifies the driver of
side, placing them in the blind spot vehicles or objects in the detection
area. As a result, BSA may neither
zones by illuminating the BSA warning
give warnings nor intervene in such light located in the outside mirrors in
situations.
addition to sounding an audible
(chime) alert and reducing the radio
volume (if the radio is on). Refer to
306
Entering from the Rear
The alert will turn on when the vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of more than 27 mph (43 km/h).
Driving
The BSA system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
5
Overtaking Traffic
The figures show the vehicle approaching (A) and passing (O) another vehicle in the overtaking lane. If you pass another vehicle slowly, the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 2 seconds, the BSA warning light in the outside mirror will illuminate after 1.5 seconds. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater, the warning light will not illuminate.
Other Cases
The BSA system is not designed to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage heaps, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.
WARNING! · The BSA system is only an aid to
help detect vehicles in the blind spot zones.
(Continued)
307
Driving
(Continued)
NOTE:
specifically, it is intended to be used to
· The BSA system is not designed to detect pedestrians, cyclists, or animals.
· Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSA system, always check your vehicle's outside and rearview mirrors for any vehicles approaching from behind or overtaking.
· Use your turn signal before changing lanes.
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.
Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is moderately exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
RCP - Rear Cross Path
view of the cross traffic. If an
BSA and RCP Setting
oncoming vehicle is detected, the RCP
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when gear
system will alert the driver using both the visual and audible alarms. If the
Setting modes can be selected from the MTC+ System.
5
in reverse of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may
radio is on, it will also reduce the radio Touch "Controls" soft-key and then
volume.
"Blind Spot Assist" soft-key to enter
be blocked.
the setting page.
The RCP system monitors the rear
detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle. Using sensors located on either
side of the rear bumper, it detects any
vehicles or objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a
minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h) to a
maximum of approximately 10 mph
(16 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
Refer to chapter "MTC+ "Controls"
WARNING! RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. More
Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information.
308
Driving
BSA in Visual Mode
an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in "Visual" mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror when it detects a vehicle or an object
(if on) is also muted. Right/left turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP status always requests the chime.
in the detection areas monitored by its
Blind Spot Assist Off
sensors: depending on the status of the relative turn indicator, the warning light can be fixed or flashing. However, when the system is operating in RCP mode, it will respond
If the turn signal is then activated, and
When this function is turned off from the MTC+, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSA or RCP subsystems.
with both visual and audible alerts
it corresponds to an alert present on NOTE:
when an oncoming vehicle or an object approaching the rear end side of the vehicle is detected.
that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded: in the same moment the warning light will
The BSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
Whenever an audible alert is
start flashing.
started, the previously-stored mode
requested, the radio is muted (if the
Whenever a turn signal and detected will be recalled and used.
5
radio is on).
vehicle or object are present on the
BSA in Visual and Acoustic Mode
When operating in "Visual & Acoustic" mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected vehicle or object.
same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio volume will be reduced (if the radio is on).
NOTE:
If the hazard flashers are on, the BSA system will issue the appropriate visual alert only.
System Temporarily Unavailable
The blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the instrument cluster display will show the message "Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable" when the vehicle enters a radio quite zone (example the areas around radio telescopes). The warning light on the outside
When the system is in RCP mode, the rear-view mirrors will be lit up and
system shall respond with both visual stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
and audible alerts when a detected
vehicle or object is present. Whenever
309
Driving
System is Faulty The BSA system cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components, or because the area on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located is dirty. In these cases the amber warning light and the related message will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
5
In these cases avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Radar Device - Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the "Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
310
Active Blind Spot Assist ABSA (optional, with ACC only)
ABSA system is only available on vehicles equipped with ACC system and represents an addition to the BSA previously described (see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" of this section). ABSA adds to the BSA the possibility in certain circumstances to avoid and or mitigate side collisions with vehicles proceeding in the adjacent lanes by changing the car trajectory in order to try to keep it inside the detected/ estimated lane. A steering wheel vibration is used as further feedback to warn the driver that the lane change is not safe. The main logic core is the front radar, whereas the sense inputs are the radars on the rear bumper fascia used for sensing the presence of vehicle in the blind spot areas and the forward facing camera placed behind the internal rear-view mirror that instead is used for lane detection and estimation. ABSA is designed to help the driver to avoid mitigate a collision. Torque and vibration application is however
available in the 37 - 112 mph (60 180 km/h) speed interval. All the speed thresholds related to the BSA remain still valid, since ABSA as mentioned is BSA extension. ABSA is intended as a "hands-on" function meaning that the driver is required to stay engaged in the driving all the time with his/her hands on the steering wheel, in case hands are not on the steering wheel for a certain time there cannot be any steering torque application vibration included.
System Availability
ABSA is designed for an attentive driver therefore the system is available only when his/her hands are on the steering wheel or with hands off for a very limited amount of time. When the system is enabled, it will trigger cluster warning in case at least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel. The torque application as well as the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in case of: high driver torque in the steering wheel, high lateral acceleration, hands not on the steering wheel detected for more than a certain time. Highly dynamic behaviours, driving on the lane boundary, off course will
Driving
prevent the function from working.
Speed Range of Use
ABSA Setting
FCW braking and stability system interventions (ESC, ABS) will also prevent the system from operating. Changing lane results in system inhibition for a certain time. In addition the road must respect some characteristics such as minimummaximum width, lane clearly defined by two lane boundaries and only in limited case for a limited time at least one.
Speed Minimum Engaged/activated Maximum
mph (km/h) 37 (60) 37 (60) 112 (180)
System Limitation
Because of physical limits the system to properly operate needs good visibility (it might not work or not
ABSA is configurable by the customer in order to maximize its efficiency based on the driver driving style and his/her expectation of the system, reducing at the same time the possible invasiveness. Setting modes can be selected from the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information).
NOTE:
properly operate in case of heavy rain, Touch "Controls" soft-key to display
· In case of wet road or raining
snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun on
the current status of the ABSA system,
conditions the function could be
the camera, dirty windshield, low
if it was in the on state.
disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks.
illumination etc.) Sharp turns, slopes and change in
5
· With lane boundaries it is mainly referred to painted lines, nevertheless the system in good conditions might properly recognise as valid lane boundaries also other types (for example road edges, curbs, etc..).
slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well as construction areas and all the scenarios described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. Damaged front bumper, windshield replaced without proper technical
intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as faults, but not explicitly indicated here may also prevent/interrupt the system intervention.
To change status, touch the "Active Blind Spot Assist" soft-key. To change the system setting, touch the soft-key on the side. Driver warnings can be only "Visual", "Visual & Acoustic" (default mode) or
"Visual & Haptic".
311
Driving
System sensitivity can be set to "Early", · ABSA "Strength": it tunes the
· The presence of the hands on the
"Medium" (default mode) or "Late".
steering torque value to have a
steering wheel is detected by a logic
System strength can be set to "Low",
stronger or weaker trajectory
combination of a capacitive sensor
"Medium" (default mode) or "High".
correction/deviation.
installed in the steering wheel and
Blind Spot Assist in "Visual & Haptic" Mode
When the system is on and configured
the measured applied torque at the steering column. This leads to a more robust hands detection.
"Visual & Haptic" then the ABSA is
enabled and to the conventional visual
warnings is added the steering torque
WARNING!
and vibration.
· Risk of accident despite steering
When operating in this mode, the
torque application of Active Blind
system will provide a visual alert in the Spot Assist (ABSA).
appropriate outside rear-view mirror
5
NOTE:
The ABSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously-stored mode will be recalled and used.
when it detects a vehicle or an object in the detection areas monitored by its sensors. In case of turn indicator activation on the appropriate side, the system will react with a torque on the steering wheel to try to prevent the lane change and therefore to
· A course-correcting steering torque application cannot always prevent a collision.
· The driver is always required to steer, brake or accelerate themself, especially if ABSA warns or makes a course correcting steer intervention.
Meanings of Settings
When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and of course ABSA is enabled, then two following menus will be used by the system.
avoid/mitigate the collision. The torque on the steering is applied when the car is very close to the lane boundary as a further feedback to warn the driver of the unsafe maneuver.
· Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
· Steering torque application may be interrupted at any time by counter steering by the driver.
· ABSA "Sensitivity": it tunes the distance to the lane boundary where the system will start to apply steering
NOTE: · The steering torque is not supplied if
RCP - Rear Cross Path Operation
torque.
the system is not able to estimate a lane and if the turn indicator from the appropriate side is not inserted.
RCP operation is the same as described in chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA".
312
Driving
When ABSA is turned off from MTC+ "Controls" page, there will be no visual or audible alerts from RCP
windshield where the forward-facing Highway Assist HAS
camera is located or on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors
(optional, with ACC only)
subsystem. When ABSA is turned on with any setting,RCP subsystem shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected vehicle or object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio (if on) is also muted. Right/left turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP status always requests the chime.
are located is dirty. In these cases the amber warning light and the related message will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
The Highway Assist (HAS) is a level 2 Autonomy system (in reference to NHTSA standards) that is designed to aid the driver in the steering, acceleration, and braking functions of the vehicle. HAS is designed to only function on highways or limited access freeways. HAS centers the vehicle by controlling the EPS system based off of lane line information from the forward-facing
System Temporarily
camera and data from the front radar
Unavailable
sensor.
5
The blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the instrument cluster display will show the message "Blind Spot Alert
In these cases do not use the system and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Temporarily Unavailable" when the
Radar Device - Regulatory
vehicle enters a radio quite zone (example the areas around radio telescopes). The warning light on the outside rear-view mirrors will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
System in Fault
Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the "Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
HAS combines ACC and LKA to manage the steering and speed of the vehicle under specific conditions. The
The ABSA system cannot properly operate either due to a fault of its components, or because the area on
conditions to engage HAS are listed in the next paragraph. If a lane line cross is imminent, the steering wheel will
313
Driving
vibrate and a graphic will display on
instructions could result in serious
· Wet roads, roads covered or partially
the instrument cluster.
injury or death.
covered by snow.
· The following list does not fully
· Construction zones.
WARNING!
represent all situations in which HAS may not function as intended. Do
HAS Operation
· In case the vehicle approaches a
NOT solely rely on the HAS system With ACC set (see "Adaptive Cruise
curve that is too tight in relation to
to control the vehicle. It is the
Crontrol ACC" in this section), HAS
the current speed the system will
driver's responsibility to stay alert
system activates by simply pressing the
disengage, therefore the driver must and safely control the vehicle at all
button on the steering wheel.
be prepared to take over control of
times.
Once the conditions are met, HAS will
the vehicle immediately at any time. · If the windshield is replaced, you
engage.
To avoid this situation it is important must have the forward-facing
that the vehicle speed is not set higher than the current speed limit of the road.
camera remounted and aligned by an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
CAUTION! The Highway Assist (HAS) system may
Many factors can impact the
take up to 5 seconds to engage once
5
· Highway Assist (HAS) is a hands-on feature! You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times. The HAS system will disengage and
performance of HAS causing the system to be unable to function as intended. These include (but are not limited to):
all conditions are met.
The conditions for HAS to engage are as follows:
ACC will cancel if your hands are
· HAS must be turned on or enabled.
removed from the steering wheels
· Narrow, winding or curvy roads.
for a set amount of time.
· Poor visibility (due to heavy rain,
NOTE:
· HAS is intended for use only on highways or limited access freeways with a fully attentive driver. When using HAS, hold the steering wheel and be aware of surrounding traffic and road conditions. Always be prepared to immediately take over control of the vehicle from the HAS system. Failure to follow these
snow, fog, etc.).
· Bright light (oncoming headlights or direct sunlight) or shadows.
· Damage or obstruction caused by mud, ice, snow, etc.
· A damaged or misaligned bumper.
· Interference from other equipment that generates electromagnetic waves.
In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks.
· The vehicle must be on the highway or limited access freeway.
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be engaged.
· Left and right visible lane lines.
314
Driving
· Vehicle speed must be between 0 to 90 mph (0 and 145 km/h).
maximum speed, the system will start automatically.
· No faults in the forward facing
· If the ACC target speed is set under
camera, radar, EPS, or MTC+.
the maximum speed, HAS is active
· Lane width between 3 to 4.6 yd (2.8 and 4.2 m).
· Turn signal not activated.
and vehicle speed increases above the maximum speed due to slope, HAS will continue to function.
· No faults related to this system.
Speed Range of Use
Speed
mph (km/h)
HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster
HAS and the other ADAS systems conditions can be monitored on
Driver Assist Page
Minimum
0 (0)
instrument cluster display by accessing
Engaged/activated (with ACC engaged)
0 (0)
the "Driver Assist" page with the buttons on the steering wheel (see "Instrument Cluster" in section
Engaged/activated
18 (30)
"Dashboard Instruments and
5
(with ACC not
Controls").
engaged)
The symbol in grey indicates that
Maximum
90 (145)
the HAS system is active, but not
engaged and is shown at the centre of
· If set above the maximum speed, HAS will not function after the vehicle speed will reach the maximum speed.
· If set below the maximum speed and the ACC target speed is increased, HAS will function up to the maximum speed and then the system will turn off automatically.
the TFT display when the "Driver Assist" page is displayed. When exiting the "Driver Assist" page, on TFT display top left corner, the
grey symbol will appear in the multiple light of active ADAS systems.
Non-Driver Assist Page
In addition to these symbols, on the TFT top and bottom edge a coloured glow may appear (further referred to as "attention level colour"). Attention level colour together with the outline of the symbol represent a further indication of the system status.
· When the ACC target speed is
reduce and speed is lower than the
315
Driving
wheel, the instrument cluster will
In order to be able to use the HAS
display a series of warnings to alert the system, place your hands around the
driver to return their hands to the
steering wheel outer crown.
steering wheel. There will also be audible chimes. After a set amount of time, HAS will cancel if the driver's hands are not returned to the steering wheel. When the system does not sense the hands on the steering wheel for a few
NOTE:
· The sensors are not able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel areas covered in wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts (where present).
Driver Assist Page
seconds (3 5 seconds) or more (up to HAS is deactivated if the steering
When exiting the "Driver Assist" page, 10 seconds), it tries to draw the
wheel is no longer being touched.
the attention level colour will always be displayed until the system is
attention of the driver by showing, even when the display is not in the
System Statuses
disabled by pressing the button on "Driver Assist" page, the symbol
The active status of the HAS system is
the steering wheel.
with the figure of the hands in the
indicated by the green attention level
5
centre of the display. According to
colour which is maintained even if the
such time frames, the system will
driver releases his/her grip from the
change the attention level colour,
steering wheel up to 3 seconds.
silence the audio in the vehicle (if it is
active) and emit audible chimes to
invite the driver to take the control of
the vehicle again. This is the only way
to reengage the system.
Hands Detection on Steering Wheel
Non-Driver Assist Page
The HAS system uses sensors in the steering wheel outer crown to detect if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel. If the driver's hands are not detected on the steering
The sensors in the steering wheel outer crown are able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel.
The yellow attention level colour appears when the driver removes his/her hands from the steering wheel
316
for 3 to 5 seconds and the symbol with the figure of the hands will occupy the whole central area of the display.
will take the control of the vehicle again.
Driving
and a message will inform the driver that the HAS system has been disengaged, inviting him/her to grip the steering wheel again. The same will happen after 10 seconds if you travel at a speed below 25 mph (40 km/h). Then the symbol on TFT display will become grey.
Driver Assist Page Driver Assist Page
5
Non-Driver Assist Page
The red attention level colour appears when the driver releases his/her grip from the steering wheel for 5 and up to 10 seconds: in this case a single audible chime is repeated until he/she
Non-Driver Assist Page
The red attention level colour remains even when the steering wheel is released for more than 8 to 10 seconds. In this case, if you are traveling at a speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) a sequences of 3 audible chimes will be emitted after 8 seconds
If the driver keeps his/her hands away from the steering wheel (for more than 8 to 10 seconds), also the ACC system is deactivated ( white ACC symbol on the display) and will have to be reset. The aid of LKA system will be disabled as well. In these cases the display will not show the attention level colour anymore and the vehicle will be controlled by the driver only.
HAS Disengage
To disengage HAS you can do any of the following actions:
317
Driving
· Press the HAS enable button on
· Lateral accelerations exceeds the
the steering wheel. · Begin steering manually. · Press brake pedal. · Turn off ACC. · Unbuckle the driver's seat belt. · Press ACC Gap button for two
seconds to enable CC system.
limits.
NOTE: · When HAS cancels, the symbol
will turn red then grey. · The presence of the hands on the
steering wheel is detected by a logic combination of a capacitive sensor
WARNING!
Many unforeseen conditions can occur that can affect the performance of Highway Assist (HAS). Always keep this in mind and drive attentively. It is the drivers responsibility to keep control of the vehicle at all times.
· Shift out of the (D) Drive gear.
installed in the steering wheel and
· Enter an Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) event (See chapter "Forward Collision Warning - FCW"
the measured applied torque at the steering column. This leads to a more robust hands detection.
Radar Device - Regulatory Information
The "Regulatory Information" for all
in this section). · Turn signal activated.
System Limitations
the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the
5 System Cancellation
HAS is unable to guide the vehicle when the following conditions occur.
"Services" section on the website www.maserati.com.
The HAS system will cancel (without driver intervention) if either of the following actions occur:
· Lane markings are not clear or visibility is poor (i.e. heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.).
· Curve that is too tight.
· Obstructed, covered or damaged
· When leaving the grip of the hands
forward-facing camera or sensor.
on the steering wheel.
· When driving on hills or sharp curves.
· Vehicle exits the highway or limited access freeway.
· Lane line markers aren't detected by the forward facing camera.
· Any ADAS system faults.
· When approaching toll booths.
· When the highway entrance or exit is wider than 20 ft (6 meters).
· Bright light (ex. direct sunlight or glare) facing the forward camera.
· ACC cancellation.
· Vehicle speed exceeds the maximum
limit.
318
Driving
Traffic Sign Assist TSA (optional)
· The performance of TSA depends on the update degree of navigation system's maps.
allowed, or when it is higher than 5 or 10 mph (5 or 10 km/h).
TSA detects traffic signs through the
use of a forward-facing digital camera Customised Settings
mounted on windshield, behind the rear-view mirror. TSA assists the driver by displaying on the instrument cluster detected speed limits and traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in snow conditions). TSA also uses the data of the navigation system, in order to provide information to the driver in all cases in which the camera is not able to detect the traffic signs
TSA is configurable by the customer regarding the display mode on the instrument cluster and the warning sensitivity. Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ display the driver can see the current setting beside the "Traffic Sign Assist" soft-key. Touching "Traffic Sign Assist" soft-key can disable or enable the system.
Signs Monitoring on Instrument Cluster
that are present on the road where
5
the car is travelling.
Some examples of these are: due to
low visibility, light reflection, damaged
traffic signs, traffic signs in wrong
position like rotated or fallen poles.
NOTE:
· Overtaking restriction signs are not displayed by the TSA system.
· TSA provides a visual warning to the driver when he/she unintentionally reaches the maximum speed limit allowed or when it exceeds the set "Sensitivity" value.
Touching the soft-key on the side the driver can change the setting. The display of the traffic signs can be blinking or static. The system can be set to display the traffic signs when the speed of the vehicle is equal to the speed limit
If TSA feature is set and a signs or a speed limit is detected, the related icons are displayed in the upper area of the instrument cluster beside of the main menu number and scroll arrows.
319
Driving
The display area is divided in two different sectors:
1 Conditioned speed limit area. 2 Unconditioned speed limit area.
stop blinking because the manoeuvre is evaluated as intentional. If the TSA is not able to determine any kind of valid speed limit neither from camera nor from digital maps the following image will be shown in sector 2. Since TSA also uses the data provided by the navigation system, it can update the sector 2 of the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs:
they are covered or because of insufficient lighting.
· If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
· If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.
· When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
· When the vehicle changes road. · Highway enter/exit. · Urban area stored in the digital map
enter/exit.
5 NOTE:
Overtaking restriction signs are not displayed by the TSA system.
System Limitations
TSA may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:
If "Blinking On" warning mode is set, when the visual warning is provided only the unconditioned speed limit (in sector 2) will start blinking when the vehicle speed exceeds to the detected unconditioned speed limit ("+0 mph" or "+0 km/h" option) or when it exceeds the set sensitivity value ("+5 mph" - "+5 km/h" or "+10 mph" "+10 km/h" options). If the vehicle speed stays above the unconditioned speed limit for several seconds the unconditioned speed limit sign will
· If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow or fog.
· If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections from other vehicles.
· If the windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered.
· If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because
320
Driving
Tires - General Information
Tire Safety Information
Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: P265/50 ZR19 (100Y) XL or 265/50 ZR19 (Y100) XL
Size Designation:
Service Description:
100 = Load Index -- A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
Tire Markings
P = Passenger car tire size based on
Y = Speed Symbol -- A symbol
U.S. design standards
indicating the range of speeds at
"...blank..." = Passenger car tire
which a tire can carry a load
based on European design standards corresponding to its load index
265 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
50 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) -- Ratio of section height to section width of tire
under certain operating conditions. The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted
ZR = Construction Code
speed limits)
· Z: means a tire usable at speeds
5
greater than 150 mph (240 km/h)
1. U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code
· R: means radial construction
Load Identification:
(TIN).
19 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
"...blank..." = Absence of any text on
2. Size Designation.
the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
3. Service Description.
XL = Extra Load (or reinforced) tire
4. Maximum Pressure and Maximum Load.
LL = Light Load tire
5. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades (see "Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades" in this section).
321
Driving
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0313
DOT = Department of Transportation -- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits).
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
L9 = Code representing the tire size
The TIN may be found on one or both (two digits).
sides of the tire, however the date
ABCD = Code used by the tire
code may only be on one side. Tires
manufacturer (one to four digits).
with white sidewalls will have the full 03 = Number representing the week
5
TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
in which the tire was manufactured (two digits). In this case, 03 means
Look for the TIN on the outboard side the 3rd week.
of black sidewall tires as mounted on
the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
13 = Number representing the year
the outboard side, then you will find it in which the tire was manufactured
on the inboard side of the tire.
(two digits). In this case, 13 means
the year 2013.
322
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Driving
Term
Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Tire Information Label
Maximum Inflation
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum
Pressure
permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into
the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire
5
Inflation Pressure
inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The proper cold tire inflation pressure and the loading information are listed in two labels on the driver's side rear door pillar.
Loading Information Label The labels tells you important information about the:
· Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
· Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
· Total weight the vehicle can carry.
· Tire size designed for the vehicle.
323
Driving
Loading
XXX lbs/XXX kg" on the vehicle's
Tires
The vehicle maximum load on the tire
label.
Driving over rough or damaged road
must not exceed the load carrying
· Determine the combined weight of surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and
capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will
other obstacles can cause serious
You will not exceed the tire's load
be riding in the vehicle.
damage to wheels, tires, and
carrying capacity if you adhere to the · Subtract the combined weight of the suspension parts.
loading conditions, tire size, and cold
driver and passengers from
This is more likely to occur with
tire inflation pressures specified on the XXX lbs/XXX kg.
low-profile tires, which provide less
"Tire and Loading Information Label" and in the "Features and Specifications" section.
· The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your
NOTE:
if "XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs/635 vehicle is equipped with low profile
Under a maximum loaded vehicle
kg and there will be five 150 lbs/68 kg passengers in your
tires.
condition, gross axle weight ratings
vehicle, the amount of available
(GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
cargo and luggage load capacity is
5
must not be exceeded.
650 lbs/295 kg (since 5 x 150/68 =
WARNING!
To determine the maximum loading
750/340, and 1,400/635 750/340 =
Overloading of your tires is
conditions of your vehicle, locate the
650 lbs/295 kg).
dangerous. Overloading can cause tire
statement "The combined weight of
· Determine the combined weight of failure, affect vehicle handling, and
occupants and cargo should never
luggage and cargo being loaded on increase the stopping distance. Use
exceed XXX lbs/XXX kg" on the tire
the vehicle. That weight may not
tires of the recommended load
and loading information label. The
safely exceed the available cargo and capacity for your vehicle. Never
combined weight of occupants and
luggage load capacity calculated in
overload them.
cargo/luggage should never exceed
previous Step.
the weight referenced here.
· If your vehicle will be towing a
Steps For Determining Correct Load
trailer, load from your trailer will be
Limit
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
· Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
324
Driving
Department of Transportation grades represent the tire's ability to
109. Grades B and A represent higher
Uniform Tire Quality Grades
stop on wet pavement, as measured
levels of performance on the
The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative characteristics.
rating, based on the wear rate of the
Tire Pressure
tire when tested under controlled
Temperature Grades
5
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for safety and best performance of your vehicle. The tire pressure monitoring system "TPMS" setup on the vehicle (see "Tire Pressure Monitoring System" in this section) may alert the driver about insufficient tire pressure even though the driver is responsible for regularly checking the tire pressure. Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may look properly inflated even when they actually are under inflated. Do not
Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to
performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation.
lowest, are AAA, A, B, and C. These
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
325
Driving
Three primary driving aspects are
across the tire tread. These abnormal overall conditions should also be
affected by improper tire pressure:
wear patterns will reduce tread life
checked monthly. Tire pressures
Safety
resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also
change by approximately 1 PSI (0.07 bar) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
increases tire rolling resistance
change. Keep this in mind when
resulting in higher fuel consumption. checking tire pressure inside a garage,
WARNING! · Improperly inflated tires can be
dangerous.
Ride comfort and vehicle stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation
especially in winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature =
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing produces a jarring and uncomfortable 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
and can result in tire overheating.
ride.
pressure should be increased by 3 PSI
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability
(0.21 bar) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
to cushion shock. Objects on the
Tire Pressure Checkup
outside temperature condition.
road and potholes can cause damage The proper cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6
5
that results in tire failure.
· Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
· Unequal tire pressures from one side
is indicated on the driver's side rear door pillar and on the table "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications". Inflation pressure specified on the table always refers to "cold tire inflation pressure". Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
PSI (0.13 to 0.4 bar) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem and the TPMS sensor
of the vehicle to the other can cause for at least three hours, or driven less connected to it.
the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
Tread Wear Indicators
· Always drive with each tire inflated Check tire pressures more often in case Tread wear indicators are in the
to the recommended cold tire
of significant outside temperature
original equipment tires to help you
inflation pressure.
changes, as tire pressure varies
determine when your tires should be
according to temperature changes.
replaced.
Economy
The pressure should be checked and if These indicators are molded into the
Improper inflation pressures may cause necessary adjusted; tire wear and
bottom of the tread grooves.
uneven wear patterns to develop
326
Driving
When the tread is worn to one of the Replacement Tires
replacement tires may adversely affect
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
NOTE:
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
In order to maintain high performance Your Authorized Maserati Dealer is
and safety level under all driving
available to provide suggestions as to
WARNING! The wet performance (aquaplaning resistance) will decrease proportionally to the thickness of the tread.
conditions, Maserati strongly recommends to use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed.
the types of tires most suited to the use foreseen by the Customer.
WARNING!
Tires Durability
The service life of a tire depends on
For the size designation of your tire see the label on the driver's side rear door pillar or see table "Wheels" in
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may
various factors including, but not
section "Features and Specifications".
change suspension dimensions and
limited to:
The "Load Index" and "Speed
performance characteristics,
· driving style;
Symbol" for your tire will be found on
resulting in altered steering,
5
· tire pressure;
the original equipment tire sidewall.
handling, and braking operations of
· distance driven.
WARNING! Tires and the spare tire (if equipped) should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning could result in tire failure.
NOTE:
Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with "MGT" logo specifically designed for its models.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel assembly, make sure that the wheel's specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and tire) match those of the original
the vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings appointed for your vehicle.
· Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure.
· Always check the maximum speed
wheels. Failure to use equivalent
(Continued)
327
Driving
(Continued)
As to the type of tires to use, inflation suspension system in "Off Road 1" or
rating on the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
pressures and winter tires specifications, carefully follow the
"Off Road 2" ride height in order to increase wheel clearance.
· Never exceed the maximum speed
indications as reported in the
In any case do not exceed 30 mph
rating of the tires. Risk of accident
"Technical Data" and "Tire Inflation
(50 km/h).
and serious personal injury due to
Pressure" chapters in section "Features Please contact an Authorized Maserati
excessive speed.
and Specifications".
Dealer for further information.
· Failure to equip your vehicle with
The chains may be fitted only on rear
tires having adequate speed
wheel tires.
capability can result in tire failure.
WARNING!
Check the snow chain tension after
The standard tires profile and rubber driving for a distance of about 55 yd
mixture are optimized for wet and dry (50 m) with the chains fitted.
CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false
driving conditions. Standard tires may not prove favorable for snow conditions.
With the snow chains fitted, it is advisable to deactivate the ESC system (see chapter "Drive Mode" in this section).
5
speedometer and odometer readings. NOTE:
Winter Tires
These tires are specially designed for driving on snow and ice and are fitted to replace the ones supplied with the vehicle. Winter or all-season tires can be identified by the M+S (Mud & Snow) or 3PMSF (3 Peaks Mountain Snow Flake) designation on the tire sidewall. Before mounting winter tires, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to receive the technical information necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compatibility.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as original equipment tires and should be mounted on all four wheels.
Snow Chains
Maserati approved traction devices (or snow chains) may be used to improve traction on compacted snow in heavy snow conditions. They should not be used in off-road conditions where there is no compacted snow. Maserati tested and recommends to use traction devices with air
CAUTION!
· The use of non-recommended snow chains may damage the vehicle.
· Broken snow chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate snow chain breakage. Replace the damaged parts of the snow chain before further use.
· Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
· Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
328
Driving
· Avoid holes in the road, do not drive over steps or sidewalks and do not drive on long stretches without
After servicing, restore original conditions and eliminate the tick next to selected mode: in this way the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
snow. This will prevent damage to the vehicle and the roadbed.
pneumatic suspension system will go back to normal operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low
NOTE:
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with all information about the Maserati Snow Chains, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range.
Compact Spare Tire
The limited-use spare tire, or compact spare tire, is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label indicating the driving speed limitations to comply with when using
tire pressure according to the vehicle recommended cold pressure indicated on the table "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications" and on the label applied on the driver's side rear door pillar. Tire pressure should always be set
Pneumatic Suspension Mode for Wheel Change
the spare tire. Inflate the spare tire to the cold inflation pressure listed on the table
based on cold inflation tire pressure. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
The pneumatic suspension system is
"Tire Inflation Pressure" in section
pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
equipped with a specific mode to be "Features and Specifications".
Check "Tires General Information" in
used when vehicle must be lifted to change one or several wheels/tires.
Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle section "Driving" for information on
handling. Replace (or repair) as soon
how to properly inflate the tires.
This mode temporarily disables pneumatic suspension automatic
as possible the original equipment tire The tire pressure will also increase as and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not the vehicle is driven - this is normal
leveling. To activate this mode, scroll user
install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at a
and there is no adjustment required when this occurs.
settings on MTC+ and select "Wheel Replacement Mode" in submenu "Suspension". The tick next to
time.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit
selected item will indicate that this mode is active and system is disabled (for further details, refer to chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
WARNING! With these compact spare tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life.
for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss of the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition persists and will not turn
329
Driving
off until the tire pressure is equal or
aftermarket tire sealants or balance
above the recommended cold inflation
beads if your vehicle is equipped
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you must
with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold inflation pressure in order for the TPMS light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS light will turn off once the system acquires the correct tire pressure. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
WARNING!
· The system can temporarily experience radio-electric interference emitted by devices using similar frequencies.
· After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem and damage the TPMS internal sensor.
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
The TPMS warns the driver that the
acquire and process the updated
tire pressure has decreased. This
NOTE:
setting.
5
warning does not exempt the driver from periodically checking the tires and from complying with the prescribed tire pressure levels.
· Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and may lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and
CAUTION!
stopping ability.
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may occur when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS light .
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS
330
Driving
will monitor the actual tire pressure
automatically update, the graphic
in the tire.
display in the instrument cluster will
stop flashing, and the TPMS light
Premium System
The TPMS system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information.
Tire Pressure System Fault
transmit tire pressure readings to the
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS
receiver module.
The instrument cluster will also display light will flash for 75 seconds and
The TPMS consists of the following
a screenshot reporting the pressure
then remain lit followed by a beeping
components:
values of each tire with flashing low
sound. Therewith, the instrument
· receiver module;
pressure value.
cluster will display a "Service Tire
· four TPMS sensors;
Pressure System" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then
· various TPMS messages, which
display dashes (--) in place of the
5
display on the instrument cluster;
pressure value to indicate which
· warning light .
sensor is ineffective.
Tire Pressure Low Warning
The TPMS light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an acoustic signal will notify that tire pressure is low in one or more of the four tires.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tire/s with the low pressure (the one/s flashing in the instrument cluster graphic) to the recommended cold pressure inflation value. Once the
If the ignition switch is cycled, the sequence will repeat, in case the system fault still persists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS light
will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will be displayed in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
system receives the updated tire
· Signal interference due to electronic
pressure value, the system will
devices or driving next to facilities
331
Driving
emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
· Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a flashing pressure value corresponding to the compact tire position.
· Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
· Using tire chains on the vehicle.
· Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
The instrument cluster will also display
a "Service Tire Pressure System"
message for a minimum of five
seconds when a system fault related to
an incorrect sensor location fault is
5
detected. In this case, the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is then
· After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
followed by a graphic display with
TPMS light will flash for 75
pressure values still shown. This
seconds and then remain lit. The
indicates that the pressure values are
instrument cluster will then display a
still being received from the TPMS sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is displayed.
Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire
· The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure of the compact spare tire.
· If you replace a tire having pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, with the compact spare tire, on the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS light will illuminate followed by a beeping sound. In
"Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
· Each subsequent ignition switch cycle will be followed by a beeping sound, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and subsequently displays
332
Driving
dashes (--) in place of the pressure
assemblies. After replacing all four
to 20 minutes above 15 mph
value.
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
with tires not equipped with Tire
TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds
Pressure Monitoring System sensors,
and then turn off. The instrument
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above cluster will then display the "Service
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will
Tire Pressure System" message.
chime, the TPMS light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on and the instrument cluster
will display the "Service Tire Pressure
System" message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values. Beginning with the next
· Once you repair, replace or reinstall ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no
a tire with the compact spare tire,
longer chime or display the "Service
the TPMS will update automatically. Tire Pressure System" message in the
The TPMS light will turn OFF and instrument cluster but dashes (--) will the graphic in the instrument cluster remain in place of the pressure values. The instrument cluster will also display
5
will display a new pressure value
pressure values in place of the dashes
instead of dashes (--), as long as no
(--). On the next ignition switch cycle
tire pressure is below the
the "Service Tire Pressure System"
low-pressure warning limit in any of
message will no longer be displayed as
the four tires. The vehicle may need
long as no system fault exists.
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the
Radio Frequency Device Regulatory Information
updated information.
The "Regulatory Information" for all
TPMS Deactivation
the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the
The TPMS can be deactivated if
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all
"Services" section on the website
replacing all four tire rims with wheel four wheel and tire assemblies (road www.maserati.com.
and tire assemblies not using of TPMS tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors, such as winter wheel and tire sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up
333
Driving
Fuel Requirements
The engines are designed to meet all
CAUTION!
Gasoline". Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle
environmental regulations and provide · Maserati strongly recommends the
emissions and improve air quality.
excellent fuel economy and
use of Premium unleaded fuel ONLY. Maserati supports the use of
performance when using unleaded
Use of lesser grade fuel (other than reformulated gasoline. Properly
premium gasoline with an AKI octane
Premium) will lead to reduced
blended reformulated gasoline will
rating of 91 or above. AKI (Anti Knock
engine performance, and poor fuel
provide excellent performance and
Index) is an average on the Research
economy and can lead to the
durability of engine and fuel system
Octane Number, RON, and the Motor
Malfunction Indicator Light
components.
Octane Number, MON (RON + MON/2 gives you the AKI).
illuminating on the instrument Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
cluster. Continued use of lesser grade
For vehicle top performance, use
fuel (other than Premium fuel) can
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded
unleaded premium gasoline with no
lead to engine misfire problems and gasoline with oxygenates such as
less than 93 minimum AKI octane
possible catalytic converter damage. Ethanol. Fuels blended with
rating.
· The anti-pollution devices of the
oxygenates may be used in your
5
Poor quality gasoline can cause
vehicle require unleaded fuel to be vehicle.
problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
used at all times. Under no circumstance, not even in an emergency, should leaded fuel be supplied to the fuel tank, not even a
CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing
considering service for the vehicle at
minimum quantity. This would
Methanol or gasoline containing more
an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
irreparably damage the catalytic
than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends
Besides using unleaded gasoline with
converters. An inefficient catalytic
may result in starting and driveability
the proper octane rating, gasoline that converter results in noxious exhaust problems, damage critical fuel system
contain detergents, anti-corrosion and
emissions which damage the
components, cause emissions to exceed
stability additives are recommended. Using gasoline that have these
environment.
the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and
Reformulated Gasoline
illuminate (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and
maintain vehicle performance.
Many areas of the country require the Controls". Pump labels should clearly
use of cleaner burning gasoline,
communicate if a fuel contains greater
referred to as "Reformulated
334
Driving
than 10% Ethanol.
Materials Added to Fuel
Maserati.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of Maserati and may not be covered under warranty.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties civil penalties and could void the vehicle warranty.
MMT in Gasoline
Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a
Fuel System Warnings
manganese containing metallic
WARNING!
additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the
Gasoline blended with MMT provides Follow these guidelines to maintain
precautions below to prevent carbon
no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Maserati recommends gasoline without MMT to be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline station operator whether or
your vehicle's performance:
· The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal and Provincial law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
· The use of fuel additives, which are
monoxide poisoning:
· Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended
5
not the gasoline contains MMT.
now being sold as octane enhancers, period. If the vehicle is stopped in
It is even more important to look for
is not recommended. Most of these
an open area with the engine
gasoline without MMT in Canada,
products contain high
running for more than a short
because MMT can be used at levels
concentrations of methanol. Fuel
period, adjust the ventilation system
higher than those allowed in the
system damage or vehicle
to force fresh, outside air into the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated
performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
vehicle. · Guard against carbon monoxide
gasoline.
additives is not the responsibility of
(Continued)
335
Driving
(Continued) with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
Refueling
Fuel Filler Neck Access
To access the fuel filler neck, the filler door must be unlocked. From outside the vehicle, this can only be done by pressing the unlock or the lock
button on the key fob RKE transmitter, in the same way as if
· Rotate counterclockwise and remove the fuel filler cap. The cap hermetic seal may result in a slight pressure increase inside the tank. Any hissing noise while the cap is being opened is therefore completely normal. The cap is linked to the filler neck with a strap, to prevent it from being lost while refueling.
WARNING!
opening or closing the doors. If any of
California Proposition 65
the door lock controls is pressed from
Operating, servicing and maintaining inside the vehicle, the filler door will
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle still remain open to allow refueling.
can expose you to chemicals including · Press the indicated area on the filler
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
door, which is located on the rear left
5
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of
side of the vehicle: the filler door will open completely.
California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
· When refueling, place the cap in the
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
proper seat on the filler door hinge.
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to:
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle
Refill the Tank
The fuel filler neck is provided with external cap.
336
Driving
· Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler.
WARNING! · To avoid the risk of fire, do not
approach the filler with open flames or cigarettes! · To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the fuel filler door, when opened. · Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel filler door is open or the tank is being filled.
additional fuel supply until two clicks. After the two additional clicks, the amount of fuel allowed by the system is very low, we recommend therefore not to persist further.
· Wait approximately 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle in order to ensure completed supply of residual fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the fuel filler door area.
· Remove the fuel nozzle.
· Insert the cap on the fuel filler neck.
· Tighten the cap, turning it clockwise until it stops.
· Close the fuel filler door.
· Never add fuel when the engine is
5
running. This violates most fire-prevention regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on (see "Instrument Cluster" in section
CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.
"Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
· Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank capacity is indicated in the
Emergency Refueling Funnel A funnel is provided (in the trunk in the tool box container) for emergency refueling with a gas can.
WARNING! A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned.
"Refillings" table in section
Always place gas containers outside
"Features and Specifications".
the vehicle while filling.
When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or
shuts off, the fuel tank is basically
full: it is possible to further ensure
refueling by enabling the fuel nozzle
337
Driving
Fuel Filler Cap Open Warning
Driving Conditions
Light
After refueling the car
Before the Trip
performs a check of the fuel
Check the following at regular
filler cap and the amber
intervals and always before long trips:
warning light on the TFT display comes on if it is not correctly closed, after approximately 10 minutes also depending on driving conditions.
· tire pressure and condition; · levels of fluids and lubricants; · conditions of the windshield wiper
If the problem is in the fuel system, the Malfunction Indicator Light also comes on. If the fuel filler cap is locked and the issue remains in the system, at the next engine start only the Malfunction
· Pull the release cable moderately to avoid its possible break. It's not possible to feel or hear the unlocking of the fuel filler door actuator.
blades;
· clean the glass on the external light and all other glass surfaces;
· proper operation of the indicator lights and of the external lights.
Indicator Light comes on. In this
5
case, contact an Authorized Maserati
CAUTION!
Dealer.
It is however advisable to perform
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
these checks at least every 600 mi (1000 km) and always following the maintenance schedule reported in
If you are unable to unlock the fuel
section "Maintenance and Care".
filler door using the key fob RKE transmitter, use the fuel filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
· Open the power liftgate (see "Power Liftgate Operation" in section "Before Starting").
· Lift the access cover on the left side of the trunk.
· Then open normally the fuel filler door.
Before you drive:
· adjust seat position, steering wheel, adjustable pedals (if equipped with) and rearview mirrors in order to have the best driving position;
· ensure that nothing (mat covers, etc.) is obstructing the pedals movement;
· carefully arrange and secure any objects in the trunk, to prevent them
338
Driving
from moving forward in case of
· Reduce your speed, especially on
· Reduce your speed and keep a
sudden stops;
roads with no streetlights.
greater safety distance from the
· avoid heavy meals before a trip. A light snack helps keep your reflexes sharp. In particular, avoid drinking
· Stop at early signs of drowsiness. Continuing to drive would be a risk for yourself and for others. Have a
vehicles in front of you. High speed may result in a loss of vehicle control.
alcohol.
rest before continuing your trip.
· When driving on wet or slushy roads,
· Keep the vehicle at a greater distance from vehicles in front of
it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
WARNING!
Passengers must only travel seated in the vehicle seats, with the seat belts fastened. Always check that the driver and all passengers have the seat belts correctly fastened.
you than you would during the day: it is difficult to assess the speed of other vehicles when you only see the lights.
· Use the high beams only outside of densely-populated areas and when
surface. This is known as aquaplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility: slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
you are sure that they will not
· Heavy rain substantially reduces
Safe Driving
Although the vehicle is equipped with active and passive safety devices, the driver's conduct is always a decisive factor for road safety.
disturb other drivers.
· When another vehicle is approaching, switch from high beams (if on) to low beams.
· Keep lights and headlights clean.
visibility. In these circumstances, even
during the day, turn on the low
5
beams, to be more visible to other
drivers.
· Set the air conditioning and heating
system controls on the defogging
Some simple rules for traveling safely · Outside of densely-populated areas,
function, in order to avoid any
in different conditions are listed
beware of animals crossing the road.
visibility problem.
below. Some of them will probably already sound familiar but, in any case, it would be useful to read them
Driving in the Rain
· Periodically check the conditions of
Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On the windshield wiper blades.
carefully.
a wet road all maneuvers are more
· In low grip conditions use "I.C.E."
difficult since wheel grip on the road
driving mode (see chapters "Drive
Driving at Night
is significantly reduced. This means
Mode" and "Off-road Drive" in this
The main guidelines to follow when
that braking distances increase
section).
driving at night are set out below.
· Drive carefully. Night conditions demand more focus and attention.
considerably and road grip decreases. Some advices for driving in the rain are listed below.
· Avoid driving with ESC OFF as this will likely cause a loss of control of the vehicle.
339
Driving
Driving in Fog
Driving on Snow or Ice
If the fog is dense, avoid traveling if possible. When driving in mist, blanket fog or when there is the possibility of banks of fog, please consider some advices listed below.
CAUTION! Be aware that rear fog lights can bother the drivers following your vehicle: when visibility is back to normal, turn off these lights.
Please consider some general advice for driving in these conditions, listed below.
· Maintain a very moderate speed. · Fit snow chains or specific tires if the
road is covered with snow: see the
· Keep a moderate speed.
Driving in the Mountains
paragraphs "Tires General
· Even in daytime, turn on the low beams and front and rear fog lights. Do not use the high beams.
Mountain roads usually have many narrow turns and curves, tunnels and steep uphill or downhill slopes: please
Information" in this section.
· We recommend you to activate the "I.C.E." mode (see chapters "Drive
· Remember that fog creates
consider some advices listed below.
Mode" and "Off-road Drive" in this
dampness on the asphalt and thus
· Drive at a moderate speed, avoid
section).
any type of maneuver is more
"cutting" corners.
· During the winter season, even
difficult and braking distances are
5
extended.
· When driving inside a tunnel in daylight turn on the low beams in
apparently dry roads can have icy sections. Be careful when crossing
· Keep a safe distance from the vehicle advance; avoid high beams and be
bridges, viaducts and roads that have
in front of you.
aware of the rapid brightness
little exposure to the sun and are
· Avoid sudden changes in speed as
change. Avoid abrupt maneuvers
bordered by trees and rocks. They
much as possible.
that could be dangerous for the
may be icy.
· Whenever possible, avoid overtaking. following vehicle.
· Keep an ample safe distance from
· If you are forced to stop the vehicle · Never coast downhill with the engine the vehicles in front of you.
(breakdowns, impossibility of
off or in neutral.
proceeding due to poor visibility, etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the travel lane. Then turn on the hazard
· Remember that passing other vehicles when driving uphill is slower and thus requires more free distance
WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces
warning flashers and, if possible, the low beams.
on the road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, slow down and
is dangerous. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
allow the other vehicle to pass.
poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
340
Driving
Trailer Towing
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle.
NOTE:
Trailer Tongue Weight
Maximum load of tow vehicle is reduced by the trailer tongue weight and the load on the same due to the trailer. Trailer tongue weight increases vehicle weight. Do not exceed the maximum GVWR of
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. Loads bearing more on wheel axle, or heavier in the rear of the trailer, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side which could cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
· On the TROFEO version you can not the tow vehicle, the one for each axle
install the trailer tongue.
· Using original Maserati equipment offers an advantage, compared to aftermarket one, in terms of driving safety and utilizing the vehicle potential under all conditions,
(GAWR) and the mass that the vehicle is rated to tow (GTW) specified on the nameplate located on the rear of the drivers door opening.
WARNING! Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
especially considering that ESC and
WARNING!
AWD systems feature specific
It is important that you do not exceed Tire Pressure Adjustment
settings for trailer towing. Further to the maximum allowed overall GVWR Proper tire inflation pressures of your
5
this, if vehicle use conditions so
and GTW. A dangerous driving
vehicle and trailer are essential to the
allow, the original trailer tongue
condition can result if either rating is safe and satisfactory operation of your
allows use of the driver assist systems exceeded.
vehicle while driving and in
present on-board.
If you use aftermarket Kit for towing, maneuvers.
· To maintain the new vehicle limited the maximum trailer load must not
Check for signs of tire wear or visible
warranty coverage, follow the
exceed 6000 lb (2700 kg).
tire damage on trailer and vehicle
requirements and recommendations
before towing a trailer.
in this chapter.
Arranging Load on Trailer
For more information on vehicle tires,
Arrange load at the bottom and as close as possible to trailer wheel axle. In this way the trailer center of gravity will be lower, thereby increasing the driving safety of the vehicle-trailer assembly.
see "Tires General Information" in this section. When a trailer must be towed, inflate vehicle tires to full load recommended pressure (FLC) indicated in chapter "Tire pressure" in section "Features and Specifications".
341
Driving
For pressure of trailer tires, follow the Trailer Lights
Trailer Wiring Harness
instructions given by the trailer manufacturer. After adjusting vehicle tire pressure and connecting and disconnecting the trailer, initialize the Tire Pressure
Law provisions require trailers to be equipped with an electrical lighting system that must include the following lights:
Vehicle trailer tongue includes a 4-pin sealed connector powered at 12VDC for connection of the corresponding trailer wiring connector. In addition to the electrical branches,
Monitoring System (TPMS) following · Turn signals;
the vehicle electrical system can only
the instructions under chapter "Tire
· Position lights;
be connected to the supply cable for
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in this section.
Field of Vision of External
· Stop lights; · Rear fog lights; · Reverse lights;
an electric brake and to the cable for an internal light for the trailer, not exceeding 15W.
Rearview Mirrors
· License plate lights;
Law provisions require the field of
· Side marker lights (for trailer width
CAUTION!
vision of external rearview mirrors to
over 6.8 ft/2.1 m).
Do not cut or splice wiring into the
include the rear trailer corners.
The power input of the trailer lights
vehicle wiring harness. Do not change
5
If vehicle external rearview mirrors
must not exceed the values in the
cable connections on connectors. The
cannot cover the required field of
following list.
vision, it is possible to install additional rearview mirrors sticking further out at the sides. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about
· Position lights, side marker lights and license plate lights: 6 x 5W per side.
· Rear fog lights: 2 x 21W · Turn signals: 2 x 21W
towing a trailer and about the
· Stop lights: 4 x 21W
approved components available in the · Reverse lights: 2 x 21W
"Genuine Accessories" range.
Minimum detectable current of Trailer
Tow Module (TTM): 100mA.
342
table below indicates the function and section of wire corresponding to every connector pin as shown in the figure.
Driving
screwdriver at the points indicated by the arrows.
In these cases please contact an
Authorized Maserati Dealer and avoid
using the vehicle with a trailer.
· Slide cover downward to disengage
the two projecting elements
Pin N. Function
Wire section
indicated in the figure from bumper.
(mm2)
5
1
Lights ground (Lights GND)
1.5
2
Position light, side marker lights and license plate light
1
3
Left turn signal and stop light
1
4
Right turn signal and stop light
1
If the hooking and/or the electrical connection between vehicle and trailer is faulty, the warning light and the relevant message are displayed on instrument cluster display (see example in the figure).
Removing the Access Cover
Before fitting the trailer tongue, the access cover on the bottom part of the rear bumper must be removed. The cover is engaged in the bumper.
· Release cover inner side from bumper, using the tip of a tool or
· Store cover in the luggage compartment.
Install the Trailer Tongue
· Pull out the trailer tongue which is housed in a bag positioned on the right side of the trunk.
343
Driving
· Push the trailer tongue in the seat on the cross member of the car up to match the hole (A) on the trailer tongue with the one on the cross member support.
Connect the Electrical System Remove the Trailer Tongue
of the Trailer
When trailer tongue is no longer
· For connection, remove the
necessary, disconnect electrical
protective cover from the car
connections and remove it from its
connector which is found on the
seat as described below.
5
· Insert the pin (1) into the hole (A) and push it until it stops.
left-hand side of trailer tongue seat. · Remove the split pin (2).
· Install the split pin (2) at the opposite end of the pin (1).
· Grip the trailer tongue firmly and pull out the pin (1).
· Remove the trailer tongue from its
seat.
· Clean the trailer tongue and remove all residues, especially on the ends.
· Install the ball protection.
· Insert the pin (1) in the trailer tongue hole and install the split pin (2).
· Engage the trailer male connector into the car female connector.
· Push trailer connector fully home and engage the safety lock, if any.
· Set trailer tongue in its seat inside the trunk.
· Refit the protective cover on the car connector.
344
Driving
· Refit the access cover making sure to stop lights to ensure you do not
· Do not exceed maximum specified
engage the two projecting elements jeopardize other road users' safety.
pressure for vehicle and trailer tires.
indicated by the arrow fully home into the bumper.
· Make certain that the load is secured · Vehicles with trailers should not be
in the trailer and will not shift
parked on a steep grade. When
during travel. When trailering cargo
parking, put the tow vehicle
that is not fully secured, dynamic
transmission in P (Park) and apply
load shifts can occur that may be
the parking brake on the tow
difficult for the driver to control.
vehicle. Always, block or "chock" the
· When hauling cargo or towing a
trailer wheels.
trailer, do not overload your vehicle · Do not use electronic Cruise Control
or trailer. Overloading can cause a
(CC and/or ACC) when driving on
loss of control, damage to brakes,
slopes or when carrying heavy loads.
driveline, steering, suspension or tires.
· The D (Drive) gear must be selected when towing. The transmission
· Push cover lower end toward
· Safety metal wire must always be
controls include a drive strategy to
bumper until the two retainers click in place.
used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the wire to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
5
the hook retainers of the trailer and
shifting does occur while in D
vehicle hitch. Cross the wire under
(Drive), if provided, you can use the
the trailer tongue and allow enough paddle shift switches to manually
slack for turning corners.
select a lower gear.
Towing Tips
· Before setting out on a trip, check operation of trailer rear lights and
· Comply with local applicable speed limits.
· Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
· For towing use "Normal" ride height.
· Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.
345
Driving
346
6 In an Emergency
Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 In the Event of an Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
347
In an Emergency
Tool Kit
The tools are located in the trunk inside a preformed container. To access the tools, lift the rear part of the trunk cargo floor, by acting on the handle.
It is possible to maintain the cargo
floor in the lifted position when trunk
6
cover is not hooked to liftgate (figure
1), is hooked to liftgate (figure 2) or is
removed (figure 3).
The straps for fastening the cargo
floor can be found at the ends and
along the band fastened by means of
Velcro inserts on the floor back side.
Once cargo floor is lifted, release the
strap and fasten it at the positions
shown in the figures below.
Remove the storage box. 348
The tools inserted in the trunk container are the following:
floor.
Ref. Description 1 Double torx + cross-head screwdriver 2 Emergency tow hook 3 Funnel for emergency supply 4 Electric compressor complete with pressure gage for inflating the
compact spare wheel (if equipped) 5 Extended wrench with rubber-coated handle for unscrewing/tightening
the wheel nuts 6 Adapter for wheel extended wrench 7 Jack set 8 Trailer tongue (optional, not available for TROFEO version). If equipped,
is housed in a bag positioned on the right side of the trunk.
Once these operations are completed, stretch band and fasten it at the back of cargo floor, making sure to match the Velcro inserts. Lower the cargo
In an Emergency 6
349
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers switch is located in the center of the central console, behind the multimedia navigation controls.
flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
CAUTION! · When the hazard warning flashers
are activated, the turn signals control is disabled. · The extended use of the hazard warning flashers may wear down your battery.
Press the switch to turn on the hazard
warning flashers to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. When these
6
lights illuminate, the turn signals, the
related indicator lights on the
instrument cluster and the button start
flashing.
Press the switch a second time to turn
off the hazard warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system
and it should not be used when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to
seek assistance, the hazard warning
350
In the Event of an Accident
It is important always to keep calm.
· If not directly involved, stop at a safe distance of at least ten yards (meters) away from the accident area.
· If on a highway, stop without obstructing the emergency lane and be especially careful if you need to exit the vehicle.
· Turn off the engine and switch on the hazard warning flashers.
· At night, illuminate the accident area with the headlights.
· Always act with caution to avoid the risk of being crashed into by other drivers.
· Indicate that an accident has occurred by placing the emergency triangle (if equipped) in a well visible position and at the prescribed distance.
· Call the emergency services, providing as much information as possible. On the highway, use the special call boxes.
· Remove the ignition key (if present) from the vehicles involved.
· If fuel or other chemical products can be smelled, do not smoke and ask
In an Emergency
people around you to put their cigarettes out.
· To extinguish fires, even small ones, use a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand or earth. Never use water.
· In multiple accidents occurred on highways, particularly where visibility is poor, there is a high risk of being involved in other collisions. Leave the vehicle immediately and move away from the area.
In case of Injured Persons
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
In case of a Punctured Tire
The vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel.
Using the Compact Spare Wheel
The automatic leveling of pneumatic suspensions might create problems when it is necessary to lift the vehicle to replace the wheel featuring punctured tire with the emergency wheel supplied or with another wheel.
· Never leave the injured person alone. Persons not directly involved in the accident are also required to give assistance.
· Do not crowd around injured persons.
· Reassure the injured person that help is on the way.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
CAUTION!
Before mounting the compact spare
wheel it is necessary to disable the
suspension system by scrolling the user
settings on MTC+ and selecting
"Wheel Replacement Mode" in
6
"Suspensions" submenu. The tick next
to selected item will indicate that this
mode is active and pneumatic
suspension system is disabled (for
further details, refer to "MTC+
Settings" chapter in section
"Dashboard Instruments and
Controls"). After servicing, restore
original conditions and eliminate the
tick next to selected mode: in this way
the pneumatic suspension system will
351
In an Emergency
(Continued)
· It is recommended that the wheels · Unscrew and pull out the locking
go back to normal operation.
of the vehicle be chocked, and that
wheel knob.
NOTE:
no person should remain in a vehicle · Take the container, the compressor
that is being jacked.
and the compact spare wheel out of
The compact spare wheel is supplied in · If the vehicle has been stopped on a
the trunk.
aluminum or steel: the pictures show
slope or an uneven surface, place
the one in aluminum.
chocks or other suitable items in
The compact spare wheel is stored in the trunk and is supplied deflated in order to limit the amount of space occupied. An electric compressor is also
front of or behind the wheels to stop the vehicle from moving.
· Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
provided for inflating. In the event of · No person should place any portion
a tire puncture, proceed as follows.
of their body under a vehicle that is
· Stop the vehicle in a place that does
supported by a jack.
not constitute a danger to traffic and where the wheel can be changed safely. The vehicle must be level and on firm ground.
· Lift the ground coverage of the trunk (see chapter "Tool Kit" in this section).
· Remove from the compressor case the inflation hose and the cable with a plug for the power outlet.
· Select the P (Park) mode and then
· Take the tools (indicated in picture) · Unscrew the valve cap of the
6
engage manually the electric parking for changing the wheel from the
compact spare wheel and screw the
brake and move the ignition switch
container.
fitting of the inflation hose onto the
to OFF position.
valve.
· If necessary, turn the hazard warning flashers on and place the warning triangle (if equipped) at the required
· Insert the plug in one of the available power outlets fitted in the trunk or passenger compartment.
distance.
· Set the ignition device on ACC or
RUN position.
WARNING!
· Turn the compressor on by pressing the switch.
· The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible.
· Stop the compressor pressing switch again, when the pressure indicated
352
by the gauge reaches the recommended level (see "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications") and screw the cap on the compact spare wheel valve.
In an Emergency
· The compressor has been designed exclusively to inflate compact spare wheels; do not use it to inflate air mattresses, dinghies etc.
· Remove the center cover of the wheel rim (if provided) levering into the provided groove on the outer edge of the cover.
· Fit the adapter on the wrench. Extend the wrench as shown, then loosen by approximately one turn, the five bolts on the wheel to be changed.
WARNING! · Never position yourself under a
jacked vehicle. · Never use the jack to carry out
maintenance or repairs under the vehicle.
· Insert the extension levers in the jack.
· Turn clockwise the extension lever of the jack until the wheel is raised a few centimeters off the ground.
WARNING!
· In order to obtain a more accurate
6
reading, the compressor should be
switched off when checking the tire
pressure of the compact spare wheel
on the pressure gauge.
· Do not run the compressor for more than 20 minutes: there is a risk it
· Place the jack near the wheel to be changed as illustrated.
· Completely unscrew the five bolts and remove the wheel. In case a
could overheat. Also, prolonged
· Make sure that the head of the jack
wheel security stud bolt is installed,
power absorption may discharge the is correctly inserted in one of the
it can only be removed by using the
battery, subsequently preventing
slots beneath the rocker panel.
specific fitting wrench provided with
the engine from starting.
the "Wheel Security Stud Bolt Kit",
available in the "Genuine
Accessories" range.
353
In an Emergency
· Fit the compact spare wheel with the valve stem facing outward, securing it with the five bolts previously removed.
· Turn counterclockwise the extension lever of the jack to lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
· Fully tighten the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite.
WARNING! · FOR ALUMINIUM SPARE WHEEL
Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the spare wheel (72 ± 7 lbf·ft/ 98 ± 10 Nm).
· FOR STEEL SPARE WHEEL Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the spare wheel (63 ± 7 lbf·ft/ 86 ± 10 Nm).
· To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
6
WARNING!
· The spare wheel is narrower than
standard wheels and must only be
used to travel the distance required
to reach a service station, where the
punctured tire can be repaired or
replaced.
· Do not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the compact spare wheel; when this limit is exceeded, the stability, road holding and braking of the vehicle
354
In an Emergency
will be compromised. Avoid accelerating to full speed, heavy braking and fast cornering.
· Fully tighten the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite.
· fix everything in place with the locking knob;
· The compact spare wheel must be inflated to the recommended tire pressure (see "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications").
· For safety reasons, it is absolutely forbidden to drive with more than one compact spare wheel fitted on the vehicle.
· Snow chains cannot be fitted on the compact spare wheel.
· place the extension levers, the jack, the spanner and the adapter in the
· The spare wheel can travel a maximum of 1,800 mi (3.000 km).
WARNING! Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the wheels (72 ± 7 lbf·ft
container inside the compact spare wheel;
To Refit the Standard Wheel with
/ 98 ± 10 Nm).
Repaired or Replaced Tire
· Following the procedure and the
· Reassemble the center cover (if
6
caution described above, raise the
provided) on the wheel rim.
vehicle and remove the compact spare wheel reusing the supplied wrench with adapter, suitably extended.
Once finished: · completely deflate the compact
spare wheel by pressing on the valve with the overhang of the valve cap;
· Fit the standard wheel with repaired or replaced tire.
· Tighten the original bolts on the
· wrap the power cable and the inflation hose inside the compressor case and place it in the trunk seat;
· reposition the other tools and the accessories storage box;
wheel. · Lower the vehicle and remove the
· place the compact spare wheel and tool container in the trunk;
· lower the ground coverage at the bottom of the trunk.
jack.
355
In an Emergency
Emergency Release of the vehicle towing see "Towing a Disabled Transmission Manual
Parking Brake
Vehicle" chapter in this section.
Release of P (Park)
In the event the electric parking brake locks due to a system failure (see "Parking Brake" in section "Driving"), it is not possible to move the vehicle, since the actuator that operates on the brake pad inside each rear caliper will lock the rear wheels. After verifying that the battery is sufficiently charged (otherwise use an external power source connected to the vehicle electric system to operate the EPB control lever and try to unlock the parking brake), for moving the vehicle it is necessary to force the actuator to release the rear brake discs. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to carry out this operation.
6
WARNING! If the parking brake has been activated in manual or automatic mode and it is not possible to release it by operating on the lever of the central console, do not move the vehicle since rear brake calipers might be damaged. For more information on
Position
The manual disengagement of the shift from P (Park) has the purpose to allow towing the vehicle if not normally possible using the shift lever (such as inability to start the engine). This procedure is exclusively intended for emergency situations, only!
WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the manual park release. Activating the manual park release could allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake. Activating the manual park release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
The cover that allows the emergency manual park release is located on the left part of the driver's foot well.
· Lift the mat on the driver side to access the cover.
· Slip the cover from its seat.
356
In an Emergency
Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure
CAUTION!
If your vehicle has a discharged
· To jump start a vehicle do not use a
battery it can be jump-started using a
portable battery, a booster pack or
set of jumper cables and a battery of
any other booster source with a
another vehicle or by using a portable
system voltage greater than 14 Volts
battery booster. It is necessary to have
or damage to the battery, starter
proper jumper cables in order to
motor, alternator or electrical system
connect the booster battery to the
of the vehicle with the discharged
· Take strap out of its seat.
remote posts of the discharged
battery may occur.
· With the tip of a screwdriver press the clip shown in the picture box and lift the strap up to release the transmission from the P (Park)
battery. Booster cables have positive and negative terminal clamps and are identified by the sheath color (red = positive, black = negative).
· Do not use a battery charger for emergency starting under any circumstances. You could damage the electronic systems, particularly
position. The new position will allow NOTE:
the control units managing the
vehicle moving and towing.
ignition and fuel supply functions.
· Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
An Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the "Maserati Jumper Cables Kit", available in the "Genuine Accessories"
· If the battery is completely discharged when the windows are fully raised, open the door with the utmost care; do not close the door
6
range.
again until it is possible to lower the
Jump-starting can be dangerous if
window.
done improperly so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the battery manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING! · Always perform jump-starting
operations with appropriate tools and environmental conditions, taking all necessary precautions.
(Continued)
357
In an Emergency
(Continued) · Do not attempt jump-starting if the
discharged battery is frozen.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
· To avoid the risk of explosion or fire, do not approach the battery with open flames or cigarettes that could generate sparks.
NOTE: If you need to disconnect the battery from the vehicle electrical system, see "Maintenance -- Free Battery" in section "Maintenance and Care").
Battery Remote Posts Position
For easier operation, remote battery posts for jump-starting are located in the engine compartment while the battery is stored in the trunk. After lifting the hood (see "Hood Operation" in section "Before Starting") the positive remote post (+) and the negative remote post (-) are shown in the picture and are easily recognizable by the icons labeled on the integrated power module.
3.0 V6 Engines
Jump-Start Procedure
WARNING!
WARNING!
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining
6
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to:
3.8 V8 Engines
· Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan whenever the engine hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
· Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
· Do not allow the vehicles involved in the jumpstarting operation to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and cause personal injury.
358
In an Emergency
· Turn off the heater, radio, and all
· Disconnect the terminal clamp of the
unnecessary electrical accessories.
negative (-) jumper cable from the
· Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into P (Park)
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
and turn the ignition to OFF.
· Disconnect the opposite terminal
· If using another vehicle to jumpstart the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach and set the
clamp of the negative jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
parking brake and make sure the
· Disconnect the terminal clamp of the
ignition is off.
positive (+) jumper cable from the
· Connect one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive
3.8 V8 Engines
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
(+) remote post of the vehicle with
· Disconnect the opposite terminal
the discharged battery after lifting
clamp of the positive jumper cable
the protection cap of the cable
from the remote positive (+) post of
indicated on the external side of the
the discharged vehicle.
integrated power module.
NOTE:
· Connect the opposite terminal clamp
of the positive (+) jumper cable to
If frequent jump-starting is required
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system
6
inspected at an Authorized Maserati
· Connect one terminal clamp of the
3.0 V6 Engines
Dealer.
negative jumper cable to the
· Start the engine in the vehicle that
negative (-) post of the booster
has the booster battery, let the
battery.
engine idle a few minutes, and then
· Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery as rendered.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster, wait a few seconds after connecting the cables, before starting the booster vehicle.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including
Once the engine is started, remove the such as, engine exhaust, carbon
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
(Continued)
359
In an Emergency
(Continued) monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
Towing a Disabled Vehicle
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION! Any improper maneuver and use of unsuitable equipment for recovering vehicle in an emergency from off road location could seriously damage the vehicle. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Vehicle Towing Conditions
Maserati only allows vehicle towing with all four wheels off the ground.
WARNING! Single axle towing or use of a tow dolly is not allowed since it will severely damage vehicle components.
Use the Tow Hook Included in the Tool Kit
Manual Release of Transmission
CAUTION!
with Low Battery
The tow hook should only be used for towing the car on flat roads. Do not
In order to push or tow the vehicle if use the tow hook to remove the car
unable to shift the transmission out of that is stuck on off road stretches.
6
P (Park) (such as a discharged battery), The tow hook is also used to tow the
a manual park release is available. In
vehicle on the platform of a tow truck.
this case it is necessary to manually
Before carrying out this operation, if
release the shift lever and release the the battery of the vehicle still works,
parking brake if inserted (see "Emergency Release of the Parking
set "Transport Mode" on MTC+ in "Suspensions" submenu (see "MTC+
Brake" in this section). Follow the steps as indicated in
Settings" chapter in section "Dashboard Instruments and
"Transmission Manual Release of P
Controls"). With this mode activated,
(Park) Position" in this section to
the ride height will be lowered to the
manually disengage the transmission. minimum value and the pneumatic
suspension system will be disabled to
help vehicle loading on the tow truck.
360
In an Emergency
The tow hook is contained in the tool kit (see "Tool Kit" chapter in this section) and must be screwed in the seat located on the front and rear bumper.
· To access the front tow hook seat on the front bumper, remove the cover on the right side of the bumper lower grid.
· To access the rear tow hook seat, remove the external cap on the right side of the rear bumper (not present on TROFEO version).
NOTE:
Maximum work angle of towing cable: 15°.
6
GranSport, GTS and TROFEO Versions
GranSport and GTS Versions · Carefully clean the threaded seat
before screwing the hook.
· Screw the tow hook into its seat for at least 11 turns.
361
In an Emergency
362
7 Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 A/C System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Interior Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Restarting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Battery Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
363
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance Service
Correct maintenance is clearly the best way to guarantee vehicle performance and safety features, ensure respect for the environment and low operating costs.
NOTE:
Also remember that the observance of the maintenance procedures is essential for keeping your vehicle operating properly. Not adhering to the "Scheduled Service Plan" can impact your vehicle's warranty.
CAUTION! The Scheduled Maintenance services are prescribed by the Manufacturer. Failure to have the services carried out can affect your warranty.
The Scheduled Maintenance service is provided by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. In the event that, when a service is performed, further replacements or repairs are found to be necessary in addition to the scheduled operations, these can be carried out only with the specific consent of the Customer.
NOTE: · Change your engine oil more often if
you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time or short trips without reaching operating temperatures. Even the use of the vehicle with extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and with trailer tow may make more frequent engine oil changes necessary.
· Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed mileage/years reported on the "Scheduled Service Plan" in this section.
Interval Running Coupons
Maserati has therefore provided for a series of checks and maintenance operations involving the 1st service and subsequent when the vehicle reaches mileage/years reported on the
CAUTION! You are advised to notify the Authorized Maserati Dealer of any minor operating problem, without waiting for the next scheduled service.
CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
Scheduled Maintenance
7
"Scheduled Service Plan" in this
(Service) Indicator
section. After the last service, maintenance must be restarted with the operations scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd service.
The service indicator system will
remind you the deadline for the
maintenance program.
The indicator light
on the
instrument cluster flashes for approx. 5
seconds displaying the message backed
by a beeping sound, indicating that
364
Maintenance and Care
the next scheduled maintenance is due or has already overdue.
NOTE:
The service indicator will not monitor the time elapsed from the last scheduled maintenance.
Scheduled Service Plan
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done within the times or mileages specified
To check the mi/km and the days that to protect your vehicle warranty and
remain at the inspiration of the next ensure the best vehicle performance
scheduled maintenance, consult the
and reliability.
"Maintenance" submenu of "VEHICLE More frequent maintenance may be
INFO" main menu (see paragraph "TFT needed for vehicles in operating
Dispaly : Warning/Indicator Lights of
conditions, such as dusty areas,
the Set Modes/ Functions" in chapter extremely hot or cold ambient
When the scheduled maintenance has
overdue, the indicator light
and
message will be displayed on the
instrument cluster.
"Instrument Cluster" of section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for more details). An Authorized Maserati Dealer will reset the service indicator message
temperatures and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
after completing the scheduled
Maserati recommends that these
maintenance operations.
maintenance intervals be performed
at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The
technicians at your dealership know
your vehicle best, and have access to
factory-approved information,
genuine Maserati parts, and specially
designed electronic and mechanical
7
tools that can help prevent future
costly repairs.
The service indicator and message will illuminate approximately from 620 mi (1000 km) or 30 days to the next scheduled maintenance. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
365
Maintenance and Care
Main Operations/Service Coupons
Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year
Service coupons 1°
2°
3°
4°
Main operations
Available Pre-Paid Maintenance
5°
6°
Program
Vehicle road test
I
I
I
Check with Maserati Diagnosi
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engine oil and filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engine check for leaks
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks)
I
I
I
Air filter
R
Belt for alternator, water pump and air conditioning compressor (3.8 V8 engine)
I
I
I
R
I
I
Replace every time the part is removed
Belt for alternator (1) and belt for water pump and air conditioning compressor (3.0 V6 engine)
I
I
I
R
I
I
Replace every time the part is removed
Spark plugs
R
R
7
Intercooler check for leaks
Brake fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 2 years
Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster
I
I
I
I
I
I
warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation
Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check
I
I
I
I
I
I
Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear under-chassis
I
I
I
366
Maintenance and Care
Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year
Service coupons 1°
2°
3°
4°
Main operations
Available Pre-Paid Maintenance
5°
6°
Program
Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pollen filter
R
R
R
Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer and headlight cleaner
I
I
I
I
I
I
Headlight leveling
I
I
I
I
I
I
Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors,
I
I
I
engine compartment lid and luggage compartment
Condition of leather interiors
I
I
I
(1) In case of heavy-duty use of the vehicle, highlighted by the presence of mud and dust in the engine compartment, proceed to the preventive replacement of the alternator belt. I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation. R = Replace.
Periodic Maintenance
Every 600 mi (1,000 km) or before long journeys Check:
· engine coolant; · brake fluid; · windshield washer fluid level; · tire inflation pressure and condition;
· operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning flashers, etc.);
· operation of windshield washer/wiper system and wear of windshield wiper blades.
Every 1,900 mi (3,000 km) Check and top up, if required, the engine oil level.
WARNING!
California Proposition 65
7
Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
(Continued)
367
Maintenance and Care
(Continued)
· check cleanliness of hood and trunk Dealer.
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;
· visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves bushes - etc.);
· check battery charge;
· visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts;
On Board Diagnostic System
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated on board diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use
· check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter;
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions suited to
If the car is mainly used under one of the following conditions:
· check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter of the A/C system;
current government regulations. If any of these systems require service,
· towing a trailer; · off-road;
· check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner filter.
the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light on the instrument cluster display (refer to
7
· short, repeated journeys (less than 45 mi/7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures;
· engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of idleness;
you should perform the following inspections more frequently than recommended on the "Scheduled Service Plan":
CAUTION!
All maintenance operations for the vehicle must be carried out by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. For routine and minor maintenance operations which you can carry out yourself, make sure that you have the necessary experience and always use suitable equipment, original Maserati
"Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). The system stores as well diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician by performing repairs. Although the vehicle will be driveable and will not need towing, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service as soon as possible.
· check front disc brake pad conditions spare parts and the prescribed fluids.
and wear;
Shall this not be the case, do not carry
any operation on your own and
contact an Authorized Maserati
368
Maintenance and Care
CAUTION!
· Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
· If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service at an Authorized Maserati Dealer is required.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light " is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
1. Press the ignition device to the RUN position, but do not crank or start the engine.
2. As soon as you press the ignition device to turn the engine On, you will see the MIL remain illuminated for 15 seconds, this is a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later,
one of two things will happen:
· The MIL
will remain
illuminated and a message error
will appear on your instrument
cluster. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is not
serviced, recently had a dead battery
ready and you should not
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
proceed to the I/M station.
system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
· The MIL
will turn Off. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you
7
should see an Authorized Maserati
Dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need
to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order
for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine
369
Maintenance and Care
may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
Spare Parts
Use of genuine Maserati parts for normal or scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure excellent performance. Damage or failures caused by non-genuine spare parts used for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.
Dealer Service
An Authorized Maserati Dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties.
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Take your vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
7
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of
370
Maintenance Procedures
The following pages contain the "required" maintenance standards determined by Maserati engineers. Besides those maintenance items specified in the "Scheduled Service Plan", there are other components which may require service or replacement in the future. To perform most of the services, it is necessary to open the hood (see "Hood Operation" in section "Before Starting"). The following images show the position of the components involved in the maintenance service.
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes for washing as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damages are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an Authorized Maserati Dealer or a qualified repair center.
· Your vehicle has been equipped with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your
Maintenance and Care
7
371
Maintenance and Care Maintenance Service Components
3.8 V8 Engines (in picture GTS version) 1 Inspection cover to access the
engine oil level dipstick (present only in GTS version). 2 Engine oil filler neck. 3 Air cleaner filters. 4 Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5 Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6 Windshield/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap. 7 Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8 A/C pollen filter access cover. 9 Integrated power module (fuses).
7
372
3.8 V8 Engines (GTS Version pictured)
3.0 V6 Engines
1 Engine oil dipstick. 2 Engine oil filler neck. 3 Air cleaner filters. 4 Engine coolant expansion
reservoir cap. 5 Coolant reservoir cap for
transmission cooling system. 6 Windshield/headlight washer
fluid reservoir cap. 7 Brake fluid reservoir access
cover. 8 A/C pollen filter access cover. 9 Integrated power module
(fuses).
Maintenance and Care
7
3.0 V6 Engines 373
Maintenance and Care
Level Checks
When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze) use pure water only, such
as distilled or deionized water when
ENVIRONMENTAL!
mixing the water/engine coolant
· The engine oils and fluids used
(antifreeze) solution. The use of
contain substances that are
impure water will reduce the amount
dangerous to the environment. For of corrosion protection in the engine
replacement you are advised to
cooling system.
contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer, where all the necessary equipment is available to dispose of the used oil and fluids in compliance with the regulations in force and in an environment-friendly manner.
· All equipment used for fluids
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) if temperatures below -35°F (-37°C) are forecast.
Please note that it is the owner's
replacement (gloves, cloths,
responsibility to maintain the proper
containers, etc) must be disposed of level of protection against freezing
in compliance with the regulations in according to the temperatures
force.
occurring in the circulation area of the
Engine Coolant Level Check
vehicle. The coolant bottle provides a quick
Your vehicle has been equipped with an improved engine coolant
visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as
· When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
7
(antifreeze) that offers high protection the engine operating temperature is
against corrosion, freezing and allows satisfactory, the coolant bottle only
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle after removing
extended maintenance intervals. To
needs to be checked once a month.
the cap. Do not overfill.
prevent reducing extended
With the engine off and cold, the level · Once the desired level is reached,
maintenance periods, it is important to of the coolant in the bottle on the left reassemble and firmly close cap of
use original engine coolant
side of the engine compartment
the bottle.
(antifreeze) when adding coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle and inside the filler neck.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery
374
Maintenance and Care
bottle does not drop when the
which are known to the State of
· Clean the top of the master cylinder
engine cools, the cooling system
California to cause cancer and birth
reservoir before removing the cap.
should be tested by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. · Keep the front of the radiator and the condenser clean.
WARNING! · Never add engine coolant
(antifreeze) when the engine is hot. Do not loosen or remove the cap of
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
· Add fluid to bring the level up to the "MAX" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid (see "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications").
· Once the correct level is reached, firmly close the cap.
the engine coolant bottle to cool a hot engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
· When adding coolant do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level immediately if the brake system warning light
and the related message turn on indicating a low level of brake fluid.
· Remove the brake fluid reservoir access cover.
Normal brake pad wear could cause the fluid level to fall. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak
too, and requires accurate checkup of
7
WARNING!
the braking system.
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining
CAUTION!
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
The symbol on the tank cap identifies the synthetic type of brake fluid, distinguishing it from the
(Continued)
375
Maintenance and Care
(Continued)
fluid appears together with the
mineral type. Using mineral fluids damages the special rubber linings of
related telltale add more fluid as soon as possible.
the brake system irreparably.
Depending on the system installed in
the vehicle, the fluid reservoir may
contain nearly 5.3 Quarts (5 liters) of
WARNING! · To avoid contamination from foreign
materials or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
· Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, make sure it does not spill over these surfaces.
· Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged.
windshield/headlight washer fluid or nearly 3.7 Quarts (3.5 liters) of washer fluid.
· Remove the reservoir cap in the engine compartment and lift the filler neck.
· Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (refer to "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications") and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
· When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield/headlight washer system in
7
Adding Windshield/Headlight Washer
Fluid
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate.
The reservoir on the left side of the
This rating information can be found
engine compartment contains the fluid
on most washer fluid containers.
to wash the windshield, the window
liftgate and headlights (if equipped).
During scheduled services or when the
message of low level of the washer
376
Maintenance and Care
NOTE:
which are known to the State of
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the Maserati recommended "Windshield Washer Fluid" with antifreeze, available in the "Genuine Accessories" catalog.
WARNING! · Commercially available windshield
washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you.
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
Engine Oil Level Check
CAUTION!
· Do not top up with oil with different characteristics than the engine one (refer to "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications").
· Overfilling or underfilling the oil pan will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
· Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its performance may be impaired by
Care must be exercised when filling To assure proper lubrication of your
supplemental additives.
or when working around the
vehicle's engine, the engine oil must
windshield/headlight washer
be maintained at the correct level.
· Remove the inspection cover on the
system.
If the warning light illuminates
right engine bank (3.8 V8 Engines, in
· Do not drive with the windshield/
and the related message of low oil
picture GTS Version).
headlight washer reservoir empty:
level displays, or during scheduled
the action of the washer is essential services (see "Scheduled Maintenance
for improving visibility when
Service" in this section) it is necessary
driving.
to check the engine oil level.
The best time to check the engine oil
7
level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off or
WARNING!
before starting the engine after it has
California Proposition 65
sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle
Operating, servicing and maintaining should be parked on level ground to
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
3.8 V8 Engines · Remove the dipstick and clean it
with a dry and clean cloth.
377
Maintenance and Care
3.8 V8 Engines
· If a refilling is necessary: unscrew the filler neck cap.
3.0 V6 Engines
· Adding 1.6 Quarter /1.4 Liters (3.8 V8 Engines) or 1 Quart /1 Liter (3.0 V6 Engines) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range.
· Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the oil pan.
· Check the level again.
3.0 V6 Engines
7
· Re-insert the dipstick completely and
remove: the oil level should maintain
between the "MIN" and "MAX"
reference ranges (SAFE range).
3.8 V8 Engines
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to perform this service.
Automatic Transmission Oil Check
Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer for the oil level check.
378
Maintenance and Care
Fluid Level Check for Coolant Transmission System
The coolant contained in the bottle of this system is the same as the one used for the cooling system of the engine. For the preparation of the mixture of water and antifreeze and for the control of the level, proceed as shown in the "Engine Coolant Level Check" of this chapter.
the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. To replace the filter during the scheduled maintenance services or after the vehicle has been heavily used on dusty roads, proceed as follows:
· Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips indicated.
· Remove the used filter slipping it off from within the air intake.
· Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
· Unsnap both ends and lift the filter
Engine Air Filters Replacement retaining cover.
Contact an Authorized Maserati
Dealer to have the air filters replaced.
7
A/C Air Filter Replacement
This filter performs mechanic/ electrostatic air filtering, provided that windows and doors are closed. The filter is located under the hood in the external A/C system air inlet, on
· Close the filter retaining cover and reinstall the access door.
379
Maintenance and Care
use the "Service" position for any
If the jet does not work, first check
CAUTION!
intervention on the windshield wiper that there is fluid in the tank (see
blades.
paragraph "Level checks" in this
Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the air conditioning and heating system efficiency.
Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement
Windshield Wiper Arms Lifting
When the windshield wiper arms are in rest position it is not possible to check or replace the blades as they remain under the engine hood. To service the blades it is necessary to move the wiper arms in "Service" position (see chapter "Wipers and Washers" in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). In this way it is possible to lift the arms for cleaning or replacing the wiper blades.
Windshield Wiper Maintenance
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on the geographical area's weather conditions where the car is used and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks on the glass, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace if necessary. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield/rear window glasses periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades.
section) then check that the nozzles are not clogged.
Windshield Wiper Blades Replacement
· Move the wiper arms into "Service" position, (see chapter "Windshield Wipers and Washers" in section "Understanding the Vehicle") and lift them.
· Press the indicated button, slip off the blade support from the arm and replace it.
7
Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from
WARNING!
It is dangerous to operate or service the wiper blades with the windshield wipers in an active position (any position different from "OFF") and with the ignition switch in the RUN position. The rain sensors may suddenly activate the wipers. Always
a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Spray nozzles
· Return the blade to its original position on the windshield.
· Turn the multifunction lever to one of the automatic settings (see chapter "Windshield Wipers and Washers" in section "Understanding the Vehicle") and move the ignition
380
Maintenance and Care
switch to the RUN position: the wiper arms will return to the resting position.
Maintenance-Free Battery
This vehicle is equipped with a sealed
NOTE: Due to the difficulty of this operation,
type maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
we recommend that you contact an
Authorized Maserati Dealer for
replacement of the blades.
WARNING!
Rear Window Blade Replacement
· To replace the rear window wiper blade on the liftgate, lift the wiper arm with blade up to the stop position.
· Replace the blade.
· Insert the pivot, present inside the blade central support, in the fork-shaped end of the arm until hearing the click indicating that it is engaged.
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or damage the eyes. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
· Battery gas is flammable and
explosive. Keep flame or sparks
away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than
12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps
to touch each other.
· Battery posts, terminals, and related
7
· Turn the blade to the position indicated in the figure.
· Hold the arm steady and pull the blade, by holding it from the central support, until it is removed.
Stretch the arm and put the blade back in contact with the liftgate window.
accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling the battery.
· The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a component of the
381
Maintenance and Care
(Continued) same type (vented).
NOTE:
Remote battery terminals for starting are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting to be used with an auxiliary battery or a battery from another vehicle (see "Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure" chapter in section "In an Emergency").
To Disconnect the Battery
The battery is located on the inner right side of the trunk compartment. To access the battery it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the trunk compartment (see chapter "Tool Kit" in section "In an Emergency") and remove the storage box.
WARNING!
California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
opened and closed. The trunk lid must remain open and the windows lowered until the charged battery is reconnected.
· Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system when the engine is running.
· To temporarily disconnect the vehicle electrical system from the battery, simply remove the cable end with quick coupling from the negative post (-) of the battery.
· If the battery needs to be removed from its compartment, you must first detach the terminal clamp to the negative post (-) and then the other terminal clamp to the positive post (+), after removing the protective cover. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case.
7
CAUTION!
· Before disconnecting the battery,
open the trunk and lower the
windows a few centimeters, to avoid
damaging the seal when opening
and closing the door. When the
battery is connected, the lowering of
the window is performed
automatically when the door is
382
Maintenance and Care
time. If the vehicle is equipped with
carry out the teach mode cycle
power liftgate, manually perform
described on chapter "Power
the complete closure. Then move the Sunshades on Rear Door Windows"
lid automatically, using the buttons on the outer edge of the left trunk,
in section "Before Starting".
performing a complete cycle of opening and closing.
CAUTION!
· Initialize the climate control system · Every time the battery is
by activating the system and
reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds
pressing the "AUTO" control as
with the ignition switch turned to
To Reconnect the Battery
described in chapter "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and
RUN before starting the engine, in order to allow the electronic system that manages the motor-driven
CAUTION!
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post (+) and the negative cable is attached to the negative post ().
· Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
Controls".
· Turn on the MTC+ and set the date and time (see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls").
· Lift, release and lift again the lever on the central console to initialize the electric parking brake. Following this operation the warning light
throttles to run a self-learning cycle. At the same time, you can run the date and time set up procedure for the MTC+.
· Every time the battery is reconnected the warning light flash for about 10 seconds and then go off.
After the battery has been
on the instrument cluster will turn
disconnected and re-connected and
off.
WARNING!
7
before starting the engine it is necessary to proceed as follows:
· For correct activation of the approach lights on the external
California Proposition 65
· Unlock and lock the doors using one more time the Key fob RKE Transmitter.
mirrors, press at least once the tilt button on the driver's door panel so that the door mode recognizes the mirrors position.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
· Close manually the liftgate unlock it
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
lid with the key fob RKE transmitter · If the car is equipped with power
which are known to the State of
and then lock it manually on more
sunshades on rear door windows,
(Continued)
383
Maintenance and Care
(Continued)
We recommend you to have the
· Recharge the battery in a
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
battery charge condition checked, preferably at the beginning of the cold season, to prevent the electrolyte from freezing. This check should be carried out more frequently if the vehicle is used mainly for short trips or if it is equipped with
well-ventilated environment.
· Never charge or recharge a frozen battery.
· Ensure that any sparks or open flames are kept well away from the battery while it is charging.
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to:
power-absorbing devices that remain permanently on even when the
· Before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status,
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- ignition switch is off. This applies
vehicle
above all if these devices have been
carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is
Useful Advice to Extend
retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). If the vehicle is not used for long
connected to the battery safely and correctly.
Battery Life
periods of time, please see "Vehicle
When parking the vehicle, make sure Stored for Long Periods" in this that the doors, hood, liftgate and flaps section.
It is possible to recharge the battery without disconnecting the cables of the vehicle electrical system.
are properly closed. All interior lights should be off.
Battery Recharge
· To access the battery lift the ground
When the engine is turned off, do not
coverage of the trunk compartment
keep the connected devices switched on for a long time (such as radio,
WARNING!
(see chapter "Tool Kit" section "In an Emergency") and remove the storage
hazard warning flashers, fan, etc.).
The process of charging or recharging
box.
7
the battery produces hydrogen, a flammable gas that can explode and
· Remove the protection cover and connect the terminal clamp of the
CAUTION!
cause serious injuries. When charging
charger positive cable (typically in
If the battery charge remains below
or recharging the battery, follow the
red) to the positive post (+) of the
50% for a long period of time, it will recommended precautions at all times. battery.
be damaged due to sulfation; its performance and starting power will
· Before using a charger device always · Connect the terminal clamp of the check that this tool is suitable for the charger negative cable (typically in
be reduced and it will be more subject to freezing.
installed battery, with constant voltage (lower than 14.0 V) and low
black) to the nut located by the
amperage (maximum limit 15 A).
384
Maintenance and Care
negative post (-) on the battery,
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
indicated in the picture.
which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more
The vehicle is equipped with an IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able to measure charging and discharging currents and to calculate the state of
· Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on its user manual to completely recharge the battery.
· When the battery is recharged, turn off the battery charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
charge and state of health of the
· Disconnect first the terminal clamp
battery. This sensor is located at the
of the charger black cable from the
negative post (-) of the battery.
battery and then the terminal clamp
For a successful charge/recharge
of the red cable.
operation, the charging current must · Reassemble the protection cover on
flow through the IBS sensor as shown
the battery positive post and the
in the picture.
other parts removed for this
operation.
7
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
385
Maintenance and Care
Fuse Replacement
Used Fuses Characteristics
When an electrical device is not functioning, check that the corresponding fuse is in proper working order (intact). A Fuse intact B Fuse blown
integrated power module and inside the cover of the rear power distribution center.
CAUTION!
· Never replace a blown fuse with anything other than a new and suitable fuse (same rating).
· After replacing a fuse, if the fault recurs, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
The color identifies the value of the fuses in amperes which is also reported on them. The table shows the match between color and amperage of mini and maxi fuses.
Position of Fuses
The fuses are located in three parts of the vehicle, namely:
· inside the integrated power module, on the right hand side of the engine compartment;
The vehicle mainly uses mini-and
maxi-fuses with blade engagement.
7
Besides these there are other types of
fuses provided with holes for attaching
to the cable connection terminals.
For the replacement of these fuses
contact an Authorized Maserati
Dealer.
Replace the faulty fuse with a new one
featuring the same rating, by using
appropriate forceps added in the
Type
Mini Fuse
Maxi Fuse
Beige - 5
Yellow - 20
Brown - 7,5
Green - 30
Red - 10
Orange - 40
Blue - 15
Red - 50
Yellow - 20
Blue - 60
White - 25
Green - 30
· inside the rear power distribution center, behind the battery, on the right hand side of the trunk compartment;
386
Maintenance and Care
Ref.
Type
Function
5
Maxi 40A
ABS-ESP pump feed
6
Maxi 30A
AWD module relay input
7
8
Maxi 40A
ABS-ESP valve feed
· on the fuse and relay box located in The table points out the position as
9
a covered area, under the dashboard featured in the figure, the type and
10
left side.
Integrated Power Module
· To access the module it is necessary to lift the hood (see "Hood
function of the fuses included in the integrated power module.
CAUTION!
11 Mini 20A Horn relay input
12
Mini 10A
AC compressor feed relay input
13
Operation" in section "Before Starting").
· To access the fuses remove the module cover unhooking the lateral locks as shown in the picture.
· After replacement, refit the protective cover of the module.
· If you need to wash the engine compartment, do not direct the water for too long directly on the module.
14 Mini 7,5A Alarm siren
Washer heated 15 Mini 5A nozzles relay
input
Enable cooling
fan relay input
Ref. Type Function
16 Mini 10A and enable
7
cooling oil pump
Secondary air
relay input
2 Maxi 50A pump relay input (V8 engines only)
18
3
Headlamp 19 Maxi 30A washer relay
4
Maxi 30A
Starter motor relay input
input
387
Maintenance and Care
Ref. Type Function
Ref.
Type
Function
Ref.
Type Function
20
Maxi 30A
Wiper motor relay output
LH low beam
21
Maxi 20A
relay input (with Bi-Xenon
headlight)
RH low beam
22
Maxi 20A
relay input (with Bi-Xenon
headlight)
23
24
Drive Assist 28 Mini 7,5A System Module
(DASM)
PCM module 29 Mini 10A Starter solenoid
relay coil
30
Mini 5A
ORC- Air bag module
31 Mini 5A ABS-ESP module
32
Mini 5A
AWD module, EPS and AQS
33
Mini 10A
HDLP Headlights - AFLS
Primary load to 34 Mini 15A engine harness
LH side
Primary load to 35 Mini 15A engine harness
RH side
7
36
Mini 30A
PCM module primary load
37
Mini 15A
Engine secondary load
38 Mini 15A Lambda sensor
388
Maintenance and Care
Ref.
Type
Function
Ref.
Type
Function
Flow meters,
tank lackage,
39
Mini 7,5A
canister, exhaust by-pass valve
relay coil and air
shutter
48
Pedal brake 49 Mini 10A switch-TCM
module
50 Mini 15A +30 PCM module
51
Mini 30A
Fuel pump relay input
Starter solenoid
52
Mini 5A
signal for PCM and voltage
stabilizer
53 Mini 10A AWD module
· Press the release latch and lift the lid from this side.
· Push the lid toward the right side to release the indicated latches on the unit.
2 Maxi 40A BCM module
3 Maxi 40A BCM module
4 Maxi 30A BCM module
5 Maxi 30A BCM module
Trailer harness 6 Maxi 20A (not for TROFEO
version)
7
Maxi 30A
Driver door module
8
Maxi 30A
Passenger door module
Start&Stop:
9
Maxi 40A
voltage stabilizer,
dashboard
Start&Stop: 10 Maxi 40A voltage
stabilizer, body
Rear Power Distribution Center
"High Premium"
Maxi 40A stereo amplifier
7
· To access the center it is necessary to
unit
lift the ground coverage of the trunk compartment (see chapter "Tool Kit" in section "In an Emergency") and remove the storage box.
The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and function of the fuses on the rear area
11 "Premium"
Maxi 20A stereo amplifier unit (1)
· To access the fuses, release the cover distribution control unit.
15
Maxi 40A
HVAC front blower relay coil
latch shown in picture.
389
Maintenance and Care
Ref. Type Function
Rear window 16 Maxi 40A defrost relay coil
(HVAC module)
17
Maxi 30A
Rear LH door module
18
Maxi 30A
Rear RH door module
Ref.
Type
Function
19
Maxi 25A
Power liftgate module
"Premium" 20 Maxi 20A stereo amplifier
unit (2)
21
Maxi 40A
ELDOR coil (V8 engines only)
7
Ref.
Type Function
22
Mini 7,5A
Rear HVAC module
Fuel door relay 23 Mini 10A and RF Hub
module
ITM module,
24
Mini 10A
ceiling light unit (front and rear),
rain/lights sensor
25 Mini 25A Sunroof module
26
27
31
Mini 30A
LH front seat movement
Trailer module 32 Mini 15A LH side (not for
TROFEO version)
Trailer module 33 Mini 15A RH side (not for
TROFEO version)
34
Mini 20A
Soft Door Close latch
35
Mini 20A
Rear doors sunshade
390
Maintenance and Care
Ref.
Type
Function
Ref. Type Function
Ref.
Type
Function
Transmission lever, TPMS
50
Rear seat and
63
Mini 20A
Blower rear HVAC
module, Navtrak, USB/AUX and
51 Mini 25A steering wheel heater module
64
Mini 7,5A
Rear HVAC module
36 Mini 10A USB cherger, ASBM Control suspension and
52
Mini 20A
Trunk power outlet
65
Mini 10A
Intelligent battery sensor
Hands Free
53
Rear Seat
access module 37 Mini 25A ASCM module
54
Mini 7,5A
Blind Spot module
66 Mini 10A Entertainment (RSE)
38
Mini 30A
RH front seat movement
41
Maxi 40A
ASCM motor supply
42
43
Mini 20A
Seat passenger heater module
44
45
46 Mini 5A Rear camera
47 Mini 5A Navtrak
48 Mini 5A Surround view
Internal
55
67 Mini 10A Sunroof
56
Mini 10A
Blower front HVAC coil relay
Power outlet on 68 Mini 20A central console
57
Mini 10A
Blower rear HVAC coil relay
rear side Rear console
Trailer harness 58 Mini 10A (not for TROFEO
69 Mini 25A power outlet and cigar lighter
version)
Front HVAC
module, Parking
USB charger, transmission
Aid Module (PAM), ASCM
59 Mini 10A lever, ASBM, rear tunnel stack
70 Mini 10A Front HVAC
7
switch
module, Parking
60
Aid Module (PAM), ASCM
temperature 49 Mini 10A sensor, umidity
61
Mini 15A
Rear window wiper relay
and ELDOR coil (V8 engines only)
sensor, internal mirror and HALF
62
Mini 7,5A
Front HVAC module
391
Maintenance and Care
Fuse Box under the Dashboard
This box is located in an internal area under the dashboard left side. Considering the complexity of this operation, we recommend having the fuses replaced by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and function of the fuses in the box under the dashboard.
Ref.
Type Function
Start & Stop 8 Mini 10A switch,
diagnostic outlet
Ref.
Type
Function
Cluster module, USB charger, CSS, 1 Mini 7,5A SGW and DSRC (Japan version only)
2
Mini 15A
Cluster module, clock
DSRC and DTV
3 Mini 10A system (Japan
version only)
7
4 Mini 5A E-call
5 Mini 7,5A Security Gateway
6 Mini 15A Radio
7
Mini 10A
Column software module, CSS
392
Bulb Replacement
The signal failure of an external light (turn signal, low beam and high beam, license plate light, reverse light and brake light) is communicated to the instrument cluster that displays on the TFT screen in a graphical form and with a text message which light is faulty (see example in the figure).
5 Side reflex-reflector. 6 Front fog light LED.
Lights Cluster
The lights of the front clusters are arranged as follows:
Bi-Xenon Version
1 Bi-Xenon low-beam/high-beam bulb (25W-No AFS, 35W-With AFS).
2 Position and DRL light LED. 3 Turn signal LED. 4 Side-marker light LED.
Bi-Xenon Version Full-LED Version (optional)
1 Low-beam light LED. 2 Position, DRL and direction
indicator light LED. 3 Matrix high-beam light LED. 4 Side-marker LED. 5 Side reflex-reflector. 6 Bending light LED. 7 Front fog light LED.
Maintenance and Care
Full-LED Version The lights of the rear clusters are arranged as follows: 1 Position light guide LED. 2 Stop light LED. 3 Turn signal LED. 4 Reverse light LED. 5 Rear fog light LED. 6 Side reflex-reflector.
7
393
Maintenance and Care
Passenger Compartment
CAUTION!
Due to the complexity of the operation, for the replacement of the light cluster bulbs/LEDs, we recommend that you contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Interior Lights
Lamps inside the glove box compartment of the dashboard, lamps under the sun visors and those located next to the passenger handholds for the external rear seats are LED powered and cannot be replaced by
the owner. Contact the Authorized
WARNING!
The Bi-Xenon bulbare a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the ignition switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to replace a
Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement
Most of the lights of front and rear clusters, those integrated in the exterior mirrors and those of the stop light on the liftgate are LED powered
Maserati Dealer to replace them.
Trunk Compartment Light
The lights inside the trunk compartment and on the liftgate are LED powered: contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to replace them.
Bi-Xenon bulb yourself, but take the vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service.
and cannot be replaced individually. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to locate the correct parts and
Besides the light clusters, a third LED
replace them.
stop light is present on the rear side of Front Light Bulb Replacement
the liftgate.
Contact an Authorized Maserati
7
Dealer to replace them.
License Plate Lights
License plate lights are LED powered: contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to replace them.
394
Maintenance and Care
A/C System Maintenance
For the best performance, the air conditioning system should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Maserati Dealer at the beginning of the warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser, check of the drive belt tension and a performance test. During the winter, the air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month for about 10 minutes.
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
Dealer.
Periodically remove any leaves and insects that may build up and obstruct the inlet of external air in the air conditioning system through the grille present underneath the rear part of the hood. To access the grille, lift the hood as described in "Hood Operation" in section "Before Starting".
CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air
WARNING! · Use only refrigerants and
compressor lubricants approved by
conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not
the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
flammable and can explode, causing injuries. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly
repairs.
7
WARNING!
California Proposition 65
· The air conditioning system contains
Operating, servicing and maintaining
refrigerant under high pressure. To
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle avoid risk of personal injury or
can expose you to chemicals including
damage to the system, adding
such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
which are known to the State of
done by an Authorized Maserati
395
Maintenance and Care
Wheels Maintenance
Tires Maintenance
Insufficient tire inflating pressure can cause tire overheating and possible internal damage.
WARNING! · Check the inflating pressure of the
tires when cold, at least every two
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
weeks and before long trips.
To obtain the best performances and
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
· Have old tires inspected by an
the longest mileage from the tires,
pressure, always reinstall the valve
experienced technician, to make sure
take the following precautions during stem cap. This will prevent moisture
they can still be used safely. If the
the first 310 mi (500 km):
and dirt from entering the valve stem,
same tire has been on your vehicle
· do not drive at the vehicle's maximum speed;
· drive at low speed on curves;
which could damage it.
Impacts with curbs, holes, and obstacles in the road, and prolonged trips on rough roads or off-road trails
for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected anyway by an experienced technician.
· Never fit tires of uncertain origin.
· avoid sudden steering; · avoid sudden braking;
can cause tire damage which may not be visible to the naked eye.
· "Directional" tires have an arrow on their side showing the rolling
· avoid sudden acceleration;
Check your tires regularly for any signs direction. To keep the best
· do not drive at high speeds for too
of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks,
performance when replacing a tire,
long.
bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate make sure that the rolling direction
the tires, they can cause structural
corresponds to the one shown by
The tires inflation pressure must
damage which is only visible when the the arrow.
7
correspond to the prescribed values (see the chapter "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications") and should be checked only when the tires have cooled down.
tire is removed. In any case, any possible damage must be inspected by an experienced technician, as it may seriously reduce the tire life.
· During the tire life, the rolling direction used for the first fitting should always be observed, also in case of "nondirectional" tires.
In fact, the pressure increases as the
Remember that tires deteriorate with · Check the depth of the tire tread at
tire temperature progressively
time, even if used little or not at all.
regular intervals. The minimum
increases.
Cracks in the tire tread and sides,
allowed value is 0.06 in (1.6 mm) at
Never reduce the pressure if tires are alongside possible bulging, are a sign
that point the wear indicators on the
hot (see "Tires General Information" of deterioration.
tire will be visible (see "Tires
chapter in section "Driving").
General Information" in section
396
Maintenance and Care
"Driving"). The thinner is the tread, the greater is the risk of skidding.
· Drive carefully on wet roads to decrease the risk of aquaplaning.
governing snow tire and tread depth requirements.
Wheel Rims Maintenance
Bodywork Maintenance and Care
Protection from Atmospheric
Winter Tires These tires are specially designed for
All wheel trims should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive
Agents
The main causes of corrosion are:
driving on snow and ice and are fitted brake dust, use a nonabrasive,
· atmospheric pollution;
to replace the ones supplied with the non-acidic cleaner.
· salinity and humidity in the
vehicle. The specific features of the winter
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes.
atmosphere (marine areas or a damp climate);
tires lead to lower performance under normal environmental conditions or on long highway trips, compared to the standard tires. Therefore, their use should be limited to the situations and performance for which they have been type-approved. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide all necessary information about fitting winter tires on the vehicle.
Do not use oven cleaner that may affect and damage the brake calipers. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel rim protective finish.
· seasonal environmental conditions;
· salt scattered on the roadbed to melt ice and snow.
The abrasive action of wind-carried atmospheric dust and sand, mud and stones should not be underestimated. On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted the best technological solutions to protect the bodywork from corrosion. The main measures are:
NOTE: · We recommend fitting winter tires
on the vehicle at temperatures below 45 °F (7°C) since the driving performance of summer tires is reduced at low temperatures. Summer tires may be permanently damaged at extremely low temperatures.
· Comply with all state and local laws
· paint products and systems that give
the vehicle particular resistance to
7
corrosion and abrasion;
· use of galvanized (or pre-treated)
metal sheets which are highly
resistant to corrosion in the most exposed parts;
· spraying of the underbody, engine
compartment, insides of wheel
housings, and other structures with
397
Maintenance and Care
wax products having high protective
NOTE:
power;
The use of alcohol-based products for
· spraying of plastic materials, with a protective function, in the most
cleaning the metal surfaces in the engine compartment and/or the trunk
exposed points: underneath the doors, inside part of the mud guards,
may deteriorate the protective paint. It is recommended to use water-based
edges, etc.;
products.
· use of ventilated box sections, coated with protective wax products, to
Car Wash
avoid condensation and trapped
For correct washing:
water which could encourage the formation of internal rust.
Normal paint maintenance consists in washing, the frequency of which
· wet the bodywork with a low pressure water jet;
Useful Advice to Keep the
depends on the conditions of use and of the environment. For example, if
· pass a sponge with a light detergent
Bodywork in Good Condition
driving the vehicle in areas where
solution over the bodywork,
Paint
there is high atmospheric pollution or
frequently rinsing the sponge;
The paintwork does not only have an aesthetic function but also protects the underlying metal sheets. In the event
the roads are spread with anti-freeze salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more frequently.
· rinse well with water and dry with an air jet or chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with the parts that are less visible, such as
of abrasions or deep scratches, we
the door, liftgate and lid bays,
recommend to have the necessary
ENVIRONMENTAL!
headlight edges, in which water can
touch-ups made immediately, to avoid Detergents pollute water. Therefore
be trapped more easily.
7
any rust formation. Touch-ups do not feature particular difficulties, even on
the vehicle should be washed in areas You are recommended not to take the
equipped for the collection and
vehicle immediately into an enclosed
metallic finishes.
purification of the fluids used for
environment, but leave it in the open
For all paint touch-ups, use only
washing.
air so as to allow the water to
original products indicated on the
evaporate.
plate applied on the lower left side of
Do not wash the vehicle after it has
the hood.
been left in the sun or when the hood
is hot: the paint gloss could be
affected.
398
Maintenance and Care
External plastic parts must be cleaned Glass Surfaces
Do not use abrasive cleaning
with the same procedure followed for All glass surfaces should be cleaned on components, solvents, steel wool or
the normal washing of the bodywork. a regular basis with any commercial
other aggressive material to clean the
Avoid, as far as possible, parking the
household-type glass cleaner.
lenses.
vehicle under trees; the resinous
Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Condensation and Fogging on the
substances that very often drop from Use caution when cleaning the inside Light Clusters
the trees give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of originating corrosive processes. It is important that the drain holes in the lower sides of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear and open.
rear window on the liftgate equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
With cold or humid climates, after a driving rain or after cleaning the car, the surface of the front and rear light clusters could fog and/or form condensate drops on the inside. This is a natural phenomenon due to the temperature and humidity differences between the lens internal and
Labels can be peeled off after soaking external surface, which nevertheless
CAUTION!
with warm water. When cleaning is performed, keep all
does not indicate a fault and does not compromise the regular operation of
· Bird droppings must be washed off
metal objects at a safe distance from
the lights. The fogging/condensate
immediately and thoroughly, since
the window.
disappears when switching on the
their acidity is particularly corrosive. Cleaning Headlights
lights, starting from the centre of the
· To provide better protection for the paint, polish the vehicle at intervals with a suitable product leaving a
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that diffuser and gradually going to the
are lighter and less susceptible to
edges.
protective film on the paint.
· If the vehicle is washed using high-pressure water jets or cleaners, it is important that the nozzle of the jet be kept at a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm) from the bodywork to avoid damaging it.
stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
Moldings and Aluminum Trims
· For cleaning moldings and aluminum trims, avoid the use of acidic or alkaline cleaning agents that can destroy the protecting surface treatment.
· After washing aluminum trim with warm water, apply the cleaning
7
a mild soap solution followed by
agent with a clean tissue or a soft
rinsing.
sponge on the surface. Do not use
399
Maintenance and Care
any other equipment such as brushes, steel wool, abrasives or any other equipment for cleaning.
In order to prevent water from entering the vehicle between the upper edge of the glass window and
Interior Maintenance and Care
· After cleaning, please rinse the aluminum trim with a lot of clear water.
· While cleaning in the car, please make sure that the moldings and aluminum trims only get in contact with soft brushes or textiles.
Engine Compartment
At the end of each winter season, carefully wash the engine compartment, remembering to avoid directing the jet of water for too long on the electric parts. To perform this operation, you must contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
the door outline on the bodywork, while the car is being washed, it is advisable to disable the "Passive Entry" from the MTC+ System, for further information refer to chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and controls". When deactivating the "Passive Entry", also the "Pre-Short Drop" function will be disabled.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth. Do not use harsh cleaners. The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils stains can be removed easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products. Avoid soaking the leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Pre-Short Drop Function
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original
When in a car wash, if the driver keeps
7
the RKE Transmitter in his/her pocket, or in any place outside the vehicle
within 3.3 ft (1 m) distance, the front
windows will perform a pre-short
condition. Check at regular intervals that there is no water trapped under the mats (due to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) which may cause the metal parts to
drop. This is a shorter drop compared to the normal short drop performed by
oxidize.
the "Passive Entry" function when you
grab the door handle to enter the
CAUTION!
vehicle.
Do not use alcohol, petrol or solvents
400
to clean the instrument cluster's transparent dome, the MTC+ display, the analog clock and the leather upholstery. We recommended the use of "Car Care" products approved by Maserati for the maintenance and care of the interior.
Leather Upholstery Treatment
Have the leather upholstery only treated, as provided in the Scheduled Service Plan, by an Authorized Maserati Dealer which has the required specific products.
Parts in Premium Quality Wood
Remove any dirt with a damp cloth.
NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved "Car Care" products, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
MTC+ Touch Screen
· Do NOT attach any object to the touch screen, doing so can result in damage to the touch screen.
· Do not touch the screen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the touch screen surface.
· Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touch screen. If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol, or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure
Maintenance and Care
to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.
7
401
Maintenance and Care
Vehicle Stored for Long Periods
· Clean and protect polished metal parts with special products available on the market.
Restarting the Vehicle
Before restarting the vehicle after a
If the vehicle is going to be stored for long periods of time, follow the below precautions:
· Cover the vehicle with a long cloth in breathable fabric (available from an Authorized Maserati Dealer). Do not
long period of inactivity, we recommend that you carry out the following operations.
· Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly.
· Store the vehicle on a level surface in a covered, dry and, if possible, ventilated area.
· Select P (Park) and turn off the engine.
· Disconnect the battery (refer "Maintenance-Free Battery" in this section) or connect a battery charger (refer to paragraph "Maintaining Battery Charge" of chapter "Battery
use thick plastic sheets, which do not allow the humidity on the vehicle surface to evaporate. · Inflate the tires up to a pressure which must be 14.5 psi (1 bar) higher than the normally prescribed one, and check it at regular intervals.
NOTE:
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the available "Indoor and
· Check the tires for pressure and for any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is the case, have them replaced.
· Do not dry-rub the external surface of the vehicle: use a damp cloth.
· Visually inspect if there are any fluid leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant etc.).
· Have the engine oil and filter replaced.
· Check the fluid levels in the brake
Statement" in this section).
· Check the battery charge status. During parking, this check must be carried out every three weeks.
Outdoor Car Covers", available in the "Genuine Accessories" range.
system, as well as the engine coolant level.
· Check the air filters and have them replaced if necessary.
Recharge the battery if the open
· Reconnect the battery after checking
7
circuit voltage is lower than 12.2 V. · Check that the parking brake is NOT
WARNING! The tire pressure must be brought
the charge status (refer to "Maintenance-Free Battery" in this
engaged. · Do not empty the engine cooling
system. · Clean and protect the painted parts
back to the prescribed value before reusing the vehicle (see "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications").
section) and perform the initializing procedure if applicable.
· With the transmission in N (Neutral), let the engine idle for several
applying protective wax.
minutes.
In this way, the pneumatic suspension
system will be able to reach the
402
Maintenance and Care
operating pressure and lift the car to the Entry/Exit height (for further
Battery Statement
consume power even when the ignition switch is in the OFF position
details, see "Drive Modes" in section Battery Statement Status of
and the vehicle is not being used.
"Driving").
Charge
Therefore, it is fundamental that the
battery is properly charged to ensure
To avoid problems with ignition
that the engine starts properly and
WARNING! The engine idle must be performed
and/or the electrical system in general when you are driving, the battery charge status is constantly maintained
that all the electrical/electronic systems in the vehicle work efficiently.
outdoors. Exhaust gases contain
and guaranteed by the vehicle's
Maintaining Battery Charge
carbon monoxide which is strongly toxic and potentially lethal.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon
recharge circuit; the main component of which is the alternator. This circuit is only able to supply voltage to the battery when the vehicle is traveling. The warning light on the instrument cluster, will indicate any malfunctions in the recharge circuit or an insufficient battery charge status (example in figure).
If you perform short daily trips (approximately 10 miles/16 km), which correspond to an annual total of 4000 miles/6000 km, or when the vehicle is not going to be used for one week or more, Maserati recommends connecting the vehicle to a battery charger, to save you the trouble of having to recharge the battery. The
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
battery charger will keep the battery
which are known to the State of
charged properly and at the correct
California to cause cancer and birth
voltage levels required by the systems
defects or other reproductive harm. To
and devices in the vehicle.
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
Before using and/or connecting the battery charger, carefully follow the
7
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
instructions provided.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
If you do not use a battery charger to
or wash your hands frequently when
prevent the battery from going dead
servicing your vehicle. For more
when you are not going to use the
information go to:
The vehicle contains advanced
vehicle for long periods of time, you
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- electronic systems, such as, for
need to check and recharge the
vehicle
example, the alarm system and various battery at least once every three
electronic control modules, which
weeks. Make this check if you perform
403
Maintenance and Care
short daily trips (approximately 10 miles/16 km) which correspond to an annual total of 4000 miles/6000 km. Please note that allowing the battery to go dead repeatedly can cause premature wear on the internal cells and greatly reduce their life, leading to problems with the ignition system and other electrical/electronic systems. The Authorized Maserati Dealer is available to advise you on how to recharge your battery correctly and give you useful information on battery care and maintenance.
NOTE:
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved "Battery Charger and Conditioner", available in the "Genuine Accessories" range.
environment;
· never charge or recharge a battery that has frozen;
· ensure that any sparks or open flames are nowhere near the battery while it is charging;
· before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly.
7
WARNING!
The process of charging or recharging
the battery produces hydrogen, a
dangerous gas that can explode and
cause serious injuries. When charging
or recharging the battery, follow the
recommended precautions at all times:
· always charge or recharge the battery in a well-ventilated
404
8 Features and Specifications
Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
405
Features and Specifications
Refillings
NOTE: Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification.
CAUTION! To guarantee vehicle's integrity and maintain performance level always use genuine parts approved and recommended by Maserati.
Refillings and Recommended Products
Parts to be refilled
Quantity
Product specifications
Fuel tank
21 Gallons/80 liters (including Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 91 CLC or AKI (95
4.2 Gallons/16 liters of
RON/85 MON).
reserve)
Engine (3.8 V8)
8.8 Quarts/8.3 litres (max) (MIN MAX difference: 1.5
Quarts/1.4 litres)
Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W-40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: PENNZOIL Platinum Maserati 5W-40 (1).
Engine (3.0 V6)
8.8 Quarts/8.3 liters (max) MIN MAX difference: 1.1
Quarts/1 liter
Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 10W-60 that meet API SN/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: PENNZOIL Platinum Maserati 10W-60 (2).
Windshield and headlight washer fluid tank
Windshield washer fluid
8
tank
5.3 Quarts/5 liters 3.7 Quarts/3.5 liters
Mix of water and solvent, in the proportions indicated on the product package. If the temperature is below 4°F (20°C), use pure solvent. Solvent: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and alcohols. Recommended fluid: WUERTH Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or AREXONS DP1.
406
Features and Specifications
Parts to be refilled Engine cooling circuit (3.8 V8)
Engine cooling circuit (3.0 V6)
Automatic transmission cooling circuit (3) Automatic transmission (3) Differential (3) Front differential (3) Transfer case Braking system
Quantity 15 Quarts/14.2 liters (for dual-zone air conditioning
system) 15.85 Quarts/15 liters (for four-zone air conditioning
system) 9.7 Quarts/9.2 liters (for dual-zone air conditioning
system) 10.56 Quarts/10 liters (for four-zone air conditioning
system) 2.64 Quarts/2.5 liters
8 Quarts/7.6 liters 0.95 Quarts/0.9 liters
0.47 Quarts/0.45 liters 0.65 Quarts/0.62 liters 0.93 Quarts/0.88 liters +/- 4%
Product specifications Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: · ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 · ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 · SAE J 1034 · CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu Up 50/50.
SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. SHELL TF 0951B. SHELL TF 0870. Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 - DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S.
8
CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
407
Features and Specifications
Parts to be refilled
Quantity
Product specifications
Air conditioning system
dual-zone: 24.7 oz +/-0.7 oz (700 g +/-20 g)
four-zone: 30 oz +/-0.7 oz (850 g +/-20 g)
Refrigerant: r134a.
(1) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil "PENNZOIL Platinum 5W-40". (2) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil "PENNZOIL Platinum 10W-60". (3) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance.
WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passengervehicle
Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Maserati only recommends API Certified engine oils.
8
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Damage caused by use of
non-approved chemicals is not covered by the new Vehicle Limited Warranty.
408
Features and Specifications Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-40 (for V8 engine) or 10W-60 (for V6 engine) engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to chapter "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care". Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
8
409
Features and Specifications
Fuel Consumption
NOTE:
· The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner's Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods.
· The specifications described below can change without prior notification. · Actual mileage will vary depending upon driving style, vehicle load, road conditions and ambient temperature.
The fuel consumption values shown (Miles Per Gallon - MPG) are established using EPA test guidelines.
Levante TROFEO
City
(*)
Highway
(*)
Combined
(*)
(*) Data not available at the time of publication.
Levante GTS (*) (*) (*)
Levante S 14 MPG 19 MPG 16 MPG
Levante 14 MPG 20 MPG 16 MPG
CAUTION!
· Actual fuel economy results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle.
· The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones.
8
410
Features and Specifications
Technical Data
NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner's Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can vary from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods.
Engine Data
Data
Levante TROFEO
Levante GTS
Cylinder number and position
8 - 90° V
8 - 90° V
Number of valves per cylinder
4
4
Bore x stroke
86.5 x 80.8 mm
86.5 x 80.8 mm
Total displacement
3799 cu.cm
3799 cu.cm
Compression ratio
4.44 : 1
4.44 : 1
Maximum power output (EC)
441 kW 591 hp 404 kW 550 hp
- corresponding RPM
6750 rpm
6000 rpm
Peak and overboost torque (EC) 538 lb-ft (730 N-m) 538 lb-ft (730 N-m)
- corresponding RPM
2500 5000 rpm
2500 5000 rpm
Values obtained with 94 AKI (98 RON) unleaded gasoline.
Levante S 6 - 60° V
4 86.5 x 84.5 mm
2979 cu.cm 9.7 : 1
316 kW 424 hp 5750 rpm
428 lb-ft (580 N-m) 2000 4750 rpm
Levante 6 - 60° V
4 86.5 x 84.5 mm
2979 cu.cm 9.7 : 1
257 kW 345 hp 5750 rpm
369 lb-ft (500 N-m) 1750 4750 rpm
Engine Properties
Timing
The timing system uses two overhead camshafts with timing variator.
Timing system control
Timing chain.
8
Supply
Over-supplied with turbocharger and related intercooler for each bank.
Injection Ignition
High-pressure (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU.
411
Features and Specifications
Brakes
Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four wheels. The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) acts on the rear wheels.
Front disc diameter Rear disc diameter
Levante TROFEO - GTS - S Drilled disc: 15 in (380 mm) Drilled disc: 13 in (330 mm)
Levante 13.6 in (345 mm) 13 in (330 mm)
Transmission
Automatic transmission with 8 speeds, torque converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip function. Sequential and traditional control type. TRANSAXLE-type transmission. Traction system equipped with rear self-locking differential.
Suspension
Front suspensions with double wishbone independent wheels. Multilink system rear suspensions on independent wheels. The air suspension system features air spring units at both axles and a closed air supply unit.
Steering
Electric Power Steering (EPS) system, axis parallel type. Steering diameter = 13.72 yd (12.55 m). No. of steering wheel turns = 1.41 (to the left and right).
8
412
Features and Specifications
Wheels
NOTE: · Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with "MGT" logo specifically designed for its models. · In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original
size. · Optionally tires may have "ZR" in the size description combined with speed index (e.g. 265/45 ZR20 104Y). · In case of staggered tires, front and rear rims cannot be swapped. · Only 19" rear tires can be equipped with special chain with front anchorage. Snow chains cannot be used (all tires).
WARNING! · The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations
in force in the Country you are driving in.
· Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires. Danger: risk of accident!
Standard Wheel Dimension
Allowed tires size
Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport)
Light alloy rims
19" x 8,5J (front and rear)
20" x 9J (front and rear)
- Front tires - All season
265/50 R19 110W
265/45 R20 104W
- Rear tires - All season
265/50 R19 110W
265/45 R20 104W
Spare rim
18" x 6B
- Spare tire
195/75 R18
8
413
Features and Specifications
Allowed tires size Light alloy rims - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season Spare rim - Spare tire
Allowed tires size Light alloy rims - Front tires - Rear tires Spare rim - Spare tire
Optional Wheel Dimension Allowed tires size Light alloy rims - Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season
8
- Rear tires - All season Light alloy rims
- Front tires
414
Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport)
19" x 8,5J (front) 19" x 10,5J (rear)
20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear)
265/50 R19 110W
265/45 R20 104W
295/45 R19 113W
295/40 R20 106W
18" x 6B
195/75 R18
Levante TROFEO 21" x 9J (front) 21" x 10,5J (rear) 265/40 R21 101Y 295/35 R21 103Y
Levante GTS 20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear) 265/45 R20 104Y 295/40 R20 106Y 18" x 6B 195/75 18
Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) 19" x 8,5J (front and rear) 265/50 R19 110Y 265/50 R19 110Y (Standard tire) (Standard tire) 19" x 8,5J (front) 19" x 10,5J (rear) 265/50 R19 110Y
Levante (GranSport)
19" x 8,5J (front) 19" x 10,5J (rear) 265/50 R19 110Y
Allowed tires size - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season Light alloy rims - Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season
Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season Light alloy rims - Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season
Features and Specifications
Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport)
295/45 R19 113Y
295/45 R19 113Y
265/50 R19 110W
265/50 R19 110W
295/45 R19 113W
295/45 R19 113W
20" x 9J (front and rear)
20" x 9J (front and rear)
265/45 R20 104Y
265/45 R20 104Y
265/45 R20 104Y
265/45 R20 104Y
265/45 R20 104W
(Standard tire)
265/45 R20 104W
(Standard tire)
20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear)
20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear)
265/45 R20 104Y
265/45 R20 104Y
295/40 R20 106Y
295/40 R20 106Y
265/45 R20 104W
265/45 R20 104W
295/40 R20 106W
295/40 R20 106W
21" x 9J (front and rear)
21" x 9J (front and rear)
265/40 R21 101Y
265/40 R21 101Y
265/40 R21 101Y
265/40 R21 101Y
265/40 R21 105W
265/40 R21 105W
265/40 R21 105W
265/40 R21 105W
21" x 9J (front)
21" x 9J (front)
21" x 10,5J (rear)
21" x 10,5J (rear)
265/40 R21 101Y
265/40 R21 101Y
8
295/35 R21 103Y
295/35 R21 103Y
265/40 R21 105W
265/40 R21 105W
415
Features and Specifications
Allowed tires size - Rear tires - All season
Allowed tires size
Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season
Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season
Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season
8
Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) 295/35 R21 107W
Levante (GranSport) 295/35 R21 107W
Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) 19" x 8,5J (front) 19" x 10,5J (rear) 265/50 R19 110Y 295/45 R19 113Y (Standard tire) (Standard tire) 20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear) 265/45 R20 104Y 295/40 R20 106Y 265/45 R20 104W 295/40 R20 106W 21" x 9J (front) 21" x 10,5J (rear) 265/40 R21 101Y 295/35 R21 103Y 265/40 R21 105W 295/35 R21 107W
Levante S (GranSport)
20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear) 265/45 R20 104Y 295/40 R20 106Y (Standard tire) (Standard tire) 21" x 9J (front) 21" x 10,5J (rear) 265/40 R21 101Y 295/35 R21 103Y 265/40 R21 105W 295/35 R21 107W
416
Allowed tires size
Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season
Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season Light alloy rims
- Front tires - Rear tires - Front tires - All season - Rear tires - All season
Levante TROFEO
21" x 9J (front) 21" x 10,5J (rear) (Standard tire) (Standard tire) 265/40 R21 105W 295/35 R21 107W 22" x 9J (front) 22" x 10,5J (rear) 265/35 R22 295/30 R22 265/35 R22 295/30 R22
Features and Specifications
Levante GTS 20" x 9J (front) 20" x 10,5J (rear) (Standard tire) (Standard tire) 265/45 R20 104W 295/40 R20 106W 21" x 9J (front) 21" x 10,5J (rear) 265/40 R21 101Y 295/35 R21 103Y 265/45 R21 105W 295/35 R21 107W 22" x 9J (front) 22" x 10,5J (rear) 265/35 R22 295/30 R22 265/35 R22 295/30 R22
8
417
Features and Specifications
Performance
NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification.
Levante TROFEO
Levante GTS
Maximum speed
190 mph (305 km/h) 183 mph (294 km/h)
Accelerations from 0 to 60 mph
3.8 seconds
4.1 seconds
(*) Values obtained with 94 AKI (98 RON) unleaded gasoline.
Levante S 164 mph (264 km/h) 5.0 seconds
Levante 156 mph (251 km/h) 5.8 seconds
Weights
NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification.
Levante TROFEO - GTS
Levante S - Levante
Unladen vehicle weight with tank and reservoirs filled, tools and accessories (*)
5070 lb / 2300 kg (2624 lb / 1190 kg front axle 2447 lb / 1110 kg rear axle)
4994 lb / 2265 kg (2540 lb/1152 kg front axle 2454 lb/1113 kg rear axle)
Approved Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
6228 lb / 2825 kg (2932 lb / 1330 kg front axle 3296 lb / 1495 kg rear axle)
6116 lb / 2780 kg (2827 lb/1285 kg front axle 3289 lb/1495 kg rear axle)
Maximum load on the roof rails
176 lb / 80 kg
(*) Base configuration without options.
8
418
Features and Specifications
Trailer Towing Weights NOTE: · On the TROFEO version you can not install the trailer tongue. · Follow trailer manufacturer recommendations, never exceed trailer tow weights provided.
Towable loads: trailer with brakes Towable loads: trailer without brakes Maximum load on tow hitch
5952 lb/2700 kg (GTS: 3306 lb/1500 kg) 1500 lb (680 kg ) 474 lb (215 kg)
Dimensions
Wheel base
118.2 in (3004 mm )
Overall length
197 in (5003 mm)
Overall width without mirrors
77.5 in (1968 mm)
Overall width with mirrors
85 in (2158 mm)
Front track
63.9 in (1624 mm)
Rear track
65.9 in (1676 mm)
Front overhang
38 in (966 mm)
Rear overhang
40.6 in (1033 mm)
Overall height (*)
66.1 in (1679 mm)
Ground clearance (*)
8 in (205 mm)
Trunk compartment volume
14.9 cu.ft. (422 l )
Cargo area length
41 in (1040 mm)
8
Cargo area length with rear seatbacks folded down
79.8-71 in (2027-1803 mm)
Cargo area width
46.7-39.5 in (1186-1002 mm)
(*) In "Normal" ride height and with standard rims and tires.
419
Features and Specifications
Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below: · PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage. · FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage. · CC (Comfort Condition) : not more than 80 mph (130 km/h). NOTE: · For more information about the pressure check methods, see "Tires General Information" in section "Driving". · Tire inflation pressure values are also indicated on the information label applied to the driver's side rear door pillar.
WARNING! · Improperly inflated tires are dangerous. · Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. · Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes can cause damage that results
in tire failure. · Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. · Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. · Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
420
Features and Specifications
Wheel
Pressure
Tire Type
Rim
PLC
Front
Rear
CC
Front
Rear
FLC/High speed
Front
Rear
18" - 19" 20"
250 kPa - 36 psi 270 kPa - 39 psi
(2.5 bar)
(2.7 bar)
Summer
21"
270 kPa - 39 psi 310 kPa - 45 psi
(2.7 bar)
(3.1 bar)
22"
320 kPa - 46 psi 340 kPa - 49 psi
(3.2 bar)
(3.4 bar)
18"
250 kPa - 36 psi 290 kPa - 42 psi
(2.5 bar)
(2.9 bar)
All Season
19" 20" - 21"
230 kPa 2.3 bar - 33
psi
250 kPa 2.5 bar - 36
psi
200 kPa 2.0 bar - 29
psi
220 kPa 2.2 bar - 32
psi
250 kPa - 36 psi (2.5 bar)
270 kPa - 39 psi (2.7 bar)
(265/50) 290 kPa - 42 psi
(2.9 bar)
(295/45) 270 kPa - 39 psi
(2.7 bar)
(265/45) 310 kPa - 45 psi
(3.1 bar)
(295/40) 290 kPa - 42 psi
(2.9 bar)
22"
310 kPa - 45 psi 340 kPa - 49 psi
(3.1 bar)
(3.4 bar)
8
Spare
18"
350 kPa - 51 psi (3.5 bar) (Max 50 mph - 80 km/h)
421
Features and Specifications
422
9 Index
423
Index
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Four-zone Climate Controls . . . .221 Bluetooth, Customer settings . . . . .208
Accessories
Alarm, Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . .27 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . .397
Aftermarket Parts and Accessories
ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor). .63 Pre-Short Drop Function . . . . . .400
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and
Protection from Atmospheric
Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA . . . .310 Electronic Brake-force Distribution
Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . .286 (EBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Useful Advice to Keep the Bodywork
Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . .289 Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 in Good Condition . . . . . . . . . .398
Display Warnings and
Assistance, if you need . . . . . . . . . .11 Brakes
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ATC (Automatic Temperature
Brake and Stability Control System
Precautions while Driving with
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Audio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Brake Overheating . . . . . . . . . .280
Setting the Following Distance . .291 Audio Controls on Central
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Setting the Speed . . . . . . . . . . .290 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Manual Release of Parking
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .192 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Advanced Front Air Bag
Audio, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Air Bag Deployment Result . . . . .71 Automatic Transmission
Air Bag Deployment Sensors and
Manual Release of Transmission .360 Capacity/Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 AUX, USB and SD Memory Card
Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Air Bag System Components. . . . .66 Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Accessories Compartment . . . . .142
Front Air Bag Inflator Units . . . . .70 AWD, All-Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . .243 Cargo Area Extension . . . . . . . .143
Passenger Air bag Labels . . . . . . .20
Installing the Cargo Net . . . . . . .144
Supplemental Restraint System
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . .275 Loading with Rear Seatbacks Folded
(SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Supplemental Seat-mounted Side
Battery Recharge . . . . . . . . . . .384 Luggage Fasteners and
Air Bags (SAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Battery Remote Posts Position. . .358 Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Maintaining Battery Charge . . . .403 Ski and Snowboard Bag
Curtain (SABIC). . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 To Disconnect the Battery . . . . .382 Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Transport of persons with
To Reconnect the Battery . . . . . .383 Trunk Compartment Cover . . . . .142
disability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Blind Spot Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .139
Air Conditioning (A/C) System . . . .214 Blind Spot Alert (BSA)
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . .74
9
A/C Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . .154 BSA System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Children too large for Booster
Dual-zone Climate Controls . . . .214 RCP - Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . .308 Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
424
Index
Infants and Child Restraints . . . . .74 Lock/Unlock Door Flashlight . . . .34 Engine Oil Level Check . . . . . . .377
Installing Child Restraint Systems
Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . .40 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
using the Vehicle Seat Belt
Rear Doors Components . . . . . . .97 Normal Starting of the Engine . .228
equipped with ALR. . . . . . . . . . .76 Soft Door Close System . . . . . . . .41 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . .281
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Entry/Exit, lights on . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Children (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Key fob 1st Press . . . . . . . . . . . .34 EPB (Electric Parking Brake). . . . . .268
Older Children and Child
Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob. .33 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) . .273
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 DPF System
Tips on getting the most out of your DPF Filter Replacement . . . . . . .377 Filters
child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 "Drive Away Inhibit" strategy . . . .272 A/C System Air Filter
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Drive Mode, controls . . . . . . . . . .244 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Clock, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Setting Ride Height . . . . . . . . .258 Engine Air Filter Replacement . .379
Console
Setting the Drive Mode . . . . . . .245 Forward Collision Warning (FCW). .297
Central Console Components . . . .95 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Fuel
Front Dome Console
Before the Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . .335
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Emergency Fuel Filler Door
Controls Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Driving in Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Cruise Control
Driving in Snow and Wet Grass. .266 Emissions Inspection and
Cruise Control Adaptive (ACC) . .286 Driving in the Mountains. . . . . .340 Maintenance Programs . . . . . . .369
Electronic Cruise Control (CC) . . .282 Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . .339 Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . .410
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Driving on Snow or Ice . . . . . . .340 Fuel Filter Service . . . . . . . . . . .377
Front Passengers Cupholders . . .134 Safe Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . .334
Rear Passengers Cupholders . . . .135 DRL (Daytime Running Light) . . . .116 Fuel System Warnings . . . . . . . .335
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . .334
Dashboard Compartment . . . . . . .210 EDR (Event Data Recorder) . . . . . . .73 Low Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . .181
Dashboard Components . . . . . . . . .94 Electronic Cruise Control. . . . . . . .282 Materials Added to Fuel . . . . . .335
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MMT in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . .335
Doors
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . .128 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . .334
Child Protection Door Lock
In the Event of an Accident . . . .350 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Fuses Position . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Use the Vehicle Tow Hook . . . . .360 Fuses Replacement . . . . . . . . . .386
Doors Manual Lock. . . . . . . . . . .39 Engine
9
Front Doors Components . . . . . .96 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .374 Glove Box Lock Feature . . . . . . . .211
425
Index
Handholds and Cloth Hooks . . . .138 Interiors Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Power Liftgate Operation . . . . . .50
iPad Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Unlatch the Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .34
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . .350 iPod Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .115
Highway Assist - HAS . . . . . . . . . .313 Jump Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . .358 Automatic Headlights Leveling . .126
Hill Descend Control (HDC) . . . . . .277
Automatic High Beam . . . . . . . .120
HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Bi-Xenon Headlight. . . . . . . . . .117
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Key fob Battery Replacement . . . .35 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .393
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . .153 Preventing Inadvertent Locking of
Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . .153 key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the
Dome Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Hood
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 DRL, Daytime Running Lights . . .116
Open and Close the Hood . . . . . .56 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Hood Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Requiring and setting Additional
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . .115
HSA (Hill Start Assist) . . . . . . . . . .276 Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Headlight with AFS . . . . . . . . . .117
Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . .33 High Beam and Flashing . . . . . .124
Identification Labels . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . .30
Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . .26 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . .301 Multifunction Lever. . . . . . . . . .124
Indicator Lights/Warning Lights
Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 SmartBeam System . . . . . . . . . .116
Air Bag Warning Light. . . . . . . . .90 Brake Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .375 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
TFT Display: Menus and Settings .165 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .374 Loading the Vehicle
TFT Display: Warning/Indicator
Engine Oil Level Check. . . . . . . .374 Loading with Rear Seatbacks
Lights of Set Modes/Functions. . .178 Fluid Level Check for Coolant
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Warning and Indicator Lights on
Transmission System . . . . . . . . .379 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .139
Analog Instrument . . . . . . . . . .161 Transmission Oil Check. . . . . . . .378
Infotainment System. . . . . . . . . . .185 Washer/Headlight Fluid, adding .376 Main- and Submenu . . . . . . . . . . .166
Main Menu Bar on MTC+
Liftgate
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Automatic Opening and Closing
A/C System Maintenance . . . . . .395
Manual Controls and Devices . . .186 Movement of the Power Liftgate .51 Air Bag System Maintenance . . . .72
Personalized the Main Menu Bar.188 Liftgate and Hood Ajar
Bodywork Maintenance and
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
9
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . .94
Power Liftgate Emergency
Emissions Inspection and
Interior Maintenance and Care. . . .400 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Maintenance Programs . . . . . . .369
426
Index
Interior Maintenance and Care. .400 Safety and Driving Assistance . . .202 Power Outlet Inside the Trunk . .134
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . .371 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . .201 Rear Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . .134
Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . .367
Power Sunshades on Rear Door
Scheduled Maintenance Service .364 Occupant Restraint System . . . . . . .57 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . .365 Off-road Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . .396 After Driving Off-road. . . . . . . .267 Rear Parking Camera . . . . . . . . . . .85
Maserati Roadside Assistance
Driving in Snow and Wet Grass. .266 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Driving Through Water . . . . . . .265 Fuel Filler Neck Access . . . . . . . .336
Mesh Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . .267 Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . .37
Messages on Main Display Area . . .165 On Board Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . .281 Restarting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . .402
MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light). .161 ORC (Occupant Restraint
Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . .74
External Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .110
RKE (Remote Keyless Entry)
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Integrated External Rearview Mirror
Enabling and Disabling Park
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . .17
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Roll-Over Mitigation (ROM). . . . . .276
Internal Rearview Mirror . . . . . .112 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Roll-Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Mirrors Positioning . . . . . . . . . .111 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Roof Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .110 Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . .42
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse . . . . . . . .111 Pedals, adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Safety
MTC+ "Controls" Screen . . . . . . . .195 Pedestrian Emergency Braking
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . .74
MTC+ Settings - Customer
(PEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Reporting Safety Defects. . . . . . .12
Programmable Features . . . . . . .198 Pets, transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Safety Net for Cargo Area . . . . . . .144
Auto-On Comfort & Remote
Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Scheduled Maintenance Service . . .364
Clear Personal Data . . . . . . . . .210 Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Scheduled Service Plan
Clock & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Phone/Bluetooth, Customer
Scheduled Maintenance
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Doors & Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Engine Off Options . . . . . . . . . .206 Power Outlet Inside the Central
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Pneumatic Suspension. . . . . . . .206 Power Outlet Inside the
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
9
Restore Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 System (SBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
427
Index
Passenger Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . .61 Spare Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Symbols of Prohibitions and
Seat Belt Reminder Light . . . . . .164 SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Compulsory Measures . . . . . . . . .14
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . .65 System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Seat Belts Pretensioners. . . . . . . .63 Start&Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Tank fuel refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Three-Point Seat Belts . . . . . . . . .59 Occupant Safety Function . . . . .232 TCS (Traction Control System). . . . .275
Three-Point Seat Belts Height
Start&Stop Active Indicator . . . .163 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Start&Stop Disable Indicator. . . .182 Telltales
Three-Point Seat Belts Untwisting
Start&Stop Failure Indicator
Telltales on Speedometer . . . . . .161
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Telltales on Tachometer . . . . . . .163
Three-Point Seat Belts Use
Start&Stop Function Disabling
Tires
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Change a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Using the Seat Belt in Automatic
Start&Stop Menu . . . . . . . . . . .172 Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . .329
Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) . . .63 Start&Stop System Failure . . . . .234 Department of Transportation
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Start the Engine
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . .325
Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . .101 Engine Start Failure. . . . . . . . . .229 General Information . . . . . . . . .321
Easy Entry/Exit Seats . . . . . . . . .102 Engine Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .420
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . .99 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Pneumatic Suspension Mode for
Front Power Seats. . . . . . . . . . . .97 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . .108 Wheel Change . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Front Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . .100 Phone and Voice Controls on
Punctured Tire, use . . . . . . . . . .351
Power Lumbar Seats . . . . . . . . . .98 Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . .327
Rear Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Sunroof
Tire Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Rear Seat Folding Seatback . . . .103 Initialization Procedure . . . . . . .149 Tire Pressure Checkup . . . . . . . .326
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . .149 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . .321
Rear Side Heated Seats . . . . . . .104 Slide Opening Sunroof. . . . . . . .148 TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring
Seat Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . .150 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Venting Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .326
Siri Smart Personal Assistant . . . . .225 Sunshades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
SmartBeam System . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Smoking Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Surround View Camera System . . . .87 Towing
Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . .360
Spare parts service
Danger Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .360
9
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . .13
Use the Vehicle Tow Hook . . . . .360 Vehicle Towing Conditions . . . . .360
428
TPMS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Tire Pressure Low Warning. . . . .331 TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . .333
Traffic Sign Assist - TSA . . . . . . . . .319 Trailer Sway Mitigation (TSM) . . . .276 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Arranging Load on Trailer . . . . .341 Tire Pressure Adjustment . . . . . .341 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Trailer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Trailer Towing Weight . . . . . . . .341 Transmission, Automatic . . . . . . . .234 Automatic Transmission Lever . .235 Automatic Transmission Range . .238 Malfunction and Overheating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Transmitter, Key fob RKE Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . . .33 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .19 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . .402 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
TFT Display: Menus and Settings .165 TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions . .178 Warning and Indicator Lights on Analog Instrument . . . . . . . . . .161 Warnings when Driving . . . . . . . . .15 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Warranty Information. . . . . . . . .12 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . .396 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Auto Down/Auto Up Feature . . . .46 Open the Windows with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off . . . .47 Reset Auto-Up/Down . . . . . . . . .47 Window and Sunshade Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . .129 Headlight On with Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Rain Sensing Windshield Wipers .130 Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . .132 Windshield Washer and Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . .129 Wiper Blade Maintenance . . . . .130
Warning icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Warning Lights/Indicator Lights
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . .90
Index
9
429
Maserati S.p.A. & Maserati North America, Inc. reserve the right to make changes and/or modifications to the content and all technical information and specifications without prior notification.
Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print.
© 2018. Maserati S.p.A. All rights reserved.
Publication n. 910042396 - 1st Edition - 03/2018 This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A.
*1682166* *1682166*
*910042396* *910042396*
W W W. M A S E R AT I .C O M MASERATI SPA · VIALE CIRO MENOTTI, 322 · I-41121 MODENA
Adobe InDesign CC 2015 (Windows) Adobe PDF Library 15.0